EUROPEAN UNION

Delegation of the European Commission to Bosnia and Herzegovina

Sarajevo, 23rd July 2007

Our ref.: Europeaid/125-893/L/WKS/BA

Tender No: EC/BIH/07/014
SUBJECT: INVITATION TO TENDER FOR Rehabilitation of the Court Building in Sarajevo hosting
Sarajevo Municipal Court and Sarajevo Cantonal Court
Further to your enquiry regarding the publication of the above-mentioned invitation to tender, please find
enclosed the following documents, which constitute the tender dossier:
VOLUME 1
SECTION 1 : INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS
SECTION 2 : TENDER FORM
Appendix to the Tender
SECTION 3 : TENDER GUARANTEE FORM
SECTION 4 : QUESTIONNAIRE
Additional notice to tenderers
General information about the tenderer .............................. Form 4.1
Organisation chart............................................................... Form 4.2
Power of attorney................................................................ Form 4.3
Financial statement ............................................................. Form 4.4
a) Financial identification form ......................................... Form 4.5
b) Legal entity form
Technical qualifications.....................................Forms 4.6.1 to 4.6.9
Overview of the tenderers personnel........................... Form 4.6.1.1
Personnel to be employed on the contract .................... Form 4.6.1.2
Professional experience of key personnel
Curriculum vitae ........................................................... Form 4.6.1.3
Plant ................................................................................. Form 4.6.2
Workplan and programme ............................................... Form 4.6.3
Experience as contractor.................................................. Form 4.6.4
Data on joint ventures...................................................... Form 4.6.5
Litigation history ............................................................. Form 4.6.6
Quality assurance system(s) ............................................ Form 4.6.7
Accommodation for the supervisor ................................. Form 4.6.8
Further information.. Form 4.6.9
SECTION 5 : EVALUATION GRID AND OTHER ANNEXES

2007

Page 1 of 240

VOLUME 2
SECTION 1 :CONTRACT FORM
SECTION 2 :GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WORKS CONTRACTS
SECTION 3 :SPECIAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 4 :SPECIMEN PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
SECTION 5 :SPECIMEN PREFINANCING PAYMENT GUARANTEE
SECTION 6 :SPECIMEN RETENTION GUARANTEE
VOLUME 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 4
MODEL FINANCIAL BID
BREAKDOWN OF THE OVERALL PRICE IN LUMP SUM CONTRACTS
BILL OF QUANTITIES IN UNIT PRICE CONTRACTS
BREAKDOWN OF THE OVERALL PRICE
BILL OF QUANTITIES
VOLUME 5
DESIGN DOCUMENTS, INCLUDING DRAWINGS
For full information about procurement procedures please consult the Practical Guide to contract
procedures for EC external actions and its annexes, which can be downloaded from the following web
page: http://ec.europa.eu/europeaid/work/procedures/index_en.htm.
We look forward to receiving your tender and the accompanying tender guarantee according to the
Instructions to Tenderers point 14.1.2. If you decide not to submit a tender, we would be grateful if you
could inform us in writing, stating the reasons for your decision.
Yours sincerely,

Marc Vanbrabant
Head of Contract and Finance

2007

Page 2 of 240

VOLUME 1
SECTION 1: INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS

2007

Page 3 of 240

SECTION I

INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS

PUBLICATION REF.: Europeaid/125-893/L/WKS/BA

In submitting a tender, the tenderer accepts in full and without restriction the special and general
conditions governing this contract as the sole basis of this tendering procedure, whatever his own
conditions of sale may be, which he hereby waives. Tenderers are expected to examine carefully
and comply with all instructions, forms, contract provisions and specifications contained in this
tender dossier. Failure to submit a tender containing all the required information and
documentation within the deadline specified will lead to the rejection of the tender. No account can
be taken of any reservation in the tender as regards the tender dossier; any reservation may result
in the immediate rejection of the tender without further evaluation.
These Instructions set out the rules for the submission, selection and implementation of contracts
financed under this call for tenders, in conformity with the provisions of the Practical Guide to
contract procedures for EC external actions, which is applicable to the present call (available on the
Internet at this address: http://ec.europa.eu/europeaid/work/procedures/index_en.htm).

2007

Page 4 of 240

CONTENTS
GENERAL PART -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
1
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
2
FINANCING ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
3
PARTICIPATION------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
4
INFORMATION/DOCUMENTS TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE TENDERER--------------------- 7
5
ONLY ONE TENDER PER TENDERER--------------------------------------------------------------10
6
TENDER EXPENSES -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
7
SITE INSPECTION----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11
TENDERS DOCUMENTS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11
8
CONTENT OF TENDER DOCUMENTS--------------------------------------------------------------11
9
EXPLANATIONS CONCERNING TENDER DOCUMENTS -------------------------------------11
10 MODIFICATIONS TO TENDER DOCUMENTS ----------------------------------------------------12
11 LABOUR LAW --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
12 LAW
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
TENDERS PREPARATION -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
13 LANGUAGE OF TENDERS -----------------------------------------------------------------------------12
14 CONTENT AND PRESENTATION OF TENDER---------------------------------------------------12
15 TENDER PRICES------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------14
16 CURRENCIES OF TENDER AND PAYMENT ------------------------------------------------------14
17 PERIOD OF VALIDITY OF TENDERS ---------------------------------------------------------------14
18 TENDER GUARANTEE ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------15
19 VARIANT SOLUTIONS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------15
20 PREPARATION AND SIGNING OF TENDERS ----------------------------------------------------15
SUBMISSION OF TENDERS -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------16
21 SEALING AND MARKING OF TENDERS ----------------------------------------------------------16
22 EXTENSION OF THE DEADLINE FOR SUBMISSION OF TENDERS ------------------------16
23 LATE TENDERS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16
24 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF TENDERS ------------------------------------------17
OPENING AND EVALUATION OF OFFERS ---------------------------------------------------------------17
25 OPENING OF TENDERS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------17
26 SECRECY OF THE PROCEDURE ---------------------------------------------------------------------17
27 CLARIFICATION OF TENDERS ----------------------------------------------------------------------18
28 CHECKING OF TENDERS AND THEIR COMPLIANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS
OF THE TENDER DOCUMENTS -----------------------------------------------------------------------------18
29 EVALUATION AND COMPARISON OF TENDERS ----------------------------------------------18
30 CORRECTION OF ERRORS ----------------------------------------------------------------------------19
CONTRACT AWARD --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19
31 CRITERIA FOR AWARD --------------------------------------------------------------------------------19
32 RIGHT OF THE CONTRACTING AUTHORITY TO ACCEPT OR REJECT ANY TENDER19
33 NOTIFICATION OF AWARD, CONTRACT CLARIFICATIONS -------------------------------20
34 CONTRACT SIGNING AND PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE----------------------------------21
35 COMMENCEMENT OF WORKS ----------------------------------------------------------------------21
36 ETHICS CLAUSES----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21
37 APPEALS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------22

2007

Page 5 of 240

GENERAL PART
1

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
1.1.

Tenderers must tender for the whole of the works required by the dossier. Tenders will
not be accepted for incomplete lots.

1.2

In accordance with the Commission's rules on international invitations to tender,

preference will not be given to local tenderers.

1.3

The tenderer will bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of the
tender. The Contracting Authority will in no case be responsible or liable for such costs,
whatever the conduct or outcome of the procedure.

FINANCING
2.1

The project is financed by the European Union, in accordance with the rules of CARDS
programme.
The Contracting Authority would comprise the Delegation of the European Commission
to Bosnia and Herzegovina, Embassy of the Kingdom of Norway and the Ministry pof
Justice and Administgration of the Sarajevo Canton.

2.2

The beneficiary of the financing is Sarajevo Municipal Court and Sarajevo Cantonal
Court.

PARTICIPATION

2007

3.1

Participation in tendering is open to all legal persons participating either individually or

in a grouping (consortium) or tenderers which are established in one of the Member
States of the European Union or in a country or territory of the regions covered and/or
authorised by the specific instruments applicable to the CARDS programme under which
the contract is financed. All works, supplies and services must originate in one or more of
these countries. Participation is also open to international organisations. Participation of
natural persons is directly governed by the specific instruments applicable to the
programme under which the contract is financed.

3.2

These terms refer to all nationals of the said states and to all legal entities, companies or
partnerships constituted under, and governed by, the civil, commercial or public law of
such states and having their statutory office, central administration or principal place of
business there. A legal entity, company or partnership having only its statutory office
there must be engaged in an activity which has an effective and continuous link with the
economy of the state concerned. Tenderers must provide evidence of their status.

3.3

Tenderers must certify that they meet these conditions and prove their eligibility by a
document dated less than 1 year earlier than the deadline for the submission of tenders,
drawn up in accordance with their national law or practice or by copies of the original
documents defining the constitution and/or legal status and establishing the place of
registration and/or statutory seat and, if it is different, the place of central administration.
The Contracting Authority may accept other satisfactory evidence that these conditions
are met.

3.4

Natural persons, companies or undertakings meeting the conditions set out in section
2.3.3 of the Practical Guide to contract procedures for EC external actions are excluded
from participation in and the award of contracts. Otherwise they risk exclusion from
Page 6 of 240

contracts and grants in accordance with section 2.3.5 of the Practical Guide. Tenderers or
candidates who have been guilty of making false declarations, have committed substantial
errors or irregularities and fraud, may also be subject to financial penalties representing
10% of the total value of the contract being awarded. That rate may be increased to 20%
in the event of a repeat offence within five years of the first infringement.
3.5

The eligibility requirements detailed in Subclauses 3.1 to 3.4 inclusive also apply to all
members of a joint venture/consortium, all subcontractors and all suppliers to tenderers.
In addition to their own documents and certificates, tenderers must supply the documents
and certificates called for in Subclauses 3.1 to 3.4 in respect of:
- every member of a joint venture/consortium,
- every subcontractor providing more than 10% of the works,
- every supplier providing more than 10% of the works.
Subcontractors and suppliers must also satisfy the eligibility requirements specified in
Subclauses 3.1 and 3.2.
Tenderers must provide a declaration to the effect that they are not in any of the
exclusion situations listed in section 2.3.3 of the Practical Guide to contractual
procedures for EC external actions. This declaration must cover all members of a joint
venture/consortium, all subcontractors and all suppliers to tenderers.

3.6

All materials, equipment and services to be supplied under the contract must originate in
an eligible country, as defined in Subclause 3.1 above. Tenderers must provide an
undertaking signed by their representative certifying their compliance with this
requirement. For these purposes, "origin" means the place where the materials and/or
equipment are mined, grown, produced or manufactured and/or from which services are
provided.

3.7

The upper limit authorised for subcontracting is 30% of the value of the tender.

INFORMATION/DOCUMENTS TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE TENDERER

4.1 All tenderers must supply the following information and documents with their tenders:
4.1.1.
Copies of the most recent documents showing the organisation chart, legal status
and place of registration of the headquarters of the tenderer, a power of attorney
empowering the person signing the tender and all related documentation. These documents
must correspond to the forms in Volume 1, Section 4 of the tender dossier:
[To be completed in accordance with the questionnaire in Volume 1, Section 4]

general information about the tenderer (Form 4.1)

organisation chart (Form 4.2)

power of attorney (Form 4.3).

4.1.2.
Evidence showing that the liquid assets and access to credit facilities are
adequate for this contract, confirmed by a financial statement for the last 3 years verified
by a chartered accountant. This evidence must be provided using Form 4.4, Financial
statement, in Volume 1, Section 4 of the tender documents.

2007

Page 7 of 240

4.1.3.
Financial projections for the two years ahead. This information must follow
Form 4.4, Financial statement, provided in accordance with Volume 1, Section 4 of the
tender documents.
4.1.4
Financial identification form (Form 4.5a, Volume 1) and Legal Entity File (Form
4.5b, Volume 1).
4.1.5.
Information about the tenderer's technical qualifications. This information must
follow the forms in Volume 1, Section 4 of the tender documents and include:

a presentation of the tenderer's organisation, including the total number of staff

employed (Form 4.6.1.1),

a list of the staff proposed for the execution of the contract, with the CVs of key
staff (Forms 4.6.1.2 and 4.6.1.3),
a list of plant for execution of the contract. The descriptions must demonstrate
the tenderer's ability to complete the works.
The tenderer must indicate whether such equipment is owned, hired or used by a
subcontractor. Manufacturer's documents fully describing the equipment must be
submitted with the tender (Form 4.6.2);

2007

a list of materials and any supplies intended for use in the works, stating their
origin;

a work programme with brief descriptions of major activities (Form 4.6.3),

showing the sequence and proposed timetable for the execution of the works. In
particular, the proposal shall detail the temporary and permanent works to be
constructed. The tenderer must take account of the prevailing weather conditions
and the requirement to prepare designs and obtain building permits prior to the
execution of construction works. The tenderer must also submit a comprehensive
method statement, with drawings if necessary, showing the methods by which he
proposes to carry out the works. In particular, the tenderer must indicate the
numbers, types and capacities of the plant and personnel he proposes to use on
the major activities of work;

a graphic work schedule (bar chart) showing times and duties allocated for
employees for this contract (Form 4.6.3);

data concerning subcontractors and the percentage of works to be subcontracted

(Form 4.6.3);

evidence of relevant experience in execution of works of a similar nature,

including the nature and value of the relevant contracts, as well as works in hand
and contractually committed (Form 4.6.4). The evidence shall include successful
experience as the prime contractor. The sole tenderer or joint venture/consortium
as a whole must have completed at least 2 (two) construction/ereconstruction
projects, of similar complexity and nature (referent projects totalling at least
5000m2) comparable to the works concerned over the past 5 (five) years. The
tenderer shall present evidence proving the above required experience. Ongoing
works contracts with more than 75% works progress documented would also be
taken in consideration.

information regarding the proposed site office, if any (Form 4.6.3);

an outline of the quality assurance system(s) to be used (Form 4.6.7).

if appropriate, information about tenderers involved in a joint venture/consortium

(Form 4.6.5);
Page 8 of 240

4.2

details of their litigation history over the last 3 years (Form 4.6.6);

details of the accommodation and facilities to be provided for the Supervisor

(Form 4.6.8);

any other information (Form 4.6.9).

In order to be considered eligible for the award of the contract, tenderers must provide
evidence that they meet or exceed certain minimum selection criteria. This evidence must
be provided by tenderers in the form of the information and documents described in
Subclause 4.1 and in whatever additional form tenderers may wish to utilise.
The minimum selection criteria for each tenderer are as follows:
Economic and Financial capacity:
1.
2.

3.

4.

He must be registered firm or natural persons capable to carry out the specified works.
The total turnover in construction works of a sole tenderer during the past three (3)
years (2004 + 2005 + 2006) must be at least 6.0 MEUR. In the case of joint
venture/consortium the Lead Partners individual total turnover in construction works
in the past three (3) years (2004 + 2005 + 2006) must be at least 4.0 MEUR, while the
consortium/joint venture as a whole must have turnover in construction works of at
least 6.0 MEUR in total for the previous 3 years (2004 + 2005 + 2006); (Vol. 1; Sec.4;
Form 4.4; Financial statement 4.4.2.).
Works in hand in construction of a sole tenderer must be at least 2.0 MEUR. In the
case of joint venture/consortium, works in hand in construction of at least one (1)
member of joint venture/consortium must be at least 1.5 MEUR; while the
consortium/joint venture as a whole must have at least 2.0 MEUR construction works
in hand. (Vol. 1; Sec.4; Form 4.4; Financial statement 4.4.3.)
The sole tenderer or at least one of the partners in a joint venture/consortium must
have access to sufficient credit and other financial facilities to cover the required cash
flow for the duration of the contract. In any case, the amount of credit available must
be at least 1.0 MEUR.

Professional capacity:
The Site Manager must be as follows:

shall have accomplished as a minimum a 2 year post-secondary education in technical

disciplines
is a charted engineer (polozen strucni ispit) according to the legislation applicable in
Bosnia and Herzegovina
shall have at least five (5) years of relevant professional experience in construction
shall have completed at least one (1) construction/reconstruction project, as a site
manger, of a similar complexity and nature, totalling at least 1,500 m2, over the last 5
years (2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006).

Technical capacity:
a)

b)

2007

In case of sole tenderer, he must have the ability to carry out at least 70% of the
construction works by its own means, meaning he must have organisational, structure,
equipment, materials, human and financial resources, including access to the bank
loans, necessary to enable him to carry out 70% of the contract.
In case of consortium/joint venture, the lead partner must have the ability to carry out
at least 50% of the contract works by his own means, as defined in point a) above.

Page 9 of 240

c)
d)

Other partners in a joint venture/consortium (i.e. not the lead partner) must have the
ability to carry out at least 10% of the contract works by his own means, as defined in
point a) above.
The sole tenderer/or joint venture/consortium as a whole must have completed at least
2 (two) construction/reconstruction projects, of similar complexity and nature
(referent projects totalling at least 5,000 m2), comparable to the works concerned over
the past 5 (five) years. The tenderer shall present evidence proving the above required
experience. Ongoing works contracts with more than 75% works progress documented
would also be taken in consideration.

The tenderer must present copies of the respective certificate(s) of commissioning,

provisional or final acceptance certificate endorsed by the Supervisors/Contracting
Authority for the projects concerned. The Contracting Authority reserves the right to ask
for further information.
4.3

The tender must include all the information required by Subclause 4.1 for each
member of the joint venture/consortium and the summary data for execution of
works by the tenderer.

The tender must be signed in a way that legally binds all members. See Form 4.6.5
in Volume 1, Section 4of the tender documents.

One member must be appointed lead member and that appointment confirmed by
submission of powers of attorney signed by legally empowered signatories
representing all the individual members.

The tender must include a preliminary agreement or letter of intent stating that all
members assume joint and several liability for the execution of the contract, that
the lead member is authorised to bind, and receive instructions for and on behalf of,
all members, individually and collectively, and that the lead member is responsible
for execution of the contract, including payments.

All members of the joint venture/consortium are bound to remain in the joint
venture/consortium for the whole execution period of the contract.

ONLY ONE TENDER PER TENDERER

5.1

Tenders submitted by companies in partnerships forming a joint venture/consortium must

also fulfil the following requirements:

A company may not tender for a given contract both individually and as a member of a
joint venture/consortium. Submission or participation by a tenderer in more than one
tender for a contract will result in the disqualification of all those tenders for that contract
in which the party is involved. The same company may only participate as subcontractor
in different tenders if that is justified by the specific nature of the market and cleared by
the European Commission.

TENDER EXPENSES
6.1 The tenderer will bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of the
tender.
6.2 The Contracting Authority will neither be responsible for, nor cover, any expenses or
losses incurred by the tenderer through site visits and inspections or any other aspect of his
tender.

2007

Page 10 of 240

SITE INSPECTION
7.1 The tenderer is strongly advised to visit and inspect the site of the works and its
surroundings for the purpose of assessing, at his own responsibility, expense and risk,
factors necessary for the preparation of his tender and the signing of the contract for the
works.
7.2 A clarification meeting and/or a site visit will not be held by the Contracting Authority.

TENDERS DOCUMENTS

CONTENT OF TENDER DOCUMENTS

8.1

The set of tender documents comprises the following documents and should be read in
conjunction with any modification issued in accordance with Clause 10:
VOLUME 1

INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS

VOLUME 2

CONTRACT

VOLUME 3

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 4

MODEL FINANCIAL BID

BILL OF QUANTITIES/PRICE BREAKDOWN

VOLUME 5

DRAWINGS

8.2

Tenderers bear sole liability for examining with appropriate care the tender documents,
including those design documents available for inspection and any modification to the
tender documents issued during the tendering period, and for obtaining reliable
information with respect to any and all conditions and obligations that may in any way
affect the amount or nature of the tender or the execution of the works. In the event that
the tenderer is successful, no claim for alteration of the tender amount will be entertained
on the grounds of errors or omissions in the obligations of the tenderer described above.

8.3

The tenderer must provide all documents required by the provisions of the tender dossier.
All such documents, without exception, must comply strictly with these conditions and
provisions and contain no alterations made by the tenderer. Tenders which do not comply
with the requirements of the tender dossier may be rejected.

EXPLANATIONS CONCERNING TENDER DOCUMENTS

2007

9.1

Tenderers may submit questions in writing up to 21 days before the deadline for
submission of tenders. The Contracting Authority must reply to all tenderers' questions at
least 11 days before the deadline for receipt of tenders.

9.2

The questions and answers will be published on the EuropeAid website at

http://ec.europa.eu/europeaid/work/procedures/index_en.htm and on the European
Commission Delegation to BiH website at http://www.europa.ba.

Page 11 of 240

10 MODIFICATIONS TO TENDER DOCUMENTS

10.1 The Contracting Authority may amend the tender documents by publishing modifications
up to 11 days before the deadline for submission of tenders.
10.2 Each modification published will constitute a part of the tender documents and will be
published
on
the
EuropeAid
website
at
http://ec.europa.eu/europeaid/work/procedures/index_en.htm and on the European
Commission Delegation to BiH website at http://www.europa.ba.
10.3 The Contracting Authority may, as necessary and in accordance with Clause 22, extend
the deadline for submission of tenders to give tenderers sufficient time to take
modifications into account when preparing their tenders.

11 LABOUR LAW
11.1 Particular attention is drawn to the conditions concerning the employment of labour
applicable at the place of works execution and the obligation to comply with all
regulations, rules or instructions concerning the conditions of employment of any class of
employee.

12 LAW
12.1 By submitting their tenders, tenderers are deemed to know all relevant laws, acts and
regulations of Belgium that may in any way affect or govern the operations and activities
covered by the tender and the resulting contract.

TENDERS PREPARATION
13 LANGUAGE OF TENDERS
13.1 The tender and all correspondence and documents related to the tender exchanged by the
tenderer and the Contracting Authority must be written in the language of the procedure
which is English.
13.2 If the supporting documents are not written in one of the official languages of the
European Union, a translation into the language of the call for tender must be attached.
Where the documents are in an official language of the European Union other than the
one of the procedure, it is however strongly recommended to provide a translation into
the language of the call for tenders, in order to facilitate the evaluation of the documents.

14 CONTENT AND PRESENTATION OF TENDER

14.1 Tenders must satisfy the following conditions:
14.1.1 All tenders must be submitted in one original, marked original, and 3
(three) copies signed in the same way as the original and marked copy.
14.1.2 All tenders must be received at the Delegation of the European Commission
to Bosnia and Herzegovina, Union Bank Building, 2nd floor, Dubrovacka 6,
71 000 Sarajevo, Bosnia and Herzegovina before September 24th, 2007,
2007

Page 12 of 240

12:00 hrs local time, by registered letter with acknowledgement of receipt or

hand-delivered against receipt signed by the representative of the Contract &
Finance Procurement Team.
14.1.3 All tenders, including annexes and all supporting documents, must be
submitted in a sealed envelope/package bearing only:
a) the above address;
b) the reference of the invitation to tender concerned;
c) if applicable, the number of the lot(s) to which the tender refers;
d) the words Not to be opened before the tender opening session" in the
language of the procedure and the local language "Ne otvarati prije javnog
otvaranja";
e) the tenderer's name.
The price bid must be placed in a sealed envelope with the technical proposal for each lot.
The envelopes should then be placed in another sealed envelope/package, unless their
volume requires a separate submission for each lot.
14.2 The works are not divided into lots and must be covered by a single tender.
14.2.3 If works have not been divided into lots, tenders must be for the whole of the
quantities indicated.
14.3 The tender must comprise the following duly completed documents:
14.3.1

Tender form and appendix, in accordance with the forms provided in Volume
1, Section 2;

14.3.2

Tender guarantee, in the form provided in Volume 1, Section 3;

14.3.3

Eligibility certificates as required by Subclauses 3.3, 3.5 and 3.6;

14.3.4

Documentation as required in the questionnaire in Volume 1, Section 4,

including all forms attached;

14.3.5

Bill of quantities, in the form provided in Volume 4;

14.3.6

Modifications (if any);

14.3.8

Financial identification form; (Where the tenderer has already signed another
contract with the European Commission, he may provide instead of the
financial identification form either his financial identification form number or
a copy of the financial identification form provided on that occasion, unless a
change occurred in the meantime)

14.3.9

Cashflow statements;

14.3.10 A declaration to the effect that they are not in any of the situations listed in
point 2.3.3 of the Practical Guide to contracts procedures for EC external
actions.
2007

Page 13 of 240

14.3.11 The Legal Entity Form

(Where the tenderer has already signed another contract with the European
Commission, he may provide instead of the legal entity sheet and its supporting
documents either his legal entity number or a copy of the legal entity sheet provided on
that occasion, unless a change in his legal status occurred in the meantime.)
14.3.12 All other documents requested in Clause 4.
14.4 The relevant pages of the documents specified in Subclauses 14.1.1 to 14.3.10 must be
signed as indicated.

15 TENDER PRICES
15.1 The tender price must cover the whole of the works as described in the tender documents.
15.2 The tenderer must provide a bill of quantities in euro. Bill of quantities has to be
submitted both in electronic and as a hard copy. No changes to a bill of quantities are
allowed without prior instruction of the Contracting Authority.
15.3 Tenderers must quote all components of the bill of quantities/breakdown of the overall
price exclusive of taxes and customs and import duties. No payment will be made for
items which have not been costed; such items will be deemed to be covered by other
items on the bill of quantities.
15.4 Separately, tenderers must quote, in euro, the taxes, customs and import duties applicable
at the time of submission.
15.5 If a discount is offered by the tenderer, it must be clearly specified in the bill of quantities
in Volume 4 and indicated in the tender form in Volume 1, Section 1.2. The discount
must be quoted for the price excluding taxes and for the whole of the works.
15.6 If the tenderer offers a discount, the discount must be included on each interim payment
certificate and calculated on the same basis as in the tender.

16 CURRENCIES OF TENDER AND PAYMENT

16.1 The currency of the tender is the euro. All sums in the bill of quantities/breakdown of the
overall price, the questionnaire and other documents must be expressed in euro, with the
exception of originals of bank and annual financial statements.
16.2 Payments will be made at the Contractor's request after acceptance by the Contracting
Authority.
16.3 All correspondence relating to payments, including invoices and interim and final
payment certificates, must be sent to the Contracting Authority in the language of the
procedure.
17 PERIOD OF VALIDITY OF TENDERS
17.1 Tenders must remain valid for a period of 90 days after the deadline for submission of
tenders indicated in the procurement notice, the invitation to tender or as modified in

2007

Page 14 of 240

accordance with Clauses 10.3 and/or 22. Any tender valid for a shorter period will be
rejected.
17.2 In exceptional circumstances the Contracting Authority may, before the period of validity
expires, request that tenderers extend the validity of tenders for a specific period, which
may not exceed 40 days. Such requests and the responses to them must be made in
writing. A tenderer may refuse to comply with such a request without forfeiting his tender
guarantee. If the tenderer decides to accede to such a request, he may not modify his
tender. He is, however, bound to extend the validity of his tender guarantee for the
revised period of validity of the tender.
17.3 The successful tenderer must maintain his tender for a further 60 days. The further period
is added to the initial period of 90 days irrespective of the date of notification.

18 TENDER GUARANTEE
18.1 The tenderer must provide, as a part of his tender, a tender guarantee in the form set out
in Volume 1, Section 3 of the tender dossier, or in another form acceptable to the
Contracting Authority and meeting the essential requirements set out therein. The tender
guarantee must be for an amount of at least 30,000 Euro. The original guarantee must be
included in the original tender.
18.2 It may be provided in the form of a bank guarantee, a banker's draft, a certified cheque, a
guarantee provided by an insurance and/or guarantee company or an irrevocable letter of
credit made out to the Contracting Authority.
18.3 The tender guarantee must remain valid for 45 days beyond the period of validity of the
tender, including any extensions, and be issued to the Contracting Authority for the
requisite amount.
18.4 Any tender not accompanied by an admissible tender guarantee will be rejected by the
Contracting Authority.
18.5 The tender guarantees of unsuccessful tenderers will be released as soon as possible, and
in any event no later than 45 days after the expiry of the period of validity of the tender,
including any extensions, as laid down in Subclauses 17.1 and 18.3.
18.6 The tender guarantee of the successful tenderer must be maintained for a further 60 days
from the date of notification of award. It will be released when the tenderer has signed the
contract and provided the requisite performance guarantee.
19 VARIANT SOLUTIONS
Variant solutions will not be taken into consideration.

20 PREPARATION AND SIGNING OF TENDERS

20.1 Tenders must comprise the documents specified in Clause 14 above. Each complete
tender must be prepared in 1 original and 3 (three) copies in the English language, clearly
marked "original" or "copy". In the event of any discrepancy between them, the original
will prevail.
20.2 The original of the tender must be typewritten or written in indelible ink and signed by a
person or persons empowered by the power of attorney submitted in accordance with
2007

Page 15 of 240

Form 4.3 of Volume 1, Section 4 of the tender dossier. All pages must be numbered
consecutively by hand, machine or in any other way acceptable to the Contracting
Authority.
20.3 The tender must contain no changes or modifications, other than those made in
accordance with instructions issued by the Contracting Authority or necessitated by errors
on the part of the tenderer. In such cases, modifications must be initialled by the person
signing the tender.
20.4 The tender may be rejected if it contains any modification, addition or deletion to the
tender documents not specified in a modification issued by the Contracting Authority, or
if the tender documents are not filled in properly.
SUBMISSION OF TENDERS
21 SEALING AND MARKING OF TENDERS
21.1 The tenders are to be sent by registered mail with acknowledgement of receipt, or
delivered by hand against a receipt signed by the Contracting Authority or its duly
authorised representative.
21.2 Tenderers must seal the original and all copies of their tenders in an envelope or package.
21.3 The envelope must be delivered to the address of the Contracting Authority as stated in
the procurement notice.
21.4 If the outer envelope is not sealed and marked as required in Subclause 14.1.3, the
Contracting Authority will assume no responsibility for the misplacement or premature
opening of the tender.
21.5 Any variant proposals must be submitted in a separate inner envelope, clearly marked
"variant".

22 EXTENSION OF THE DEADLINE FOR SUBMISSION OF TENDERS

22.1 The Contracting Authority may, on its own discretion, extend the deadline for submission
of tenders by issuing a modification in accordance with Clause 10. In such cases, all
rights and obligations of the Contracting Authority and the tenderer regarding the original
date specified in the procurement notice will be subject to the new date.

23 LATE TENDERS
23.1 All tenders received after the deadline for submission specified in the procurement notice
or these instructions will be kept by the Contracting Authority. The associated guarantees
will be returned to the tenderers.
23.2 No liability can be accepted for late delivery of tenders. Late tenders will be rejected and
will not be evaluated.

2007

Page 16 of 240

24 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF TENDERS

24.1 Tenderers may alter or withdraw their tenders by written notification prior to the above
deadline. No tender may be altered after the deadline for submission.
24.2 Any notification of modification or withdrawal must be prepared, sealed, marked and
submitted in accordance with Clause 21, and the envelope must also be marked with
"modification" or "withdrawal".
24.3 The withdrawal of a tender in the period between the deadline for submission and the date
of expiry of the validity of the tender will result in forfeiture of the tender guarantee
provided for in Clause 18.

OPENING AND EVALUATION OF OFFERS

25 OPENING OF TENDERS
25.1 Tenders will be opened in public session on September 24th, 2007 at 15:00 hrs local
time at the Delegation of the European Commission to Bosnia and Herzegovina, Union
Bank Building, 2nd floor, Dubrovacka 6, 71 000 Sarajevo, Bosnia and Herzegovina by the
committee appointed for the purpose. The committee will draw up minutes of the
meeting, which shall be available to tenderers on request.
25.2 At the tender opening, the tenderers' names, the tender prices, any discounts offered,
written notification of modifications and withdrawals, the presence of the tender
guarantee (if required) and any other information the Contracting Authority may consider
appropriate will be announced.
25.3 The chairman will open the tenders, in accordance with Clauses 21 and 24.
25.4 Envelopes marked "withdrawal" will be opened and read out first. Tenders, including any
variant solutions, for which acceptable notice of withdrawal has been given in accordance
with Clause 24 will not be opened but returned to the tenderer.
25.5 Reductions or modifications to tender prices made by tenderers after submission will not
be taken into consideration during the analysis and evaluation of tenders.
25.6 After the public opening of the tenders, no information about the examination,
clarification, evaluation or comparison of tenders or decisions about the contract award
may be disclosed before the signing of the contract by the Contracting Authority and the
successful tenderer.

26 SECRECY OF THE PROCEDURE

26.1 Information concerning checking, explanation, opinions and comparison of tenders and
recommendations concerning the award of contract, may not be disclosed to tenderers or
any other person not officially involved in the process until the name of the successful
tenderer is announced.
26.2 Any attempt by a tenderer to approach any member of the evaluation
committee/Contracting Authority directly during the evaluation period will be considered
legitimate grounds for disqualifying his tender.

2007

Page 17 of 240

27 CLARIFICATION OF TENDERS
27.1 Tenders which are incomplete, conditional, illegible, obscure or contain unrequested
additions or other irregularities may be rejected.
27.2 When checking tenders, the evaluation committee may, on its own discretion, ask a
tenderer to clarify any aspect of his tender.
27.3 Such requests and the responses to them must be made in writing. They may in no
circumstances alter or try to change the price or content of the tender, except to correct
arithmetical errors discovered by the evaluation committee when analysing tenders, in
accordance with Clause 30.

28 CHECKING OF TENDERS AND THEIR COMPLIANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF

THE TENDER DOCUMENTS
28.1 Before beginning a detailed analysis of the tenders, the evaluation committee will check
that each tender:
28.1.1

has been properly signed, and

28.1.2

includes the required tender guarantee, and

28.1.3

substantially
documents.

complies

with

the

requirements

of

these

tender

28.2 An admissible tender is one which conforms to the requirements and specifications
described in the tender documents with no substantial deviations or reservations.
Substantial deviations and reservations are those which:
28.2.1

in any way
works, or

influence

the

scope,

quality

or

execution

of

28.2.2

restrict the rights of the Contracting Authority or the

obligations of the tenderer under the contract in a manner inconsistent
with the tender documents, or

28.2.3

rectification of which would unfairly affect the

position of other tenderers presenting admissible tenders.

competitive

28.3 If a tender does not comply with the requirements of the evaluation grid, it may be
rejected by the evaluation committee when checking admissibility.

29 EVALUATION AND COMPARISON OF TENDERS

29.1 The evaluation committee must evaluate only those tenders considered substantially
admissible in accordance with Clause 28.
29.2 The purpose of the evaluation process is to identify the tenderer most likely to enable the
Contracting Authority to achieve its objectives of having a facility that is completed on
time, meets the published criteria and is within the budget available. The evaluation of
tenders may take into account not only the construction costs but, if necessary, the
operating costs and resources required (ease of operation and maintenance), in line with
the technical specifications. The Contracting Authority will examine in detail all the
2007

Page 18 of 240

information supplied by the tenderers and will formulate its judgement on the basis of the
lowest total cost, including additional costs.
29.3 The Contracting Authority reserves the right to ask a tenderer to clarify any part of his
offer that the evaluation committee may consider necessary for the evaluation of the
offer.
29.4 The Contracting Authority reserves the right to check information submitted by the
tenderer if the evaluation committee considers it necessary.

30 CORRECTION OF ERRORS
30.1 Admissible tenders will be checked for arithmetical errors by the evaluation committee.
Errors will be corrected by the evaluation committee as follows:
-

where there is a discrepancy between amounts in figures and in words, the amount in
words will prevail;

except for lump-sum contracts, where there is a discrepancy between a unit price and
the total amount derived from the multiplication of the unit price and the quantity, the
unit price as quoted will prevail.

30.2 The amount stated in the tender will be adjusted by the evaluation committee in the event
of error, and the tenderer will be bound by that adjusted amount. If the tenderer does not
accept the adjustment, his tender will be rejected and his tender guarantee forfeited.
30.3 When analysing the tender, the evaluation committee will determine the final tender price
after adjusting it on the basis of Clause 30.

CONTRACT AWARD
31 CRITERIA FOR AWARD
31.1. The evaluation committee will select the tenderer who has submitted the lowest evaluated
bid satisfying the administrative and technical criteria.

32 RIGHT OF THE CONTRACTING AUTHORITY TO ACCEPT OR REJECT ANY TENDER

32.1 The Contracting Authority reserves the right to accept or reject any tender and/or to
cancel the whole tender procedure and reject all tenders. The Contracting Authority
reserves the right to initiate a new invitation to tender.
32.2 The Contracting Authority reserves the right to conclude the contract with the successful
tenderer within the limits of the funds available. Should the lowest technically admissible
tender exceed the available budget, the Contracting Authority reserves the right to
negotiate (negotiated procedure after cancellation) with one or more tenderers of its
choice, from among those that took part in the invitation to tender, with a view to
reducing the scope of the works or revising other terms of the contract in order to bring
the tender price down to a level satisfactory to the Contracting Authority.
32.3 In the event of a tender procedure's cancellation, tenderers will be notified by the
Contracting Authority. If the tender procedure is cancelled before the outer envelope of

2007

Page 19 of 240

any tender has been opened, the sealed envelopes will be returned, unopened, to the
tenderers.
32.4 Cancellation may occur where:
(a) the tender procedure has been unsuccessful, namely where no qualitatively or
financially worthwhile tender has been received or there has been no response at all;
(b) the economic or technical parameters of the project have been fundamentally
altered;
c) exceptional circumstances or force majeure render normal execution of the project
impossible;
(d) all technically compliant tenders exceed the financial resources available;
(e) there have been irregularities in the procedure, in particular where these have
prevented fair competition.
In no circumstances will the Contracting Authority be liable for damages, whatever their
nature (in particular damages for loss of profits) or relationship to the cancellation of a
tender, even if the Contracting Authority has been advised of the possibility of damages.
The publication of a procurement notice does not commit the Contracting Authority to
implement the programme or project announced.
33 NOTIFICATION OF AWARD, CONTRACT CLARIFICATIONS
33.1 Prior to the expiration of the period of validity of tenders, the Contracting Authority will
notify the successful tenderer, in writing, that his tender has been selected and draw his
attention to any arithmetical errors corrected during the evaluation process.
33.2 This notification may take the form of an invitation to clarify certain contractual
questions raised therein, to which the tenderer must prepare himself to reply. This
clarification will be confined to issues that had no direct bearing on the choice of the
successful tender. The outcome of such clarifications will be set out in a memorandum of
clarifications, to be signed by both parties and incorporated into the contract.
This notification may take the form of an invitation to negotiate, in accordance with
Subclause 32.3.
The successful tenderer will be informed in writing that its tender has been accepted
(notification of award).
Documentary evidence required from the successful tenderer:
Before the Contracting Authority signs the contract with the successful tenderer, the
successful tenderer must provide the documentary proof or statements required under the
law of the country in which the company (or each of the companies in case of a
consortium) is established, to show that it does not fall into any of the exclusion situations
listed in section 2.3.3 of the Practical Guide to contract procedures for EC external
actions. This evidence or these documents or statements must carry a date, which cannot
be more than 1 year before the date of submission of the tender. In addition, a statement
shall be furnished stating that the situations described in these documents have not
changed since then.
If the successful tenderer fails to provide this documentary proof or statement within 15
calendar days following the notification of award or if the successful tenderer is found to
have provided false information, the award will be considered null and void. In such a
case, the Contracting Authority may award the tender to the next lowest tenderer or
cancel the tender procedure.

2007

Page 20 of 240

33.3 Only the signed contract will constitute an official commitment on the part of the
Contracting Authority, and activities may not begin until the contract has been signed by
the Contracting Authority and the successful tenderer.
33.4 After the contract has been signed and the performance guarantee has been provided by
the successful tenderer, in accordance with Clause 34, the Contracting Authority will
promptly notify the other tenderers that their tenders have not been successful and release
their tender guarantees.

34 CONTRACT SIGNING AND PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE

34.1 Within 30 days of receiving the contract signed by the Contracting Authority, the
successful tenderer will sign and date the contract and return it to the Contracting
Authority with the performance guarantee.
34.2 If he fails to sign and return the contract and any financial guarantee required within 30
days after receipt of notification, the Contracting Authority may consider the acceptance
of the tender to be cancelled without prejudice to the Contracting Authority's right to
seize the guarantee, claim compensation or pursue any other remedy in respect of such
failure, and the successful tenderer will have no claim whatsoever on the Contracting
Authority.
34.3 Prior to the signing of the contract, he may be required to confirm his financial statement,
as set out in Form 4.4. This statement must show his access to credit facilities sufficient
to ensure his liquidity during the execution of the contract. Should he fail to provide this
statement, his tender will be dismissed and the tenderer whose tender has been evaluated
as second most advantageous may be invited to sign the contract and so on and so forth.
34.4 The performance guarantee referred to in the General Conditions is set at 10% of the
amount of the contract and must be presented in the form specified in the annex to the
tender dossier. It will be released in accordance with the Special Conditions.]
35 COMMENCEMENT OF WORKS
35.1 Following the signing of the contract by both parties, the Contracting Authority's
representative will issue a written notice of commencement of the works in accordance
with Clause 31 of the General Conditions, as specified by the Special Conditions and the
Appendix to the tender.
35.2 The Contractor must inform the Contracting Authority's representative by return that he
has received the notice.

36 ETHICS CLAUSES
36.1 Any attempt by a candidate or tenderer to obtain confidential information, enter into
unlawful agreements with competitors or influence the committee or the Contracting
Authority during the process of examining, clarifying, evaluating and comparing tenders
will lead to the rejection of his candidacy or tender and may result in administrative
penalties.
36.2 Without the Contracting Authority's prior written authorisation, the Contractor and his
staff or any other company with which the Contractor is associated or linked may not,
even on an ancillary or subcontracting basis, supply other services, carry out works or
supply equipment for the project. This prohibition also applies to any other programmes
2007

Page 21 of 240

or projects that could, owing to the nature of the contract, give rise to a conflict of interest
on the part of the Contractor.
36.3 When putting forward a candidacy or tender, the candidate or tenderer must declare that
he is affected by no potential conflict of interest, and that he has no equivalent relation in
that respect with other tenderers or parties involved in the project. Should such a situation
arise during execution of the contract, the Contractor must immediately inform the
Contracting Authority.
36.4 The Contractor must at all times act impartially and as a faithful adviser in accordance
with the code of conduct of his profession. He must refrain from making public
statements about the project or services without the Contracting Authority's prior
approval. He may not commit the Contracting Authority in any way without its prior
written consent.
36.5 For the duration of the contract, the Contractor and his staff must respect human rights
and undertake not to offend the political, cultural and religious mores of the beneficiary
state.
36.6 The Contractor may accept no payment connected with the contract other than that
provided for therein. The Contractor and his staff must not exercise any activity or
receive any advantage inconsistent with their obligations to the Contracting Authority.
36.7 The Contractor and his staff are obliged to maintain professional secrecy for the entire
duration of the contract and after its completion. All reports and documents drawn up or
received by the Contractor are confidential.
36.8 The contract governs the Parties' use of all reports and documents drawn up, received or
presented by them during the execution of the contract.
36.9 The Contractor shall refrain from any relationship likely to compromise his independence
or that of his staff. If the Contractor ceases to be independent, the Contracting Authority
may, regardless of injury, terminate the contract without further notice and without the
Contractor having any claim to compensation.
36.10 The Commission reserves the right to suspend or cancel project financing if corrupt
practices of any kind are discovered at any stage of the award process and if the
Contracting Authority fails to take all appropriate measures to remedy the situation. For
the purposes of this provision, "corrupt practices" are the offer of a bribe, gift, gratuity or
commission to any person as an inducement or reward for performing or refraining from
any act relating to the award of a contract or implementation of a contract already
concluded with the Contracting Authority.
36.11 All tenders will be rejected or contracts terminated if it emerges that the award or
execution of a contract has given rise to unusual commercial expenses. Such unusual
commercial expenses are commissions not mentioned in the main contract or not
stemming from a properly concluded contract referring to the main contract,
commissions not paid in return for any actual and legitimate service, commissions
remitted to a tax haven, commissions paid to a recipient who is not clearly identified or
commissions paid to a company which has every appearance of being a front company.
37 APPEALS
37.1 Tenderers believing that they have been harmed by an error or irregularity during the
award process may petition the Contracting Authority directly and inform the
2007

Page 22 of 240

Commission. The Contracting Authority must reply within 90 days of receipt of the
complaint.
37.2 Where informed of such a complaint, the Commission must communicate its opinion to
the Contracting Authority and do all it can to facilitate an amicable solution between the
complainant (tenderer) and the Contracting Authority.
37.3 If the above procedure fails, the tenderer may have recourse to procedures established
under the national legislation of the Contracting Authority.

2007

Page 23 of 240

VOLUME 1
SECTION 2 :
TENDER FORM
APPENDIX TO THE TENDER

2007

Page 24 of 240

TENDER FORM FOR A WORKS CONTRACT

Publication reference: Europeaid/125-893/L/WKS/BA

Name of contract: Rehabilitation of the Court Building in Sarajevo hosting Sarajevo Municipal
Court and Sarajevo Cantonal Court

<Place and date>

A:

EC Delegation to Bosnia and Herzegovina

Dubrovacka 6, Union Bank building 2nd Floor
71000 Sarajevo
Bosnia and Herzegovina

One signed original form must be supplied (for each lot, if the tender procedure is divided into
lots), together with the number of copies specified in the Instruction to Tenderers. The form must
include a signed declaration using the annexed format from each legal entity making the
application. All data included in this form must concern only the legal entity or entities
making the application.
Any additional documentation (brochure, letter, etc) sent with the form will not be taken into
consideration. Applications being submitted by a consortium (ie, either a permanent, legallyestablished grouping or a grouping which has been constituted informally for a specific tender
procedure) must follow the instructions applicable to the consortium leader and its members.
An economic operator may, where appropriate and for a particular contract, rely on the capacities
of other entities, regardless of the legal nature of the links which it has with them. It must in that
case prove to the contracting authority that it will have at its disposal the resources necessary for
performance of the contract, for example by producing an undertaking on the part of those
entities to place those resources at its disposal. Such entities, for instance the parent company of
the economic operator, must respect the same rules of eligibility and notably that of nationality,
as the economic operator.
1

SUBMITTED BY
Name(s) of tenderer(s)
Leader

Member 2*

Etc *

2007

Page 25 of 240

Nationality

* add/delete additional lines for members as appropriate. Note that a subcontractor is not
considered to be a member for the purposes of this tender procedure. If this tender is being
submitted by an individual tenderer, the name of the tenderer should be entered as 'leader' (and all
other lines should be deleted)

CONTACT PERSON (for this tender)

Name
Address

Telephone
Fax
E-mail

2007

Page 26 of 240

TENDERER'S DECLARATION(S)
As part of their tender, each legal entity identified under point 1 of this form, including every
consortium member, must submit a signed declaration using this format. (For consortia, the
declaration of the Leader must be a signed original but those of other members may be
copies).

In response to your letter of invitation to tender for the above contract,

we, the undersigned, hereby declare that:
1

We have examined and accept in full the content of the dossier for invitation to tender No
[.] of [../../..]. We hereby accept its provisions in their entirety,
without reservation or restriction.

We offer to execute, in accordance with the terms of the tender dossier and the conditions and time
limits laid down, without reserve or restriction, the following works:
[description of works]

The price of our tender [excluding the discounts described under point 4] is:
[..]

We will grant a discount of [%], or [..].

This tender is valid for a period of 90 days from the final date for submission of tenders.

If our tender is accepted, we undertake to provide a performance guarantee of [..], as

required by Article 13 of the General Conditions.

Our firm/company [and our subcontractors] has/have the following nationality:

[]

We are making this tender in our own right and [as member of the consortium led by < name of
the leader / ourselves > ]* [Lot No]. We confirm that we are not tendering for the same contract in
any other form. [We confirm, as a member of the consortium, that all members are jointly and
severally liable by law for the execution of the contract, that the lead member is authorised to bind,
and receive instructions for and on behalf of, each member, that the execution of the contract,
including payments, is the responsibility of the lead member, and that all members in the joint
venture/consortium are bound to remain in the joint venture/consortium for the entire period of the
contract's execution].

We are not in any of the situations excluding us from participating in contracts which are listed in
Clause 3 of the instructions to tenderers. In the event that our tender is successful, we undertake, if
required, to provide the proof usual under the law of the country in which we are established that
we do not fall into the exclusion situations listed in section 2.3.3 of the Practical Guide to contract
procedures for EC external actions. The date on the evidence or documents provided will be no
earlier than 1 year before the date of submission of tender and, in addition, we will provide a
statement that our situation has not altered in the period which has elapsed since the evidence in
question was drawn up.

2007

Page 27 of 240

We also understand that if we fail to provide this proof within 15 calendar days after receiving the
notification of award, or if the information provided is proved false, the award may be considered
null and void.
10

We agree to abide by the ethics clauses in Clause 36 of the instructions to tenderers and, in
particular, have no potential conflict of interests or any equivalent relation in that respect with other
candidates or other parties in the tender procedure at the time of the submission of this application.
We have no interest of any nature whatsoever in any other tender in this procedure.

11

We will inform the Contracting Authority immediately if there is any change in the above
circumstances at any stage during the implementation of the contract. We also fully recognise and
accept that any inaccurate or incomplete information deliberately provided in this application may
result in our exclusion from this and other contracts funded by the European Communities.

12

We note that the Contracting Authority is not bound to proceed with this invitation to tender and
that it reserves the right to award only part of the contract. It will incur no liability towards us
should it do so.

13

We fully recognise and accept that we may be excluded from tender procedures and contract in
accordance with the Section 2.3.5 of the Practical Guide to contract procedures for EC external
actions. Furthermore, we acknowledge that, should we provide any inaccurate or incomplete
information deliberately in this tender, we shall also be subject to financial penalties representing
10% of the total value of the contract being awarded. This rate may be increased to 20% in the
event of a repeat offence within 5 years of the first infringement.

14

We are aware that, for the purposes of safeguarding the financial interests of the Communities, our
personal data may be transferred to internal audit services, to the European Court of Auditors, to
the Financial Irregularities Panel or to the European Anti-Fraud Office.

Name and first name: []

Duly authorised to sign this tender on behalf of:
[ ]
Place and date: [..]
Stamp of the firm/company:

This tender includes the following annexes:

[Numbered list of annexes with titles]

2007

Page 28 of 240

APPENDIX TO TENDER FOR A WORKS CONTRACT

[..]

Publication reference: Europeaid/125-893/L/WKS/BA

Title of contract: Rehabilitation of the Court Building in Sarajevo hosting Sarajevo Municipal
Court and Sarajevo Cantonal Court
(Note: Tenderers are required to fill in the blank spaces in this Appendix)

Subclauses of General
Conditions or Special
Conditions
Delegation of the European
Commission to Bosnia and
Herzegovina, Union Bank
Building, Dubrovacka 6, 71 000
Sarajevo, Bosnia and Herzegovina

Name and address of the

Contracting Authority.

Name and address of the tenderer

To be completed by the
tenderer
Delegation of the European
Commission to Bosnia and
Herzegovina
Attn: Mrs. Renata Abduzaimovic,
Task Manager
Union Bank Building, Dubrovacka
6, 71 000 Sarajevo,
Bosnia and Herzegovina

Name and address of the

representative of the Contracting
Authority.

Financing authority

To be completed by the
Contracting Authority

European Commission CARDS

2006 Programme
The Commencement Date shall not
be later than 30 days following
signature of the Contract by all
parties.
12 (twelve) months following
issuance of the Commencement
Order

Deadline for notice to commence

31.2

Period of Implementation

32.1

Currency

43.1

Euro

Law of the contract

2.1

Belgium Law

2007

Page 29 of 240

Subclauses of General
Conditions or Special
Conditions
Language of the contract

2.2

English

Language for communications

2.2

English

9.1

General Condition of Contract

13.1

10% of the Contract Price

15.2

within 30 days from the

Contract signature

Period of access to the site

Amount of performance

Deadline for submission of

programme
Normal working hours

As per local labour law

Period after the effective date

during which the Contracting
Authority's representative must
issue notice to commence the
works

31.2

30 days following signature of the

Contract by all parties.

Liquidated damages for the works

34.1

0.10 % of Contract price per

calendar day

Limit of liquidated damages for

delay

34.1

10 % of the Contract price

45.1

Up to maximum 10 % of Contract
value

Minimum amount of interim

payment certificates

48.1

100.000 Euro

Percentage for adjustment of

provisional sums

15 % of the contract price

Amount of insurance for design

Not applicable

Amount of third-party insurance

14.6

150.000 Euro per accident with the

number of occurrences unlimited

Periods for submission of

insurance

14.5

30 days

Percentage of retention monies

2007

Page 30 of 240

Subclauses of General
Conditions or Special
Conditions
Number of members of
dispute-settlement committee

65.2

65.1

European Commission

Arbitration rules

65.2

European Commission

Number of arbitrators

65.2

Language of arbitration

2.1

Member of dispute-settlement
committee (if not agreed) to be
nominated by

Place of arbitration

English
Delegation of the European
Commission to Bosnia and
Herzegovina

Signature

__________________________________________

Capacity

_____________________________________

Duly authorised to sign for and on behalf of _______________________________________

2007

Page 31 of 240

VOLUME 1
SECTION 3:
TENDER GUARANTEE FORM

2007

Page 32 of 240

TENDER GUARANTEE FORM

Works contract
(To be completed on paper bearing the letterhead of the financial institution)
For the attention of the
Delegation of the European Commission to Bosnia and Herzegovina
Contract and Finance Section-Procurement
Dubrovacka 6/ II Floor
71000 Sarajevo
Bosnia and Herzegovina
referred to below as the Contracting Authority
Title of contract: Rehabilitation of the Court Building in Sarajevo hosting Sarajevo Municipal Court and
Sarajevo Cantonal Court
Identification number: Europeaid/125-893/L/WKS/BA
We, the undersigned, [name and address of financial institution], hereby irrevocably declare that we will
guarantee, as primary obligor, and not merely as a surety on behalf of [Tenderer's name and address], the
payment to the Contracting Authority of [amount of the tender guarantee], this amount representing the
guarantee referred to in article 11 of the Procurement Notice.
Payment shall be made without objection or legal proceedings of any kind, upon receipt of your first
written claim (sent by registered letter with confirmation of receipt) if the Tenderer does not fulfil all
obligations stated in its tender. We shall not delay the payment, nor shall we oppose it for any reason
whatsoever. We shall inform you in writing as soon as payment has been made.
We note that the guarantee will be released at the latest within 45 days of the expiry of the tender validity
period, including any extensions, in accordance with Article 18 of the Instructions to Tenderers [and in
any case at the latest on (1 year after the deadline for submission of tenders)]1.
The law applicable to this guarantee shall be that of Belgium. Any dispute arising out of or in connection
with this guarantee shall be referred to the courts of Belgium.
The guarantee will enter into force and take effect from the submission deadline of the tender.

Done at .., ../../..

Name and first name: On behalf of:
Signature: ..
[stamp of the body providing the guarantee]

This mention has to be inserted only where the law applicable to the guarantee imposes a precise expiry date

2007

Page 33 of 240

VOLUME 1
SECTION 4:
QUESTIONNAIRE

2007

Page 34 of 240

VOLUME 1
SECTION 4
QUESTIONNAIRE
CONTENTS
ADDITIONAL NOTICE TO TENDERERS
FORM 4.1

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE TENDERER

FORM 4.2

ORGANISATION CHART

FORM 4.3

POWER OF ATTORNEY

FORM 4.4

FINANCIAL STATEMENT

FORM 4.5

a) FINANCIAL IDENTIFICATION FORM

b) LEGAL ENTITY FILES

FORM 4.6

TECHNICAL QUALIFICATIONS

4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.4
4.6.5
4.6.6
4.6.7
4.6.8
4.6.9

2007

PERSONNEL
PLANT
WORKPLAN AND PROGRAMME
EXPERIENCE AS CONTRACTOR
INFORMATION ON JOINT VENTURES
LITIGATION HISTORY
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM(S)
ACCOMMODATION FOR THE SUPERVISOR
FURTHER INFORMATION

Page 35 of 240

VOLUME 1

SECTION 4:
ADDITIONAL NOTICE TO TENDERERS
1. All questions contained in the forms must be answered by the tenderer.
2. Additional sheets may be attached as necessary.
3. If a question does not apply to the tenderer, "not applicable" should be entered alongside with a brief
explanation of why.
4. Every single page of each form must be numbered consecutively in the bottom right-hand corner.
5. Financial data and declarations presented by the tenderer must be given in euro or national currency.
Original bank statements may be also attached for reference.
6. If the requested supporting documents/certificates are not written in one of the official languages of the
European Union, a translation into the language of the call for tender must be attached. Where the
documents are in an official language of the European Union, other than the one of the procedure, it is
however strongly recommended to provide a translation into the language of the call for tenders, in order
to facilitate the evaluation of the documents.
7. Each member of a joint venture/consortium must fill in and submit every form.
8. Firms applying as a joint venture/consortium must also complete Form 4.6.5 concerning joint
ventures/consortia.
9. The person signing this questionnaire guarantees the truthfulness and accuracy of all the statements
made.
10. The accuracy of the answers to the questionnaire, their completeness and the attached documentation
will be taken into account in the tender evaluation. The attention of tenderers is also drawn to the fact that
the absence of some data may cause their non-compliance in the related item of evaluation.

2007

Page 36 of 240

VOLUME 1
SECTION 4:
FORM 4.1
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE TENDERER
4.1.1.

Name of company
..........................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................
4.1.2. Registered address
..........................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................Telephone ..............................
Fax...................... Telex .........E-mail............
4.1.3. Names and nationalities of principals/directors and
associates..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................
4.1.4. Type of company (natural person, partnership, corporation,
etc.).............................................................................................................
4.1.5. Description of company (e.g. general civil engineering contractor)
4.1.6. Company's nationality...........................................................
4.1.7. Number of years experience as contractor
- in own country.......................
- internationally......................
4.1.8. Registration details
..........................................................................................................................................................
.........................
Please attach copy of the registration certificate
4.1.9. Equity in the company
Shares (%)............................................................................................................
............................................................................................................
4.1.10. Name(s) and address(es) of companies involved in the project and whether
parent/subsidiary/subcontractor/other:.............................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................
4.1.11. If the company is a subsidiary, what involvement, if any, will the parent company have in the
project?
...............................................................................................
4.1.12. Foreign companies must state whether they are established in the state of the Contracting
Authority in accordance with applicable regulations (for information only)
Signature: ..................................................................................
(a person or persons authorised to sign on behalf of the tenderer)
Date:.....................

2007

Page 37 of 240

VOLUME 1
SECTION 4:
FORM 4.2
ORGANISATION CHART
{Please give details here below of the organisation chart of your company, showing the position of
directors, key personnel and functions.

Signature ...........................................................
(a person or persons authorised to sign on behalf of the tenderer)

Date...........................................}
2007

Page 38 of 240

VOLUME 1
SECTION 4:
FORM 4.3
POWER OF ATTORNEY

Please attach here the power of attorney empowering the signatory of the tender and all related
documentation.

Signature:

..................................................................................

(a person or persons authorised to sign on behalf of the tenderer)

Date:
2007

.....................}
Page 39 of 240

VOLUME 1
SECTION 4 :
FORM 4.4
FINANCIAL STATEMENT
Please provide all of the information required by this form in euro or national currency (NC) equivalent.
4.4.1

Basic capital
Amount....................................
Currency..................................
Authorised...............................
Issued......................................

Euro
Euro
Euro
Euro

4.4.2
Annual value of construction work undertaken for each of the last three years, and projected for
the next two years
Euro

Year-3

Year-2

Last year

Current
year

Year

Year

+1

+2

At home
Abroad
Total
4.4.3

Approximate value of works in hand (at home and abroad)

............................................ (euro or national currency)

4.4.42 Please attach copies of the company's previous 3 years certified statements of account (with
translations into the language of the procedure if necessary) from which the following basic data
will be abstracted; and provide the same information projected forward for the next two years.
Euro
1.Total assets
2.Total liabilities
Net Value (1 minus 2)
3.Liquid assets
4.Short-term debts
Working capital (3
minus 4)

2004

2005

2006

Current
year

2008

2009

................
....

............
........

..............
......

............
........

.................
...

.................
...

................
....

............
........

..............
......

............
........

.................
...

.................
...

................
....

............
........

..............
......

............
........

.................
...

.................
...

................
....

............
........

..............
......

............
........

.................
...

.................
...

Please see point 4 in Instructions to Tenders if documentary evidence/proofs are needed.

2007

Page 40 of 240

5.Pre-tax profits
6.Losses

................
................
................
................
....

............
............
............
............
....

..............
..............
..............
..........

............
............
............
............
............
....

.................
.................
.................
.................
..

.................
.................
.................
.................
....

4.4.5

Name and address of banks (principal/others):

.............................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
...................

4.4.6

Please enclose a reference/certificate about the financial situation of the company and its access
to credit facilities (maximum amount of credit facility to be stated in euro or NC equivalent)

Signature:

..................................................................................

(a person or persons authorised to sign on behalf of the tenderer)

Date:

2007

.....................}

Page 41 of 240

VOLUME 1, SECTION 4
FINANCIAL IDENTIFICATION
ACCOUNT HOLDER
NAME

ADDRESS

TOWN/CITY

POSTCODE

COUNTRY

VAT NUMBER

CONTACT PERSON
TELEPHONE

FAX

E-MAIL

BANK
NAME

BRANCH ADDRESS

TOWN/CITY

POSTCODE

COUNTRY
ACCOUNT NUMBER*
IBAN
REMARKS :

BANK STAMP + SIGNATURE of BANK REPRESENTATIVE

DATE + SIGNATURE of ACCOUNT HOLDER :

(Both Obligatory)

(Obligatory)

*Please note that bank account indicated on the form HAS TO BE either euro or multi currency bank account.

2007

Page 42 of 240

VOLUME 1, SECTION 4
LEGAL ENTITIES
PRIVACY STATEMENT: http://europa.eu.int/comm/budget/execution/legal_entities_fr.htm

PRIVATE COMPANIES
TYPE OF
COMPANY
NGO

YES

NO

(Non Governmental Organisation)

NAME(S)

ABBREVIATION
ADDRESS OF
THE HEAD
OFFICE

POSTAL CODE

P.O. BOX

CITY
COUNTRY
VAT
PLACE OF REGISTRATION
DATE OF REGISTRATION
D D

M M

Y Y Y Y

REGISTRATION NR
PHONE

FAX

E-MAIL

THIS "LEGAL ENTITY" FORM SHOULD BE FILLED IN AND RETURNED TOGETHER WITH:
* A COPY OF ANY OFFICIAL DOCUMENT (E.G. OFFICIAL GAZETTE, REGISTER OF COMPANIES, ETC.)
SHOWING THE CONTRACTOR'S NAME AND ADDRESS AND THE REGISTRATION NUMBER GIVEN TO
IT BY THE NATIONAL AUTHORITIES;
* A COPY OF THE VAT REGISTRATION DOCUMENT IF APPLICABLE AND IF THE VAT NUMBER DOES
NOT APPEAR ON THE OFFICIAL DOCUMENT REFERRED TO ABOVE.
DATE AND SIGNATURE

2007

Page 43 of 240

VOLUME 1
SECTION 4 :
FORMS 4.6.1 TO 9
TECHNICAL QUALIFICATIONS

2007

Page 44 of 240

VOLUME 1
SECTION 4 :
FORM 4.6.1.1
OVERVIEW OF THE TENDERER'S PERSONNEL
{i - Overview
a - Directors and management
........................
b - Administrative staff
........................
c - Technical staff
- Engineers
........................
- Surveyors
- Foremen
........................
- Mechanics
- Technicians
........................
- Machine operators
- Drivers
........................
- Other skilled staff
- Labourers and unskilled staff
........................
________________________________________________
Total

===========

ii - Site operatives to be employed on the contract (if relevant)

a - Site management
........................
b - Administrative staff
........................
c - Technical staff
- Engineers
........................
- Surveyors
- Foremen
........................
- Mechanics
- Technicians
........................
- Machine operators
- Drivers
........................
- Other skilled staff
- Labourers and unskilled staff
........................
_______________________________________________
Total

===========

Signature ....................................................
(a person or persons authorised to sign on behalf of the tenderer)
Date ............................................}

2007

Page 45 of 240

VOLUME 1
SECTION 4
FORM 4.6.1.2
PERSONNEL TO BE EMPLOYED ON THE CONTRACT

Position/Name

Nationality

Age

Education

Years of experience
(with the
company/in
construction)

Quality control
.............................
............

Others
responsible for
.............................
............

Others
responsible for
.............................
............

.............................
............

Signature ......................................................
(a person or persons authorised to sign on behalf of the tenderer)
Date.........................................}

2007

Page 46 of 240

Major works
for which
responsible
(project/value)

VOLUME 1
SECTION 4 :
FORM 4.6.1.3
PROFESSIONAL EXPERIENCE OF KEY PERSONNEL
CURRICULUM VITAE
(Maximum 3 pages + 3 pages of annexes)
{Proposed position in the contract:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Surname:
Name:
Date and place of birth:
Nationality:
Civil status:
Address (phone/fax/e-mail):
6.
Education:
Institutions:
Date:
From (month/year)
To (month/year)
Degree:
7.
Language skills
Indicate on a scale of 1 to 5 (1 excellent; 5 basic):
Language
Level
Passive
Mother tongue

8.
Membership of professional bodies:
9.
Other skills (e.g. computer literacy, etc.):
10.
Present position:
11.
Years of professional experience:
12.
Key qualifications:
13.
Specific experience in non-industrialised countries:
Country
Date: from (month/year)
(month/year)

2007

Page 47 of 240

Spoken

Written

to Name and brief description of the

project

14.
Professional experience:
Date: from (month/year) to (month/year)
Place
Company/organisation
Position
Job description
15.
15a.
15b.

Others:
Publications and seminars:
References:

Signature ............................................
(a person or persons authorised to sign on behalf of the tenderer)

Date...........................}

2007

Page 48 of 240

VOLUME 1
SECTION 4 :
FORM 4.6.2
PLANT
{Plant proposed and available for the implementation of the contract3

DESCRIPTION
(type/make/model)

A)

Power/
capacity

No of
units

Age
(years)

Owned (O)
or hired (H)/
and
percentage of
ownership

CONSTRUCTION
PLANT
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/

Not all the plant owned by the company.

2007

Page 49 of 240

Origin
(country)

Present
approximate
value in euro or
national
currency

DESCRIPTION
(type/make/model)

B)

Power/
capacity

No of
units

Age
(years)

Owned (O)
or hired (H)/
and
percentage of
ownership

VEHICLES AND
TRUCKS
/
/
/
/
/

C)

OTHER PLANT

/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Signature ...........................................................
(a person or persons authorised to sign on behalf of the tenderer)
Date................................................}

2007

Page 50 of 240

Origin
(country)

Present
approximate
value in euro
or national
currency

VOLUME 1
SECTION 4 :
FORM 4.6.3
WORKPLAN AND PROGRAMME
4.6.3.1

State the proposed location of your main office on the site, stations (steel/concrete/asphalt
structures), warehouses, laboratories, accommodation, etc. (sketches to be attached as required)

4.6.3.2

Give a brief outline of your programme for the completion of the works in accordance with the
required method of construction and stated time of completion

4.6.3.3

Attach a critical milestone bar chart (schedule of execution) representing the construction
programme and detailing the relevant activities, dates, allocation of labour and plant resources,
etc.

4.6.3.4

If the tenderer plans to subcontract part of the works, he must provide the following details:

Work intended to
be subcontracted

Name and details of

subcontractors

Value of subcontract
as percentage of the
total cost of the
project

Signature .......................................................
(a person or persons authorised to sign on behalf of the tenderer)

Date .....................................}

2007

Page 51 of 240

Experience in
similar work (details
to be specified)

VOLUME 1
SECTION 4
FORM 4.6.4
EXPERIENCE AS CONTRACTOR
4.6.4.1 List of contracts of similar nature and extent performed during 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 and 2006

Name of
project/kind
of works

Period Starting
Total
of
date
value of
works the contract
Contractor
was
responsibl
e for2

Percentage
of works
completed

A) In home
country

2007

Page 52 of 240

Contracting
authority
and place

Prime
contractor
(P) or
subcontrac
tor (S)

Final
acceptance
issued?
- Yes
- Not yet
(current
contracts)
No

Name of
project/kind
of works

Period Starting
Total
of
date
value of
works the contract
Contractor
was
responsibl
e for4

Percentage
of works
completed

Contracting
authority
and place

Prime
contractor
(P) or
subcontrac
tor (S)

Final
acceptance
issued?
- Yes
- Not yet
(current
contracts)
No

B) Abroad

4.6.4.25 Please attach here available references and certificates from the relevant Contracting Authorities
Signature .......................................................................................
(a person or persons authorised to sign on behalf of the tenderer)

Date ..................}

4
5

Amounts actually paid, without the effect of inflation.

Please see point 4 in Instructions to Tenders if documentary evidence/proofs are needed.

2007

Page 53 of 240

VOLUME 1
SECTION 4 :
FORM 4.6.5
DATA ON JOINT VENTURES
4.6.5.1
4.6.5.2

4.6.5.3

4.6.5.4

4.6.5.5

4.6.5.6

4.6.5.7

Signature:

Name ......................................................................................
Managing board's address ..................................................
..................................................................................................
Telex ..........................................................
Telephone .........................Fax..................................E-mail.....
Agency in the state of the Contracting Authority, if any (in the case of a joint
venture/consortium with a foreign lead member )
Office address ...........................................................................
..................................................................................................
Telex ..........................................................
Telephone ..............................Fax.........................................
Names of members
i) ..............................................................................................
ii) ..............................................................................................
iii) ..............................................................................................
Etc. ............................................................................................
Name of lead member
..................................................................................................
..................................................................................................
Agreement governing the formation of the joint venture/consortium
i) Date of signature: ................................................................
ii) Place: ...................................................................................
iii) Enclosure - joint venture/consortium agreement
Proposed proportion of responsibilities between members (in %) with
indication of the type of the works to be performed by each
..................................................................................................
..................................................................................................
..................................................................................................
..................................................................................................
..................................................................................................

..................................................................................

(a person or persons authorised to sign on behalf of the tenderer)

Date:

2007

.....................}

Page 54 of 240

VOLUME 1
SECTION 4 :
FORM 4.6.6
LITIGATION HISTORY
{Please provide information on any history of litigation or arbitration resulting from contracts executed
during the last 3 years or currently under execution.
A separate sheet should be used for each partner of a joint venture/consortium.

Year

Award FOR or
AGAINST tenderer

Name of client, cause of

litigation, and matter in
dispute

Disputed amount (current

value in euro or NC)

Signature ......................................................................................
(a person or persons authorised to sign on behalf of the tenderer)

Date ..................}

2007

Page 55 of 240

VOLUME 1
SECTION 4 :
FORM 4.6.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM(S)
{Please provide hereunder details of the quality assurance system(s) it is proposed to use to ensure
successful completion of the works.

Signature .................................................
(a person or persons authorised to sign on behalf of the tenderer)

Date ..................}

2007

Page 56 of 240

VOLUME 1
SECTION 4
FORM 4.6.8
ACCOMMODATION FOR THE SUPERVISOR
{Please attach sketches and data detailing the characteristics of the accommodation and facilities intended
to be provided by the tenderer under the relevant items in the bill of quantities/breakdown of the overall
price.

Signature .................................................
(a person or persons authorised to sign on behalf of the tenderer)

Date ..................}
2007

Page 57 of 240

VOLUME 1
SECTION 4
FORM 4.6.9
FURTHER INFORMATION

{Tenderers may add here any further information that they deem useful for the evaluation of their tenders.

Signature ............................................
(a person or persons authorised to sign on behalf of the tenderer)

Date ..................}
2007

Page 58 of 240

VOLUME 1
SECTION 5 :
EVALUATION GRID AND OTHER ANNEXES

2007

Page 59 of 240

ADMINISTRATIVE COMPLIANCE GRID

Contract title:

Tender
envelope
number

Rehabilitation of the Court Building in Sarajevo hosting Sarajevo

Municipal Court and Sarajevo Cantonal Court

Tenderer's name

Nationality of
tenderer
(consortium) 6
eligible?
(Yes/No)

Documentation
complete?
(Yes/No)

Language
as
required?
(Yes/No)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

If the tender is from a consortium, all its members must be of an eligible nationality.

2007

Page 60 of 240

Publication reference:

Tender
submission
form duly
completed,
including
signed
declarations
?
(Yes/No)

Consortium
agreement
signed by all
partners?
(Yes/No/Not
applicable)

Europeaid/125-893/L/WKS/BA

Subcontracting
statement
acceptable?
(Yes/No/No
t applicable)

Other
administrative
requirements
in tender
dossier?
(Yes/No/Not
applicable)

Overall
decision?
(Accept/
Reject)

Chairperson's name
Chairperson's signature
Date

2007

Page 61 of 240

EVALUATION GRID

Nationalities of
subcontractors
eligible?

Other technical
requirements in
tender dossier?

(Yes/No)

(Yes/No/Not
applicable)

N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

2007

Publication reference:

Page 62 of 240

Technical compliance?
(Yes/No)

Ancillary services as
required? (OK/a/b//NA)

(Yes/No)

Compliance with technical

specifications? (OK/a/b/)

Rules of origin
respected?

Technical capacity?
(OK/a/b/)

Tender envelope N

Tenderer's name

Professional capacity?
(OK/a/b/)

Rehabilitation of the Court Building in Sarajevo hosting Sarajevo Municipal Court and
Sarajevo Cantonal Court

Economic and financial

capacity? (OK/a/b/)

Contract title:

Observations

Europeaid/125-893/L/WKS/BA

Evaluator's name
Evaluator's signature
Date

2007

Page 63 of 240

VOLUME 2
SECTION 1 :
CONTRACT FORM
WORKS CONTRACT FOR EUROPEAN COMMUNITY
EXTERNAL ACTIONS

FINANCED FROM THE EC GENERAL BUDGET

<Full name of and address of the of Contracting Authority> [if centralised tender procedures The
European Community, represented by the European Commission, for and on behalf of the government of
< name of beneficiary country/countries>] > ("The Contracting Authority"),
of the one part,
and
<Full official Name of Contractor>
[Legal status/title]7
[Official registration number]8
[Full official address]
[VAT number]9, (the Contractor)
of the other part,
have agreed as follows:
PROJECT [title and number]
CONTRACT [number]
Whereas the Contracting Authority is desirous that certain works should be executed by the Contractor, viz.:
Construction of
...............................................................................................................................................
and has accepted a tender by the Contractor for the execution and completion of such works and the
remedying of any defects therein.

It is hereby agreed as follows:

Article 1. In this contract words and expressions shall have the meanings assigned to them in the
contractual conditions set out below.
Article 2. The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this
contract, in the following order of precedence:

Where the contracting party is an individual.

Where applicable.
9
Except where the contracting party is not VAT registered.
8

2007

Page 64 of 240

(a) the contract,

(b) the Special Conditions,
(c) the General Conditions,
(d) the technical specifications,
(e) the design documentation (drawings),
(f) the bill of quantities (after arithmetical corrections)/breakdown,
(g) the tender with appendix,
(h) any other documents forming part of the contract.
Addenda shall have the order of precedence of the document they are modifying.
Article 3. In consideration of the payments to be made by the Contracting Authority to the Contractor as
hereinafter mentioned, the Contractor undertakes to execute and complete the works and
remedy defects therein in full compliance with the provisions of the contract.
Article 4. The Contracting Authority hereby agrees to pay the Contractor in consideration of the
execution and completion of the works and remedying of defects therein the amount of:
- Contract price (excluding VAT/other taxes).......................................................................euro
- VAT and other taxes .................................................................................................euro
- Contract price (in words:...........................................................................................euro)
or such other sum as may become payable under the provisions of the contract at the times and in the
manner prescribed by the contract. VAT shall be paid in compliance with the binding regulations, national
law and international agreements concerning the execution of the program. VAT and other taxes shall not
be paid on the funds originating from EC funds.
Article 5. In witness whereof the parties hereto have signed the contract. This contract shall take effect
on the date on which it is signed by the last party, namely the Contractor.
Done in English in three originals, two originals being for the Contracting Authority and one original
being for the Contractor.
For the Contractor

For the Contracting Authority

Name:

Name:

Title:

Title:

Signature:

Signature:

Date:

Date:
Name:
Title:
Signature:

Date:

2007

Page 65 of 240

VOLUME 2
SECTION 2 :
GENERAL CONDITIONS
FOR WORKS CONTRACTS FINANCED BY THE EUROPEAN
COMMUNITY
CONTENTS
PRELIMINARY PROVISIONS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------68
ARTICLE 1 : DEFINITIONS -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------68
ARTICLE 2 : LAW AND LANGUAGE OF THE CONTRACT --------------------------------------------------68
ARTICLE 3 : ORDER OF PRECEDENCE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS -----------------------------------68
ARTICLE 4 : COMMUNICATIONS -----------------------------------------------------------------------------68
ARTICLE 5 : SUPERVISOR AND SUPERVISOR'S REPRESENTATIVE -------------------------------------69
ARTICLE 6 : ASSIGNMENT-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------69
ARTICLE 7 : SUBCONTRACTING ------------------------------------------------------------------------------70
OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTING AUTHORITY ------------------------------------------------70
ARTICLE 8 : SUPPLY OF DOCUMENTS -----------------------------------------------------------------------70
ARTICLE 9 : ACCESS TO THE SITE ---------------------------------------------------------------------------71
ARTICLE 10 : ASSISTANCE WITH LOCAL REGULATIONS ------------------------------------------------71
OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR--------------------------------------------------------------------71
ARTICLE 11 : GENERAL OBLIGATIONS ---------------------------------------------------------------------71
ARTICLE 12 : SUPERINTENDENCE OF THE WORKS -------------------------------------------------------73
ARTICLE 13 : PERFORMANCE GUARANTEES---------------------------------------------------------------74
ARTICLE 14 : INSURANCE -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------74
ARTICLE 15 : IMPLEMENTATION PROGRAMME -----------------------------------------------------------75
ARTICLE 16 : DETAILED BREAKDOWN OF PRICES --------------------------------------------------------75
ARTICLE 17 : CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS -----------------------------------------------------------------76
ARTICLE 18 : SUFFICIENCY OF TENDER PRICES ----------------------------------------------------------76
ARTICLE 19 : EXCEPTIONAL RISKS--------------------------------------------------------------------------77
ARTICLE 20 : SAFETY ON SITE -------------------------------------------------------------------------------77
ARTICLE 21 : SAFEGUARDING ADJACENT PROPERTIES -------------------------------------------------78
ARTICLE 22 : INTERFERENCE WITH TRAFFIC -------------------------------------------------------------78
ARTICLE 23 : CABLES AND CONDUITS ----------------------------------------------------------------------78
ARTICLE 24 : SETTING-OUT ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------79
ARTICLE 25 : DEMOLISHED MATERIALS -------------------------------------------------------------------79
ARTICLE 26 : DISCOVERIES -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------79
ARTICLE 27 : TEMPORARY WORKS -------------------------------------------------------------------------80
ARTICLE 28 : SOIL STUDIES ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------80
ARTICLE 29 : OVERLAPPING CONTRACTS -----------------------------------------------------------------80
ARTICLE 30 : PATENTS AND LICENCES ---------------------------------------------------------------------80
COMMENCEMENT OF IMPLEMENTATION AND DELAYS ------------------------------------------80
ARTICLE 31 : COMMENCEMENT ORDER--------------------------------------------------------------------81
ARTICLE 32 : PERIOD OF IMPLEMENTATION OF TASKS -------------------------------------------------81
ARTICLE 33 : EXTENSION OF THE PERIOD OF IMPLEMENTATION OF TASKS ------------------------81
ARTICLE 34 : DELAYS IN IMPLEMENTATION --------------------------------------------------------------81
ARTICLE 35 : MODIFICATIONS -------------------------------------------------------------------------------82
ARTICLE 36 : SUSPENSION ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------83
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ------------------------------------------------------------------------84
ARTICLE 37 :WORK REGISTER -------------------------------------------------------------------------------84
ARTICLE 38 : ORIGIN ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------85
ARTICLE 39 : QUALITY OF WORKS AND MATERIALS-----------------------------------------------------85
ARTICLE 40 : INSPECTION AND TESTING -------------------------------------------------------------------86
ARTICLE 41: REJECTION --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------86
2007

Page 66 of 240

ARTICLE 42 : OWNERSHIP OF PLANT AND MATERIALS --------------------------------------------------87

PAYMENTS
87
ARTICLE 43 : GENERAL PRINCIPLES ------------------------------------------------------------------------87
ARTICLE 44 : PRE-FINANCING--------------------------------------------------------------------------------88
ARTICLE 45 : RETENTION MONIES --------------------------------------------------------------------------89
ARTICLE 46 : PRICE REVISION -------------------------------------------------------------------------------89
ARTICLE 47 : MEASUREMENT --------------------------------------------------------------------------------89
ARTICLE 48 : INTERIM PAYMENTS --------------------------------------------------------------------------90
ARTICLE 49 : FINAL STATEMENT OF ACCOUNT -----------------------------------------------------------91
ARTICLE 50 : DELAYED PAYMENTS -------------------------------------------------------------------------91
ARTICLE 51 : PAYMENTS TO THIRD PARTIES --------------------------------------------------------------92
ARTICLE 52 : CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL PAYMENT ------------------------------------------------------92
ARTICLE 53 : END DATE ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------92
ACCEPTANCE AND MAINTENANCE ----------------------------------------------------------------------93
ARTICLE 54 : FIXING A VERIFICATION DATE --------------------------------------------------------------93
ARTICLE 55 : VERIFICATION OPERATIONS ----------------------------------------------------------------93
ARTICLE 56 : PARTIAL ACCEPTANCE -----------------------------------------------------------------------93
ARTICLE 57: PROVISIONAL ACCEPTANCE -----------------------------------------------------------------93
ARTICLE 58 : MAINTENANCE OBLIGATIONS---------------------------------------------------------------94
ARTICLE 59 : FINAL ACCEPTANCE --------------------------------------------------------------------------95
BREACH OF CONTRACT AND TERMINATION----------------------------------------------------------95
ARTICLE 60 : BREACH OF CONTRACT ----------------------------------------------------------------------95
ARTICLE 61 : TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTING AUTHORITY ------------------------------------96
ARTICLE 62 : TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR -----------------------------------------------------98
ARTICLE 63 : FORCE MAJEURE ------------------------------------------------------------------------------98
ARTICLE 64 : DEATH -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------99
DISPUTE SETTLEMENT----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------99
ARTICLE 65 : AMICABLE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT ---------------------------------------------------------99
ARTICLE 66 : DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BY LITIGATION----------------------------------------------------99
ETHICS CLAUSES -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------99
ARTICLE 67 : ETHICS CLAUSES ------------------------------------------------------------------------------99
ARTICLE 68 : ADMINISTRATIVE AND FINANCIAL PENALTIES ---------------------------------------- 100
ARTICLE 69 : CHECKS AND AUDITS BY COMMUNITY BODIES ---------------------------------------- 101

2007

Page 67 of 240

PRELIMINARY PROVISIONS
ARTICLE 1 : Definitions
1.1 The headings and titles in these General Conditions shall not be taken as part thereof or be taken into
consideration in the interpretation of the contract.
1.2 Where the context so permits, words in the singular shall be deemed to include the plural and vice
versa and words in the masculine shall be deemed to include the feminine and vice versa.
1.3 Words designating persons or parties shall include firms and companies and any organisation having
legal capacity.
ARTICLE 2 : Law and language of the contract
2.1 The Special Conditions shall specify the law governing all matters not covered by the contract.
2.2 The contract and all written communications between the parties will be drafted in the language of the
procedure.
ARTICLE 3 : Order of precedence of contract documents
3.1 Save where otherwise provided in the special conditions, the contract is made up of the following
documents, in order of precedence:
a) the contract
b) the Special Conditions (Part II)
c) the General Conditions (Part I)
d) the technical specifications
e) the design documentation (drawings)
f) the priced bill of quantities (after arithmetical corrections)/price breakdown
g) the tender with the appendix
h) any other document forming part of the contract.
Addenda have the order of precedence of the document they are modifying.
3.2. The various documents making up the contract shall be deemed to be mutually explanatory; in
cases of ambiguity or divergence, they should be read in the order in which they appear above.
ARTICLE 4 : Communications
4.1 Communications between the Contracting Authority and/or the Supervisor on the one hand, and the
Contractor on the other, shall be exclusively in writing. Unless otherwise specified in the Special
Conditions, communications between the Contracting Authority and/or the Supervisor on the one hand,
and the Contractor on the other hand, shall be sent by post, cable, telex, e-mail, fax transmission, or
delivered by hand, to the addresses designated by the Parties for that purpose.
4.2 If the person sending a communication requires acknowledgment of receipt, he shall indicate this in
his communication. Whenever there is a deadline for the receipt of a written communication, the sender
should ask for an acknowledgement of receipt of his communication. In any event, the sender shall take
all necessary measures to ensure receipt of his communication.
4.3 Wherever the contract provides for the giving or issue of any notice, consent, approval, certificate or
decision, unless otherwise specified such notice, consent, approval, certificate or decision shall be in
writing and the words "notify", "certify", "approve" or "decide" shall be construed accordingly. Any such
consent, approval certificate or decision shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed.
2007

Page 68 of 240

ARTICLE 5 : Supervisor and Supervisor's representative

5.1 The Supervisor shall carry out the duties specified in the contract. Except where expressly stated in
the contract, the Supervisor shall not have authority to relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations.
5.2 The Supervisor may, from time to time, while retaining ultimate responsibility, delegate to the
Supervisor's representative any of the duties and authority vested in the Supervisor and he may at any
time revoke such delegation or replace the representative. Any such delegation, revocation or replacement
shall be in writing and shall not take effect until a copy thereof has been delivered to the Contractor.
5.3 Any communication given by the Supervisor's representative to the Contractor in accordance with the
terms of such delegation shall have the same effect as if it had been given by the Supervisor, save that:
a) a failure on the part of the Supervisor's representative to reject any work, materials or plant shall not
prejudice the authority of the Supervisor to reject such work, materials or plant and to give the
instructions necessary for the rectification thereof;
b) the Supervisor shall be at liberty to reverse or vary the contents of such communication.
5.4 Instructions and/or orders issued by the Supervisor shall take the form of administrative orders.
Such orders shall be dated, numbered and entered by the Supervisor in a register, and copies thereof
delivered by hand, where appropriate, to the Contractor's representative.
5.5 The Contractor shall ensure that the Supervisor has free access to the places in which the works
covered by the contract are carried out and shall provide the supervisor with any information he might
require. The Supervisor may arrange for the supervision and inspection of any item being prepared and
manufactured for supply under the contract. To this end, he may apply such tests as he considers
necessary from among those provided for in these General Conditions, supplemented and amended where
appropriate by the Special Conditions, in order to establish whether the materials and objects are of the
requisite quality and quantity. He may require the replacement or repair, as the case may be, of items,
which do not conform with the contract, even after their installation. He may also propose a reduction in
price, which, if accepted by the Contractor, shall cover the latter for any imperfections, which have been
found. The Contractor may not rely on the fact that such supervision and inspection have been effected in
order to evade his responsibility in the event of the works being rejected by the Supervisor.
5.6 The Contractor shall place at the disposal of the Supervisor, temporarily and free of charge, the
patterns and instruments specified in the Special Conditions which are considered necessary for
verifying and inspecting the works to be carried out and the items to be provided.
5.7 In the performance of his duties, the Supervisor shall not disclose information on the methods of
manufacture and operation of the undertakings which he has obtained by reason of his supervision and
inspection, except to those authorities that need to know it.
ARTICLE 6 : Assignment
6.1 An assignment shall be valid only if it is a written agreement by which the Contractor transfers his
contract or part thereof to a third party.
6.2 The Contractor may not, without the prior written consent of the Contracting Authority, assign the
contract or any part thereof, or any benefit or interest thereunder, except in the following cases:
a) a charge, in favour of the Contractor's bankers, of any monies due or to become due under the contract;
or
b) the assignment to the Contractor's insurers of the Contractor's right to obtain relief against any other
person liable in cases where the insurers have discharged the Contractor's loss or liability.

2007

Page 69 of 240

6.3 For the purpose of Article 6.2, the approval of an assignment by the Contracting Authority shall not
relieve the Contractor of his obligations for the part of the contract already performed or the part not
assigned.
6.4 If the Contractor has assigned his contract without authorisation, the Contracting Authority may,
without giving formal notice thereof, apply as of right the sanctions for breach of contract provided for in
Articles 60 and 61.
6.5 Assignees must satisfy the eligibility criteria applicable for the award of the contract.
ARTICLE 7 : Subcontracting
7.1 A subcontract shall be valid only if it is a written agreement by which the Contractor entrusts
implementation of a part of his contract to a third party.
7.2 The Contractor shall not subcontract without the prior written authorisation of the Contracting
Authority. The elements of the contract to be subcontracted and the identity of the subcontractors shall be
notified to the Contracting Authority. With due regard to the provisions of Article 4.3, the Contracting
Authority shall notify the Contractor of its decision within 30 days of receiving the notification, stating its
reasons if authorisation is withheld.
7.3 Subcontractors must satisfy the eligibility criteria applicable for the award of the contract and they can
not be in any of the situations excluding them from participating in contracts which are listed in Section
2.3.3 of the Practical Guide to contract procedure for EC external actions.
7.4 The Contracting Authority shall not be bound to the subcontractors.
7.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for the acts, defaults and negligence of his subcontractors and
their agents or employees, as if they were the acts, defaults or negligence of the Contractor, his agents or
employees. The approval by the Contracting Authority of the subcontracting of any part of the contract or
of the subcontractor to perform any part of the works shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his
obligations under the contract.
7.6 If a subcontractor has undertaken any continuing obligation extending for a period exceeding that of
the maintenance period under the contract towards the Contractor in respect of the work executed or the
goods, materials, plant or services supplied by the subcontractor, the Contractor shall, at any time after
the expiration of the maintenance period, transfer immediately to the Contracting Authority, at the
Contracting Authority's request and cost, the benefit of such obligation for the unexpired duration thereof.
7.7 If the Contractor enters into a subcontract without approval, the Contracting Authority may, without
giving formal notice thereof, apply as of right the sanctions for breach of contract provided for in Article
60.
OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTING AUTHORITY
ARTICLE 8 : Supply of documents
8.1 Save where otherwise provided in the special conditions, within 30 days of the signing of the contract,
the Supervisor shall, on behalf of the Contracting Authority, provide the Contractor, free of charge, with a
copy of the drawings prepared for the implementation of the contract and a copy of the specifications and
other contract documents. The Contractor may purchase additional copies of these drawings,
specifications and other documents, in so far as they are available. Upon the issue of the maintenance
certificate, or upon final acceptance, the Contractor shall return to the Supervisor all drawings,
specifications and other contract documents.

2007

Page 70 of 240

8.2 Unless it is necessary for the purposes of the contract, the drawings, specifications and other
documents provided by the Contracting Authority shall not be used or communicated to a third party by
the Contractor without the prior consent of the Supervisor.
8.3 The Supervisor shall have authority to issue to the Contractor, on behalf of the Contracting Authority,
administrative orders incorporating such supplementary documents and instructions as are necessary for
the proper execution of the works and the remedying of any defects therein.
8.4 The special conditions must indicate the procedure used, if necessary, by the Contracting Authority
and the Supervisor to approve drawings and other documents provided by the Contractor.
ARTICLE 9 : Access to the site
9.1 The Contracting Authority shall, in due time and in conformity with the progress of the works, place
the site and access thereto at the disposal of the Contractor in accordance with the programme of
implementation referred to in these General Conditions. The Contractor shall afford other persons
concerned every reasonable opportunity to carry out their work, as set out in the Special Conditions or as
required by administrative orders.
9.2 Land procured for the Contractor by the Contracting Authority shall not be used by the Contractor for
purposes other than the implementation of the contract.
9.3 The Contractor shall keep any premises placed at his disposal in good condition while he is in
occupation. He shall, if so required by the Contracting Authority or the Supervisor, restore them to their
original state on completion of the contract, taking into account normal wear and tear.
9.4 The Contractor shall not be entitled to any payment for improvements resulting from work carried out
on his own initiative.
ARTICLE 10 : Assistance with local regulations
10.1 The Contractor may request the assistance of the Contracting Authority in obtaining copies of laws,
regulations and information on local customs, orders or bye-laws of the country where the works are
located which may affect the Contractor in the execution of his obligations under the contract. The
Contracting Authority may provide the assistance requested to the Contractor at the Contractor's cost.
10.2 If necessary, the Contractor shall duly notify the Contracting Authority of details of the works so that
the Contracting Authority can obtain the requisite permits or import licences.
10.3 If necessary, the Contracting Authority will undertake to obtain, in accordance with the Special
Conditions, the requisite permits or import licences within a reasonable period, taking account of the
implementation dates for the contract.
10.4 Subject to the provisions of the laws and regulations on foreign labour of the states in which the
supplies are to be delivered, the Contracting Authority shall make every effort to help the Contractor
obtain all the visas and permits required for the personnel whose services the Contractor and the
Contracting Authority consider necessary and residence permits for their families.
10.5 The Contractor shall respect internationally agreed core labour standards, e.g. the ILO core labour
standards, conventions on freedom of association and collective bargaining, elimination of forced and
compulsory labour, elimination of discrimination in respect of employment and occupation, and the
abolition of child labour
OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR
ARTICLE 11 : General Obligations

2007

Page 71 of 240

11.1 The Contractor shall, with due care and diligence, and in accordance with the provisions of the
contract, design the works to the extent stated in the contract, and execute, complete and remedy any
defects in the works. The Contractor shall provide all superintendence, personnel, materials, plant,
equipment and all other items, whether of a temporary or permanent nature, required for the design,
execution and completion of works, and for remedying any defects, in so far as is specified in, or can be
reasonably inferred from, the contract.
11.1.1 For design and build contracts only, the Contractor shall carry out, and assume responsibility for,
the design of the works with the help of experienced designers satisfying the criteria laid down by the
Contracting Authority. He shall draw up the requisite technical documents according to the provisions
laid down in the special conditions and technical specifications. These documents must be submitted to
the Supervisor for approval, in accordance with the Special Conditions, and may be corrected at the
Contractor's expense to satisfy the Contracting Authority's contractual requirements and eliminate errors,
omissions, ambiguities, inconsistencies and other drafting defects. The Contractor shall train the
Contracting Authority's personnel and deliver and update the set of detailed documents and operating and
maintenance manuals, in accordance with the Special Conditions.
11.2 The staff and workmen employed by the Contractor must be sufficient in number, and each must
have the qualifications necessary to ensure due progress and satisfactory execution of the works. The
Contractor shall immediately replace all persons indicated by the Supervisor, in a letter stating reasons, as
hampering the proper execution of the works. The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the
engagement of all staff and labour. He shall comply with all the relevant labour laws applying to his
employees, shall duly pay them and afford them all their legal rights.
11.3 The equipment, which the Contractor has at the site, shall be deemed to be for the purpose of
carrying out the works. The Contractor shall not be entitled to remove it without the written consent of the
Supervisor unless he shows that the said equipment is no longer required for the performance of the
works.
11.4 The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the adequacy, stability and safety of all operations
and methods of construction under the contract.
11.5 The Contractor shall comply fully with any administrative orders given to him. Where the Contractor
considers that the requirements of an administrative order exceed the authority of the Supervisor or the
scope of the contract, he shall, on pain of being time-barred, notify the Supervisor of this fact within 10
days of receiving the administrative order and inform the Contracting Authority. Execution of the
administrative order shall be suspended during this period. The Contractor shall draw up and submit for
the Supervisor's approval a programme of implementation of the contract, in accordance with the detailed
rules laid down in the Special Conditions.
Where appropriate and within a period not exceeding three weeks, the Contractor must, in response to a
reasoned request from the Supervisor, be able to provide a detailed breakdown of his prices.
The Special Conditions shall specify any detailed drawings to be drawn up by the Contractor and
submitted for the Supervisor's approval. The same shall apply to documents and items, which are to be
submitted to the Supervisor for endorsement or acceptance. These detailed drawings, documents and
items may not be reproduced or used for another purpose by the Contracting Authority, nor
communicated to third parties, except with the Contractor's agreement and on payment of fair
compensation.
11.6. The Contractor shall either give an address for service or give an address close to the works, or
appoint an agent residing at that address. He shall notify the Contracting Authority of the address for
service or other address. Should he fail to fulfil this obligation within two months of being notified of the
approval of the contract, all notifications concerning the contract shall be valid when they are sent to the
address given in Art 4 of the Special Conditions.
After final acceptance of the works, the Contractor shall be relieved of this obligation. Should he fail to
inform the Contracting Authority of a change of address before final acceptance of the works, all

2007

Page 72 of 240

notifications concerning the contract shall be valid when they are sent to the address given in Art 4 of the
Special Conditions.
11.7 The Contractor shall respect and abide by all laws and regulations in force in the state of the
contracting authority and shall ensure that his personnel, their dependants, and his local employees also
respect and abide by all such laws and regulations. The Contractor shall indemnify the Contracting
Authority against any claims and proceedings arising from any infringement by the Contractor, his
employees and their dependants of such laws and regulations.
11.8 If the Contractor or any of his subcontractors, agents or servants offers to give or agrees to offer or to
give or gives to any person, any bribe, gift, gratuity or commission as an inducement or reward for doing
or forbearing to do any act in relation to the contract or any other contract with the Contracting Authority;
or for showing favour or disfavour to any person in relation to the contract or any other contract with the
Contracting Authority, then the Contracting Authority may, without prejudice to any accrued rights of the
Contractor under the contract, terminate the contract in accordance with the relevant provisions of these
General Conditions.
11.9 The Contractor shall treat all documents and information received in connection with the contract as
private and confidential. He shall not, save in so far as may be necessary for the purposes of the contract's
execution, publish or disclose any particulars of the contract without the prior consent in writing of the
Contracting Authority or the Supervisor after consultation with the Contracting Authority. If any
disagreement arises as to the necessity for any publication or disclosure for the purpose of the contract,
the decision of the Contracting Authority shall be final.
The Special Conditions shall list the documents and items which may be placed at the disposal of the
Contractor, at the latter's request, to facilitate his work. The Special Conditions shall specify the date and
conditions for the return of these documents and items. The Contractor may purchase, in so far as they are
available, additional copies of these drawings, documents and items. The Supervisor may not hand over
these drawings, documents and items until the performance guarantee is established.
11.10 If the Contractor is a joint venture or consortium of two or more persons, all such persons shall be
jointly and severally bound to fulfil the terms of the contract according to the law of the state of the
Contracting Authority and shall, at the request of the Contracting Authority, designate one of such
persons to act as leader with authority to bind the joint venture or consortium. The composition or
constitution of the joint venture or consortium shall not be altered without the prior consent in writing of
the Contracting Authority.
11.11 Save where the European Commission requests or agrees otherwise, the Contractor shall take the
necessary measures to ensure the visibility of the European Union financing or cofinancing. These
measures must comply with the rules laid down and published by the Commission on the visibility of
external operations.
ARTICLE 12 : Superintendence of the works
12.1 The Contractor shall superintend the works himself or appoint a representative to do so. Such
appointments shall be submitted to the Supervisor for approval. The approval may be withdrawn at any
time. Should the Supervisor refuse to approve, or withdraw approval of the appointment, he shall set out
the grounds on which his decision is based, and the Contractor shall submit an alternative appointment
without delay. The address of the Contractor's representative shall be deemed to be the address for service
given by the Contractor.
12.2 If the Supervisor withdraws his approval of the Contractor's representative, the Contractor shall, as
soon as is practicable, after receiving notice of such withdrawal, remove the representative from the
works and replace him with another representative approved by the Supervisor.

2007

Page 73 of 240

12.3 The Contractor's representative shall have full authority to make any decision necessary for the
execution of the works, to receive and carry out administrative orders and to countersign the work register
referred to in these General Conditions or the Annexes.
12.4 In any event, the Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the works are carried out
satisfactorily, including ensuring that the specifications and administrative orders are adhered to by his
own employees and by his subcontractors and their employees.
ARTICLE 13 : Performance guarantees
13.1 The Contractor shall to, together with the return of the countersigned contract, furnish the
Contracting Authority with a guarantee for the full and proper execution of the contract. The amount of
the guarantee shall be specified in the Special Conditions. It shall be in the range of 5 and 10% of the
amount of the contract price, including any amounts stipulated in addenda to the contract.
13.2 The performance guarantee shall be held against payment to the Contracting Authority for any loss
resulting from the Contractor's failure to perform his contractual obligations fully and properly.
13.3 The performance guarantee shall be in the format given in Volume 2 of the tender dossier and may
be provided in the form of a bank guarantee, a banker's draft, a certified cheque, a bond provided by an
insurance and/or guarantee company or an irrevocable letter of credit made out to the Contracting
Authority.
13.4 The performance guarantee shall be denominated in the currency in which the contract is payable.
No payments shall be made in favour of the Contractor prior to the provision of the guarantee. The
guarantee shall continue to remain valid until the contract has been fully and properly performed.
13.5 If, during the execution of the contract, the natural or legal person providing the guarantee is not able
to abide by his commitments, the Contracting Authority shall give formal notice to the Contractor to
provide a new guarantee on the same terms as the previous one. Should the Contractor fail to provide a
new guarantee, the Contracting Authority may terminate the contract.
Before applying these measures, it shall send the Contractor a registered letter with acknowledgement of
delivery serving notice for the establishment of the performance guarantee.
Such notice shall set a new time limit, which may not be less than 15 days and which shall commence on
the date of delivery of the letter.
13.6 The Contracting Authority shall demand payment from the guarantee of all sums for which the
guarantor is liable under the guarantee due to the Contractor's default under the contract, in accordance
with the terms of the guarantee and up to the value thereof. The guarantor shall, without delay, pay those
sums upon demand from the Contracting Authority and may not raise any objection for any reason
whatsoever. Before making any claim under the performance guarantee, the Contracting Authority shall
notify the Contractor stating the nature of the default in respect of which the claim is to be made.
13.7 Unless the Special Conditions provide otherwise, the performance guarantee shall be released within
45 days of the signing of the final statement of account. However, in view of the special features of the
contract, the Special Conditions may provide for half the guarantee to be released or refunded on the date
of provisional acceptance.
ARTICLE 14 : Insurance
14.1 The Contractor shall take out insurance in both his own and the Contracting Authority's name
against any loss or damage for which he is liable under the contract. Such insurance shall, unless the
Special Conditions provide otherwise, cover:
a) the works, together with materials and plant for incorporation therein, to the full replacement cost
against all loss or damage from whatever cause arising other than from force majeure or risks attributable
under the contract to the Contracting Authority;
2007

Page 74 of 240

b) an additional sum of 15% of such replacement cost or any other amount specified in the Special
Conditions, to cover all the additional direct or indirect costs of making good losses or damage, including
professional fees and the cost of demolishing and removing any part of the works and of removing debris
of whatever nature;
(c) the Contractor's equipment and other things brought onto the site by the Contractor, for a sum
sufficient to provide their replacement at the site.
14.2 The Contractor may substitute the insurance provided for in Article 14.1 by a comprehensive
insurance policy that covers, inter alia, the elements of Article 14.1(a), (b) and (c). In that case, the
Contractor shall notify the insurer of the Contracting Authority's interest.
14.3 The Contractor shall take out insurance against industrial accidents and civil liabilities arising from
the execution of the works to any person employed by the Contractor on the works or to the Contracting
Authority and its employees. Such liability shall be unlimited in the case of personal injuries.
14.4 The Contractor shall take out insurance covering liability with regard to risks and civil liability
resulting from an act or omission attributed to him, to his legal successors or agents. Such insurance shall
be for at least the amount stated in the Special Conditions. The Contractor shall ensure that all his
subcontractors have taken out similar insurance.
14.5 All the insurance referred to in this Article shall be taken out within 30 days of the notification of the
award of the contract, and shall be subject to approval by the Contracting Authority. Such insurance shall
take effect front the commencement of the works and remain in force until final acceptance of the works.
On being asked to do so by the Contracting Authority or the Supervisor, the Contractor shall promptly
present the Contracting Authority with the insurance policy and proof that premiums have been duly paid.
14.6 Notwithstanding the Contractor's insurance obligations under Article 14, the Contractor shall bear
sole liability for, and indemnify the Contracting Authority and the Supervisor against, any claims by third
parties for damage to property or personal injuries arising from the execution of the works by the
Contractor, his subcontractors and employees.
ARTICLE 15 : Implementation programme
15.1 If the Special Conditions so require, the Contractor shall submit a programme of implementation of
the contract for the approval of the Supervisor. The programme shall contain at least the following:
a) the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry out the works;
b) the deadlines for submission and approval of the drawings;
c) a general description of the methods which the Contractor proposes to adopt for carrying out the works;
and
d) such further details and information as the Supervisor may reasonably require.
15.2 The Special Conditions shall specify the time limit within which the programme of implementation
must be submitted to the Supervisor for approval. They may set time limits within which the Contractor
must submit all or part of the detailed drawings, documents and items. They shall also state the deadline
for the Supervisor's approval or acceptance of the programme of implementation, detailed drawings,
documents and items. The approval of the programme by the Supervisor shall not relieve the Contractor
of any of his obligations under the contract.
15.3 No material alteration to the programme shall be made without the approval of the Supervisor. If,
however, the progress of the works does not conform to the programme, the Supervisor may instruct the
Contractor to revise the programme and submit the revised programme to him for approval.
ARTICLE 16 : Detailed breakdown of prices

2007

Page 75 of 240

16.1 Where necessary for the purposes of the contract, the Contractor shall provide a detailed breakdown
of his rates and prices within no more than 20 days of the Supervisor's reasoned request.
16.2 After the notification of award, the Contractor shall provide the Supervisor, for his information only,
with a detailed quarterly cashflow estimate of all payments that may be due to the Contractor under the
contract. The Contractor shall subsequently supply revised quarterly cashflow estimates, if so required by
the Supervisor. The communication shall not impose any liability whatsoever on the Contracting
Authority or the Supervisor.
ARTICLE 17 : Contractor's drawings
17.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Supervisor for approval:
a) the drawings, documents, samples and/or models, according to the time limits and procedures laid
down in the Special Conditions;
b) such drawings as the Supervisor may reasonably require for the implementation of the contract.
17.2 If the Supervisor fails to notify his decision of approval referred to in Article 17.1 within the
deadlines referred to in the contract or the approved programme of implementation, such drawings,
documents, samples or models shall be deemed to be approved on expiry of the deadlines. If no deadline
is specified, they shall be deemed to be approved 30 days after receipt.
17.3 Approved drawings, documents, samples and models shall be signed or otherwise identified by the
Supervisor and may only be departed from on the Supervisor's instructions. Any of the Contractor's
drawings, documents, samples or models which the Supervisor refuse to approve shall immediately be
modified to meet the requirements of the Supervisor and resubmitted by the Contractor for approval.
17.4 The Contractor shall supply additional copies of approved drawings in the form and numbers stated
in the contract or in subsequent administrative orders.
17.5 The approval of the drawings, documents, samples or models by the Supervisor shall not relieve the
Contractor from any of his obligations under the contract.
17.6 The Supervisor shall have the right to inspect all drawings, documents, samples or models relating to
the contract at the Contractor's premises at all reasonable times.
17.7 Before provisional acceptance of the works, the Contractor shall supply operating and maintenance
manuals together with drawings, which shall be detailed enough to enable the Contracting Authority to
operate, maintain, adjust and repair all parts of the works. Unless otherwise stated in the Special
Conditions, the manuals and drawings shall be in the language of the contract.. The works shall not be
considered complete for the purpose of provisional acceptance until such manuals and drawings have
been supplied to the Contracting Authority.
ARTICLE 18 : Sufficiency of tender prices
18.1 Subject to the Special Conditions, the Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected and examined
the site and its surroundings and to have satisfied himself as to the nature of the ground and the subsoil
before submitting his tender. He shall also be deemed to have taken into account the form and nature of
the site, the extent and nature of the work and materials necessary for the completion of the works, the
means of communication with and access to the site, the accommodation he may require and in general to
have obtained for himself all necessary information as to the risks, contingencies and any other
circumstances influencing or affecting his tender.
18.2 The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself before submitting his tender as to the
correctness and sufficiency of the tender and of the rates and prices stated in the bill of quantities or price
schedule, which shall, save where otherwise provided in the Special Conditions, cover all his obligations
under the contract.
2007

Page 76 of 240

18.3 Since the Contractor is deemed to have determined his prices on the basis of his own calculations,
operations and estimates, he shall, at no additional charge, carry out any work that is the subject of any
item whatsoever in his tender for which he indicates neither a unit price nor a lump sum.
ARTICLE 19 : Exceptional risks
19.1 If, during the execution of the works, the Contractor encounters artificial obstructions or physical
conditions which could not reasonably have been foreseen by an experienced Contractor, and if the
Contractor is of the opinion that additional costs will be incurred and/or an extension of the period of
implementation of the contract will be necessary as a result of this, he shall notify the Supervisor in
accordance with the articles of the General Conditions concerning the extension of the period of
implementation and claims for additional payments. The Contractor's notification shall specify the
artificial obstructions and/or physical conditions, giving details of the expected effects thereof, the
measures he is taking or intends to take and the extent of the expected delay in, or interference with, the
execution of the works.
19.2 On receipt of notification, the Supervisor may inter alia:
a) require the Contractor to provide an estimate of the cost of the measures he is taking or intends to take;
b) approve the measures referred to in Article 19.2(a) with or without modification;
c) give written instructions as to how the artificial obstructions or physical conditions are to be dealt with;
d) order that the contract be modified, suspended or terminated.
19.3 In so far as he considers that some or all of the said artificial obstructions or physical conditions
could not reasonably have been foreseen by an experienced Contractor, the Supervisor shall:
a) take into account any delay suffered by the Contractor as a result of such obstructions or conditions in
determining any extension of the period of implementation to which the Contractor is entitled under the
General Conditions; and/or
b) calculate, in the event of artificial obstructions or physical conditions other than weather conditions,
the additional payments due to the Contractor under the General Conditions.
19.4 If the Supervisor decides that some or all of the artificial obstructions or physical conditions could
reasonably have been foreseen by an experienced Contractor, he shall so inform the Contractor as soon as
practicable.
19.5 Weather conditions shall not entitle the Contractor to claim additional payments under Article 52.
Where the Supervisor judges that weather conditions that are normally foreseeable or specified in the
Special Conditions make the smooth execution of the works difficult, he may decide to suspend such
works for a given period. During the periods of suspension, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, take
every precaution necessary to safeguard the works and materials.
ARTICLE 20 : Safety on site
20.1 The Contractor shall have the right to forbid access to the site to any person not involved in the
execution of the contract, with the exception of persons authorised by the Supervisor or representatives of
the Contracting Authority.
20.2 The Contractor shall ensure the safety of sites throughout the period of execution and shall be
responsible for taking the necessary steps, in the interests of his employees, agents of the Contracting
Authority and third parties, to prevent any loss or accident which may result from carrying out the works.
20.3 The Contractor shall, on his own responsibility and at his own expense, do his utmost to ensure that
existing structures and installations are protected, preserved and maintained. He shall be responsible for
providing and maintaining at his own expense all lighting, protection, fencing and security equipment that
2007

Page 77 of 240

proves necessary for the proper implementation of the works or that the Supervisor may reasonably
require.
20.4 If, during the implementation of the contract, urgent measures are necessary to obviate any risk of
accident or damage or to ensure safety after an accident or damage, the Supervisor shall give formal
notice to the Contractor to do what is necessary. If the Contractor is unwilling or unable to undertake the
necessary measures, the Supervisor may, to the extent that the Contractor is liable, arrange for such
measures to be implemented at the expense of the Contractor.
ARTICLE 21 : Safeguarding adjacent properties
21.1 On his own responsibility and at his expense, the Contractor shall take all the precautions required
by good construction practice and by the prevailing circumstances to safeguard adjacent properties and
avoid causing any abnormal disturbance therein.
21.2 The Contractor shall indemnify the Contracting Authority against the financial consequences of all
claims by neighbouring landowners or residents to the extent that the Contractor is liable and to the extent
that the damage to adjacent properties is not the result of a hazard arising from the design or method of
construction imposed on the Contractor by the Contracting Authority or the Supervisor.
ARTICLE 22 : Interference with traffic
22.1 The Contractor shall ensure that the works and installations do not impede traffic on communication
links such as roads, railways, waterways and aerodromes, save as permitted under the Special Conditions.
He shall, in particular, take account of weight restrictions when selecting routes and vehicles.
22.2 Any special measures which the Contractor considers necessary or which are specified in the Special
Conditions or which are required by the Contracting Authority in order to protect or strengthen sections
of roads, tracks or bridges shall be at the expense of the Contractor, whether or not they are carried out by
the Contractor. The Contractor shall inform the Supervisor of any special measures he intends to take
before carrying them out. The repair of any damage caused to roads, tracks or bridges by the transport of
materials, plant or equipment shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
ARTICLE 23 : Cables and conduits
23.1 Where, in the course of carrying out the works, the Contractor encounters markers indicating the
course of underground cables, conduits and installations, he shall leave such markers in place or, if the
execution of the works required their temporary removal, put them back. Such ancillary operations shall
require the prior authorisation of the Supervisor.
23.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for preserving, removing or putting back, as the case may be, the
cables, conduits and installations specified by the Contracting Authority in the contract and shall cover
the cost of doing so.
23.3 Where the presence of cables, conduits and installations has not been specified in the contract but is
revealed by markers and signs, the Contractor shall have a general duty of care and obligations
comparable to those above regarding preservation, removal and replacement. In this case, the Contracting
Authority shall compensate the Contractor for such expenditure, to the extent that such work is necessary
for the execution of the contract.
23.4 However, the obligations to remove and replace cables, conduits and installations and the
expenditure resulting therefrom shall not be the responsibility of the Contractor if the Contracting
Authority decides to assume them itself. The same shall apply where this obligation and the expenditure
resulting therefrom are borne by a specialist administration or an agent.

2007

Page 78 of 240

23.5 Where any work on the site is likely to disrupt or damage a public utility service, the Contractor shall
immediately inform the Supervisor in writing, giving a reasonable period of notice so that suitable
measures can be taken in time to allow work to continue normally.
ARTICLE 24 : Setting-out
24.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for:
a) the accurate setting-out of the works in relation to the original marks, lines and reference levels
provided by the Supervisor;
b) the accuracy of the positioning, levelling, dimensioning and alignment of all parts of the works; and
c) the provision of all necessary instruments, accessories and labour in connection with the foregoing
responsibilities.
24.2 If, at any time during the execution of the works, any error appears in the positioning, levelling,
dimensioning or alignment of any part of the works, the Contractor shall, if the Supervisor so requires,
rectify such errors at his own cost and to the satisfaction of the Supervisor, unless the error is based on
inaccurate data supplied by the Supervisor, in which case the Contracting Authority shall be responsible
for the cost of rectification.
24.3 The checking of any setting-out or of any alignment or levelling by the Supervisor shall in no way
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the accuracy of these operations. The Contractor shall
carefully protect and preserve all markers, sightrails, pegs and other items used in setting out the works.
ARTICLE 25 : Demolished materials
25.1 Where the contract includes demolition work, materials and articles obtained therefrom shall, unless
the Special Conditions and/or the law of the state of the Contracting Authority provide otherwise and
subject to the provisions of the General Conditions on discoveries, be the property of the Contractor.
25.2 Should the Special Conditions assign the ownership of materials or all or part of the articles obtained
from the demolition work to the Contracting Authority, the Contractor shall take all the necessary
precautions to ensure that they are preserved. He shall be liable for any destruction of, or damage to, such
materials or articles caused by him or his agents.
25.3 Irrespective of the use to which the Contracting Authority intends to put the materials or articles over
which it retains ownership, all costs incurred in transporting and storing them and all warehouse charges
at the place indicated by the Supervisor shall be borne by the Contractor for any carriage not exceeding
100 metres.
25.4 Save where the Special Conditions provide otherwise, the Contractor shall, at his expense,
progressively remove rubble and other demolition materials, rubbish and debris from the site.
ARTICLE 26 : Discoveries
26.1 Discoveries of any interest whatsoever made during excavation or demolition work shall
immediately be brought to the attention of the Supervisor. The Supervisor shall decide how such
discoveries are to be dealt with, taking due account of the law of the state of the Contracting Authority.
26.2 The Contracting Authority reserves the ownership of materials found during excavation and
demolition works on land belonging to it, subject to its compensating the Contractor for any special
efforts he may have made.
26.3 Artefacts, antiquities, natural or numismatic objects, other objects of academic interest, rare objects
or objects made of precious metals found during excavation or demolition work shall be the property of
the Contracting Authority.

2007

Page 79 of 240

26.4 In the event of disagreements, the Contracting Authority shall have sole authority to decide as to the
qualifications set out in Articles 26.1 and 26.3.
ARTICLE 27 : Temporary works
27.1 The Contractor shall carry out at his expense all the temporary works to enable the works to be
carried out. He shall submit to the Supervisor drawings of temporary works, which he intends to use, such
as cofferdams, scaffolding, trusses and shuttering. He shall take account of any observations made to him
by the Supervisor, while remaining responsible for these drawings.
27.2 Where the design of particular temporary works is specified in the Special Conditions to be the
responsibility of the Contracting Authority, the Supervisor shall provide the Contractor with all drawings
necessary in reasonable time to enable the Contractor to undertake the temporary works in accordance
with his programme. In such cases, the Contracting Authority shall bear sole responsibility for the safety
and suitability of the design. The Contractor, however, shall be responsible for their proper execution.
ARTICLE 28 : Soil Studies
28.1 Subject to the Special Conditions and to the technical specifications, the Contractor shall make
available to the Supervisor, the personnel and equipment necessary to carry out any soil survey that the
Supervisor may reasonably consider necessary.
28.2 The Contractor shall be compensated for the actual cost of the manpower and equipment used or
made available in such work, if not already provided for in the contract.
ARTICLE 29 : Overlapping contracts
29.1 In accordance with the requirements of the Supervisor, the Contractor shall afford other contractors
employed by the Contracting Authority and their workmen, and the workmen of the Contracting
Authority and of any other public authorities who may be employed on or near the site for the purposes of
works not covered by the contract or of any contract that the Contracting Authority may enter into in
connection with, or ancillary to, the works every reasonable opportunity to carry out their work.
29.2 However, if the Contractor, on the written request of the Supervisor, makes available to any such
contractor or public authority, or to the Contracting Authority, any roads or ways for the maintenance of
which the Contractor is responsible, or permits the use by any such other persons of the Contractor's
temporary works, scaffolding or other site equipment, or provides any other service of any kind not
provided for in the contract, the Contracting Authority shall, in respect of such use or service, pay the
Contractor such sums and/or grant such extension of time as the Supervisor considers reasonable.
29.3 Article 29 does not relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the contract, nor does it
entitle him to any compensation other than that provided for in Article 29.2.
29.4 In no circumstances may difficulties arising with regard to one contract entitle the Contractor to
modify or delay implementation of other contracts. Similarly, the Contracting Authority may not take
advantage of such difficulties to suspend payments due under another contract.
ARTICLE 30 : Patents and licences
30.1 Save where otherwise provided in the Special Conditions, the Contractor shall indemnify the
Contracting Authority and the Supervisor against any claim resulting from the use as specified in the
contract of patents, licences, drawings, designs, models, or brand or trade marks, unless such
infringement results from compliance with the design or specification provided by the Contracting
Authority and/or the Supervisor.
COMMENCEMENT OF IMPLEMENTATION AND DELAYS

2007

Page 80 of 240

ARTICLE 31 : Commencement order

31.1 The Contracting Authority shall fix the date on which implementation of the contract is to
commence and advise the Contractor thereof either in the notice of award of the contract or by
administrative order issued by the Supervisor.
31.2 Save where the Parties agree otherwise, implementation of the contract shall begin no later than 90
days after notification of award of contract. After that date the Contractor shall be entitled not to
implement the contract and to obtain its termination or compensation for the damage he has suffered. The
Contractor shall forfeit this right unless he exercises it within 30 days of the expiry of the 90-day period.
ARTICLE 32 : Period of implementation of tasks
32.1 The period of implementation of tasks shall commence on the date fixed in accordance with Article
31. It shall stated in the contract, without prejudice to extensions of the period, which may be granted
under Article 33.
32.2 If provision is made for separate periods of implementation for separate lots, in cases where one
Contractor is awarded more than one lot, the period of implementation for each lot will remain the same
as if a single lot contract had been awarded.
ARTICLE 33 : Extension of the period of implementation of tasks
33.1 The Contractor may request an extension to the period of implementation of tasks if his
implementation of the contract is delayed, or expected to be delayed, for any of the following reasons:
a) exceptional weather conditions in the state of the Contracting Authority;
b) artificial obstructions or physical conditions which could not reasonably have been foreseen by an
experienced contractor;
c) administrative orders affecting the date of completion other than those arising from the Contractor's
default;
d) failure of the Contracting Authority to fulfil its obligations under the contract;
e) any suspension of the works which is not due to the Contractor's default;
f) force majeure;
g) any other causes referred to in these General Conditions which are not due to the Contractor's default.
33.2 Within 15 days of realising that a delay might occur, the Contractor shall notify the Supervisor of his
intention to make a request for extension of the period of implementation to which he considers himself
entitled and, save where otherwise agreed between the Contractor and the Supervisor, within 30 days
provide the Supervisor with comprehensive details so that the request can be examined.
33.3 Within 30 days the Supervisor shall, by written notice to the Contractor after due consultation with
the Contracting Authority and, where appropriate, the Contractor, grant such extension of the period of
implementation as may be justified, either prospectively or retrospectively, or inform the Contractor that
he is not entitled to an extension.
ARTICLE 34 : Delays in implementation
34.1 If the Contractor fails to complete the works by the deadline(s) specified in the contract, the
Contracting Authority shall, without formal notice and without prejudice to any other remedies under the
contract, be entitled to liquidated damages for every day or part thereof which elapses between the end of
the period of implementation or extended period of implementation and the actual date of completion, at
the rate and up to the maximum amount specified in the Special Conditions. If the works have undergone
partial acceptance in accordance with Article 59, the liquidated damages specified in the Special
Conditions may be reduced by the proportion of the value of the whole of the works represented by the
accepted part.

2007

Page 81 of 240

34.2 If the Contracting Authority is entitled to the maximum claim under Article 34.1, it may, after giving
notice to the Contractor:
a) seize the performance guarantee;
b) terminate the contract, in which case the Contractor will have no right to compensation; and
c) enter into a contract with a third party at the Contractor's cost for the provision of the balance of the
works The Contractor shall not be paid for this part of the contract. The Contractor shall also be liable for
the additional costs and damages caused by his failure.
ARTICLE 35 : Modifications
35.1 The Supervisor shall have power to order any modification to any part of the works necessary for the
proper completion and/or functioning of the works. Such modifications may consist of additions,
omissions, substitutions, changes in quality, quantity, form, character, kind, position, dimension, level or
line and changes in the specified sequence, method or timing of execution of the works. No order for a
modification may result in the invalidation of the contract. However, the financial effect, if any, of all
such modifications shall be valued in accordance with the following Articles. Substantial modifications to
the contract, including modifications to the total contract amount, must be made by means of an
addendum.
35.2 Modifications may only be made by administrative order, subject to the following provisos:
a) if, for whatever reason, the Supervisor believes it necessary to give an order orally, he shall confirm the
order by an administrative order as soon as possible;
b) if the Contractor confirms in writing an oral order given for the purpose of Article 35.2(a) and the
confirmation is not immediately refuted in writing by the Supervisor, an administrative order shall be
deemed to have been issued for the execution of the modification;
c) an administrative order for a modification shall not be required when increasing or decreasing the
quantity of works because the estimates in the bill of quantities or price schedule were too high or too
low.
35.3 Save where Article 35.2 provides otherwise, prior to issuing an administrative order for a
modification, the Supervisor shall notify the Contractor of the nature and form of that modification. As
soon as possible, after receiving such notice, the Contractor shall submit to the Supervisor a proposal
containing:
a) a description of the tasks, if any, to be performed or the measures to be taken and a programme for
execution; and
b) any necessary modifications to the programme of implementation or to any of the Contractor's
obligations under the contract; and
c) any adjustment to the contract price in accordance with the rules set out in Article 35.
35.4 Following the receipt of the Contractor's submission referred to in Article 35.3, the Supervisor shall,
after due consultation with the Contracting Authority and, where appropriate, the Contractor, decide as
soon as possible whether or not the modification should be carried out. If the Supervisor decides that the
modification is to be carried out, he shall issue an administrative order stating that the modification is to
be made at the prices and under the conditions given in the Contractor's submission referred to in Article
35.3 or as modified by the Supervisor in accordance with Article 35.5.
35.5 The prices for all modifications ordered by the Supervisor in accordance with Articles 35.2 and 35.4
shall be ascertained by the Supervisor in accordance with the following principles:
a) where work is of similar character and executed under similar conditions to work priced in the bill of
quantities or price schedule, it shall be valued at such rates and prices contained therein;

2007

Page 82 of 240

b) where work is not of a similar character or is not executed under similar conditions, the rates and prices
in the contract shall be used as the basis for valuation in so far as is reasonable, failing which a fair
valuation shall be made by the Supervisor;
c) if the nature or amount of any modification relative to the nature or amount of the whole of the contract
or to any part thereof is such that, in the opinion of the Supervisor, any rate or price contained in the
contract for any item of work is by reason of such modification rendered unreasonable, then the
Supervisor shall fix such rate or price as he thinks reasonable and proper in the circumstances;
d) where a modification is necessitated by a default or breach of contract by the Contractor, any
additional cost attributable to such modification shall be borne by the Contractor.
35.6 On receipt of the administrative order requesting the modification, the Contractor shall proceed to
carry out the modification as if it had been stated in the contract. The works shall not be delayed pending
the granting of any extension of time for completion or adjustment to the contract price.
Where the order for a modification precedes the adjustment to the contract price, the Contractor shall
keep records of the costs of undertaking the modification and of the time expended thereon.
Such records shall be open to inspection by the Supervisor at all reasonable times.
35.7 Unless otherwise provided by the Special Conditions, in the event of an increase or decrease in the
total volume of work required by the Contracting Authority or resulting from circumstances which are
caused neither by the Contractor's negligence nor by any action on his part, the Contractor may not claim
compensation unless that increase or decrease, calculated on the basis of the original prices and without
varying the object of the contract, exceeds a percentage of the original contract price specified in the
Special Conditions. This percentage may not be more than 15% or less than 10%. In these circumstances,
on making a reasoned request submitted to the Contracting Authority, the Contractor shall be entitled to
have the contractual period of implementation changed.
35.8 Where the increase or decrease, calculated in the manner described, exceeds the percentage laid
down in the Special Conditions, the Contractor may, when the general statement is drawn up, make a
claim for compensation on the grounds of any damage he has suffered as a result of modifications to the
original project. He shall also be entitled, on making a reasoned request submitted to the Contracting
Authority, to a modification in the contractual period of execution.
Where the modification, calculated in the manner described, exceeds 33%, the Contractor is entitled to
refuse to carry out any work beyond that value. In that case, he shall inform the Contracting Authority of
his decision by registered letter with acknowledgement of delivery within two months of the
administrative order specifying that modification. The Supervisor shall, after consulting the Contracting
Authority and the Contractor, determine any addition/compensation and extension of period of
implementation.
35.9 Subject to the limits indicated in the Special Conditions, if the contract contains a bill of quantities or
breakdown of the overall price giving an itemised list of the scale and prices of the various works, and if
modifications required by the Contracting Authority or resulting from circumstances which are caused
neither by the Contractor's negligence nor by any action on his part alter the scale of some of the works in
such a manner that the quantity shown for any item is increased or decreased by 20% or more, the
Contractor shall, on making a reasoned request to the Contracting Authority, be entitled to compensation
for any damage he has suffered as a result of modifications to the original project, once all the quantities
in the relevant item have been executed for the purposes of the contract.
35.10 Contract modifications not covered by an administrative order must be formalised through an
addendum to the contract signed by all parties. Changes of address or bank account may simply be
notified in writing by the Contractor to the Contracting Authority. All contract modifications have to
respect the general principles defined in the Practical Guide to contract procedures for EC external
actions.
ARTICLE 36 : Suspension

2007

Page 83 of 240

36.1 The Contractor shall, on the order of the Supervisor, suspend the progress of the works or any part
thereof for such time or times and in such manner as the Supervisor may consider necessary.
36.2 During the period of suspension, the Contractor shall take such protective measures as may be
necessary to safeguard the works, plant, equipment and site against any deterioration, loss or damage.
36.3 Additional expenses incurred in connection with such protective measures shall be added to the
contract price, unless such suspension is:
a) dealt with differently in the contract;
or
b) necessary owing to some default of the Contractor;
or
c) necessary owing to normal weather conditions on site;
or
d) necessary for the safety or the proper execution of the works or any part thereof insofar as such
necessity does not arise from any act or default by the Supervisor or the Contracting Authority or from
any of the exceptional risks referred to in Article 19.
36.4 The Contractor shall not be entitled to such additions to the contract price unless he notifies the
Supervisor, within 30 days of receiving the order to suspend the works, of his intention to make a claim
for them.
36.5 The Supervisor, after consultation with the Contracting Authority and the Contractor, shall
determine such extra payment and/or extension of the period of implementation to be made to the
Contractor in respect of such claim as shall, in the opinion of the Supervisor, be fair and reasonable.
36.6 If the period of suspension exceeds 180 days (or any shorter period specified in the Special
Conditions) and the suspension is not due to the Contractor's default, the Contractor may, by notifying the
Supervisor and the Contracting Authority, either request permission to restart or terminate the contract
within 30 days.
36.7 Where the contract's award procedure or implementation is vitiated by substantial errors or
irregularities or by fraud, the institutions shall suspend execution of the contract. Where such errors,
irregularities or fraud are attributable to the Contractor, the Commission may also refuse to make
payments or may recover amounts already paid, in proportion to the seriousness of the errors,
irregularities or fraud. The Contracting Authority may also suspend payments in cases where there are
suspected or established errors, irregularities or fraud committed by the Contractor in the performance of
another contract funded by the general budget of the European Community or by budgets managed by it
which are likely to affect the performance of the present contract.
The purpose of suspending the contract shall be to verify whether presumed substantial errors and
irregularities or fraud have actually occurred. If they are not confirmed, execution of the contract shall
resume as soon as possible. A substantial error or irregularity shall be any infringement of a contract or
regulatory provision resulting from an act or an omission that causes or might cause a loss to the
Community budget.
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
ARTICLE 37 :Work register
37.1 A work register shall, unless otherwise provided by the Special Conditions, be kept on the site by the
Supervisor, who shall enter in it at least the following information:
a) the weather conditions, interruptions of work owing to inclement weather, hours of work, number and
type of workmen employed on the site, materials supplied, equipment in use, equipment not in working

2007

Page 84 of 240

order, tests carried out in situ, samples dispatched, unforeseen circumstances, as well as orders given to
the Contractor;
b) detailed statements of all the quantitative and qualitative elements of the work done and the supplies
delivered and used, capable of being checked on the site and relevant in calculating payments to be made
to the Contractor.
37.2 The statements shall form an integral part of the work register but may, where appropriate, be
recorded in separate documents. The technical rules for drawing up the statements shall be set out in the
Special Conditions.
37.3 The Contractor shall ensure that statements are drawn up, in good time and in accordance with the
Special Conditions, in respect of work, services and supplies which cannot be measured or verified
subsequently. Failing this, he shall accept the decisions of the Supervisor unless, at his own expense, he
provides evidence to the contrary.
37.4 Entries made in the work register as work progresses shall be signed by the Supervisor and
countersigned by the Contractor or his representative. If the Contractor objects, he shall communicate his
views to the Supervisor within 15 days of the date on which the entry or the statements objected to are
recorded. Should he fail to countersign or to submit his views within the period allowed, the Contractor
shall be deemed to agree with the notes shown in the register. The Contractor may examine the work
register at any time and may, without removing the document, make or receive a copy of entries which he
considers necessary for his own information.
37.5 The Contractor shall, on request, provide the Supervisor with the information needed to keep the
work register in good order.
ARTICLE 38 : Origin
38.1 Save where otherwise provided for in the Special Conditions, goods and materials must originate in
a Member State of the European Union or in one of the beneficiary countries as stated in the invitation to
tender. The origin of the goods and materials shall be determined according to the rules laid down in the
Community Customs Code or the international agreements to which the country concerned is a signatory.
38.2 The Contractor must certify that the goods tendered comply with this requirement, specifying the
respective country of origin. He may be required to provide more detailed information in this respect.
38.3 The Contractor shall present an official certificate of origin on provisional acceptance. Failure to
comply with this obligation shall lead, after formal notice, to termination of the contract.
ARTICLE 39 : Quality of works and materials
39.1 The works, components and materials shall conform to the specifications, drawings, surveys,
models, samples, patterns and other requirements in the contract, which must be held at the disposal of
the Contracting Authority or the Supervisor for the purposes of identification throughout the period of
execution.
39.2 Any preliminary technical acceptance stipulated in the Special Conditions should be the subject of a
request sent by the Contractor to the Supervisor. The request shall indicate, as appropriate, the reference
to the contract, the lot number and the place where such acceptance is to take place. The components and
materials specified in the request must be certified by the Supervisor as meeting the requirements for such
acceptance prior to their incorporation in the works.
39.3 Even if materials or items to be incorporated in the works or in the manufacture of components have
been technically accepted in this way, they may still be rejected if a further examination reveals defects or
faults, in which case they must immediately be replaced by the Contractor. The Contractor may be given
the opportunity to repair and make good materials and items which have been rejected, but such materials
and items will be accepted for incorporation in the works only if they have been repaired and made good
to the satisfaction of the Supervisor.
2007

Page 85 of 240

ARTICLE 40 : Inspection and testing

40.1 The Contractor shall ensure that the components and materials are delivered to the site in time to
allow the Supervisor to proceed with acceptance of the components and materials. The Contractor is
deemed to have fully appreciated the difficulties which he might encounter in this respect, and he shall
not be permitted to advance any grounds for delay in fulfilling the obligations.
40.2 The Supervisor shall be entitled, either by himself or through his agent, to inspect, examine, measure
and test the components, materials and workmanship, and check the progress of preparation, fabrication
or manufacture of anything being prepared, fabricated or manufactured for delivery under the contract, in
order to establish whether the components, materials and workmanship are of the requisite quality and
quantity. This shall take place at the place of manufacture, fabrication, preparation or on the site or at
such other places as may be specified in the Special Conditions.
40.3 For the purposes of such tests and inspections, the Contractor shall:
a) provide the Supervisor, temporarily and free of charge, with such assistance, samples, parts, machines,
equipment, tools or materials and labour as are normally required for inspection and testing;
b) agree, with the Supervisor, the time and place for tests;
c) give the Supervisor access at all reasonable times to the place where the tests are to be carried out.
40.4 If the Supervisor is not present on the date agreed for tests, the Contractor may, unless otherwise
instructed by the Supervisor, proceed with the tests, which shall be deemed to have been made in the
Supervisor's presence. The Contractor shall immediately send duly certified copies of the test results to
the Supervisor, who shall, if he has not attended the test, be bound by the test results.
40.5 When components and materials have passed the above-mentioned tests, the Supervisor shall notify
the Contractor or endorse the Contractor's certificate to that effect.
40.6 If the Supervisor and the Contractor disagree on the test results, each shall state his views to the
other within 15 days of such disagreement. The Supervisor or the Contractor may require such tests to be
repeated on the same terms and conditions or, if either Party so requests, by an expert selected by
common consent. All test reports shall be submitted to the Supervisor, who shall communicate the results
of these tests without delay to the Contractor. The results of the retesting shall be conclusive. The cost of
the retesting shall be borne by the Party whose views are proved wrong by the retesting.
40.7 In the performance of their duties, the Supervisor and any person authorised by him shall not
disclose to unauthorised persons information concerning the undertaking's construction and operating
methods obtained through inspection and testing.
ARTICLE 41: Rejection
41.1 Components and materials which are not of the specified quality shall be rejected. A special mark
may be applied to the rejected components or materials. This shall not be such as to alter them or affect
their commercial value. Rejected components and materials shall be removed by the Contractor from the
site within a period which the Supervisor shall specify, failing which they shall be removed by the
Supervisor as of right at the expense and risk of the Contractor. Any works incorporating rejected
components or materials shall be rejected.
41.2 The Supervisor shall, during the progress of the works and before their acceptance, have the power
to order or decide:
a) the removal from the site, by a deadline specified in the administrative order, of any components or
materials which, in the opinion of the Supervisor, are not in accordance with the contract;
b) the substitution of proper and suitable components or materials; or
c) the demolition and proper re-execution, or satisfactory repair, notwithstanding any previous test thereof
or interim payment therefore, of any works which, in respect of components, materials, workmanship or
2007

Page 86 of 240

design for which the Contractor is responsible, is not, in the opinion of the Supervisor, in accordance with
the contract.
41.3 The Supervisor shall, as soon as reasonably practicable, notify the Contractor in writing of his
decision, specifying particulars of the alleged defects.
41.4 The Contractor shall, with all speed and at his own expense, make good the defects so specified.
If the Contractor does not comply with such order, the Contracting Authority shall be entitled to employ
other persons to carry out the same works, and all expenses consequent thereon or incidental thereto may
be deducted by the Contracting Authority from any monies due or which may become due to the
Contractor.
41.5 The provisions of Article 41 shall not affect the right of the Contracting Authority to claim for any
delays and shortcomings in execution.
ARTICLE 42 : Ownership of plant and materials
42.1 All equipment, temporary works, plant and materials provided by the Contractor shall, when brought
on the site, be deemed to be exclusively intended for the execution of the works, and the Contractor may
not remove the same or any part thereof, except for the purpose of moving it from one part of the site to
another, without the consent of the Supervisor. Such consent shall not, however, be required for vehicles
engaged in transporting any staff, labour, equipment, temporary works, plant or materials to or from the
site.
42.2 The Special Conditions may provide that all equipment, temporary works, plant and materials on site
owned by the Contractor or by any company in which the Contractor has a controlling interest shall, for
the duration of the execution of the works, be:
a) vested in the Contracting Authority; or
b) made subject to a lien in favour of the Contracting Authority; or
c) made subject to any other arrangement regarding priority interest or guarantee.
42.3 In the event of termination of the contract due to the Contractor's breach of contract, the Contracting
Authority shall be entitled to use the equipment, temporary works, plant and materials on site in order to
complete the works.
42.4 Any agreement for the hire by the Contractor of equipment, temporary works, plant or materials
brought onto the site shall contain a provision binding the owner, at the written request of the Contracting
Authority within seven days of the date of termination under the General Conditions, and on the
Contracting Authority's undertaking to pay all hire charges from that date, to hire such equipment,
temporary works, plant or materials to the Contracting Authority on the same terms as they were hired by
the Contractor, without prejudice to the Contracting Authority's right to permit their use by any other
contractor employed by it to complete the works in accordance with the provisions of the General
Conditions concerning termination of contract.
42.5 In the event of termination of the contract before completion of the works, the Contractor shall hand
over to the Contracting Authority any plant, temporary works, equipment or materials the ownership of
which has been vested in the Contracting Authority or made subject to a lien by virtue of Article 42.2. If
the Contractor fails to do so, the Contracting Authority may take such action as it deems appropriate to
obtain possession of such plant, temporary works, equipment, and materials and to recover the cost of so
doing from the Contractor.
PAYMENTS
ARTICLE 43 : General principles

2007

Page 87 of 240

43.1 Payments shall be made in euro or national currency. The Special Conditions shall lay down the
administrative or technical conditions governing payments of pre-financing, interim and/or final
payments made in accordance with the General Conditions. Where payment is in the national currency, it
shall be converted into euro at the rate published on the Infor-Euro on the first working day of the month
in which the payment is made.
43.2 Payments due by the Contracting Authority shall be made to the bank account mentioned on the
financial identification form completed by the Contractor. The same form, annexed to the payment
request, must be used to report changes of bank account.
43.3 Sums due shall be paid within no more than 45 calendar days from the date on which an admissible
payment request is registered by the competent department specified in the Special Conditions. The date
of payment shall be the date on which the institution's account is debited.
The payment request shall not be admissible if one or more essential requirements are not met.
43.4 The 45-day period may be suspended by notifying the Contractor that the payment request cannot be
fulfilled because the sum is not due, because appropriate substantiating documents have not been
provided or because there is evidence that the expenditure might not be eligible. In the latter case, an
inspection may be carried out on the spot for the purpose of further checks. The Contractor shall provide
clarifications, modifications or further information within 30 days of being asked to do so. The payment
period shall continue to run from the date on which a properly drawn-up payment request is registered.
43.5 The Contractor undertakes to repay any amounts paid in excess of the final amount due to the
Contracting Authority within 45 days of receiving a request to do so. Should the Contractor fail to make
repayment within the deadline set by the Contracting Authority, the Contracting Authority may (unless
the Contractor is a government department or public body of a Member State of the Community) increase
the amounts due by adding interest:
- at the rediscount rate applied by the central bank of the country of the Contracting Authority if payments
are in the currency of that country;
- at the rate applied by the European Central Bank to its main refinancing transactions in euro where
payments are in euro, on the first day of the month in which the time-limit expired, plus three and a half
percentage points. The default interest shall be incurred over the time which elapses between the date of
the payment deadline set by the Contracting Authority (exclusive), and the date on which payment is
actually made (inclusive). Any partial payments shall first cover the interest thus established.
Amounts to be repaid to the Contracting Authority may be offset against amounts of any kind due to the
Contractor. This shall not affect the Parties' right to agree on payment in instalments.
Bank charges incurred by the repayment of amounts due to the Contracting Authority shall be borne
entirely by the Contractor. Where necessary the European Community may as a donor subrogate itself to
the Contracting Authority.
ARTICLE 44 : Pre-financing
44.1 If the Special Conditions so provide, the Contractor shall, at his request, be granted pre-financing for
operations connected with the execution of the works, in the cases listed hereinafter:
a) as a lump-sum advance enabling him to meet expenditure resulting from the commencement of the
contract;
b) if he affords proof of the conclusion of a contract for the purchase or order of materials, plant,
equipment, machines and tools necessary for the execution of the contract, and of any other substantial
prior expenses such as the acquisition of patents or study costs.
44.2 The Special Conditions shall state the total amount of the pre-financing, which shall not exceed 10%
of the original contract price for the lump-sum advance referred to in Article 44.1(a) and 20% of the
contract price for all the other pre-financing referred to in Article 44.1(b).

2007

Page 88 of 240

44.3 No pre-financing shall be granted until:

a) the conclusion of the contract;
b) provision to the Contracting Authority by the Contractor of the performance guarantee in accordance
with Article 13; and
c) provision to the Contracting Authority by the Contractor of a separate directly liable guarantee for prefinancing amounts exceeding 150.000, or for any amounts where no proof documents have been
provided for the selection criteria, provided by one of the institutions referred to in Article 13.3, which
shall remain effective until the pre-financing has been completely repaid by the Contractor out of interim
payments under the contract. Where the contractor is a public body the obligation for a financial
guarantee may be waived depending on a risk assessment by the responsible authorising officer.
44.4 The Contractor shall use pre-financing exclusively for operations connected with the execution of
the works. Should the Contractor misuse any portion of the pre-financing, it shall become due and
repayable immediately and no further pre-financing will be paid to him.
44.5 Should the pre-financing guarantee cease to be valid and the Contractor fail to revalidate it, the
Contracting Authority may either deduct the amount of the pre-financing from future payments due to the
Contractor under the contract or apply the provisions of Article 13.5.
44.6 If the contract is terminated for any reason whatsoever, the guarantees securing the pre-financing
may be invoked immediately in order to repay the balance of the pre-financing still owed by the
Contractor, and the guarantor shall not delay payment or raise objection for any reason whatever.
44.7 The pre-financing guarantee provided for in Article 44 shall be released as and when advances are
repaid.
44.8 Further conditions and procedures for granting and repaying pre-financing shall be as laid down in
the Special Conditions.
ARTICLE 45 : Retention monies
45.1 The Special Conditions shall specify the sum to be retained from interim payments to guarantee
performance of the Contractor's obligations during the maintenance period, and the detailed rules
governing that guarantee; the sums retained may in no circumstances exceed 10% of the contract price.
45.2 Subject to the approval of the Contracting Authority the Contractor may, if he so wishes, replace
these retention monies by a retention guarantee issued in accordance with Article 13.3. 45.3 The retention
monies or the retention guarantee shall be released within 45 days of the date of final acceptance of the
works.
ARTICLE 46 : Price revision
46.1 Unless otherwise stipulated in the Special Conditions, contracts shall be at fixed prices which shall
not be revised.
ARTICLE 47 : Measurement
47.1 The following principles shall apply to the measurement of works contracts:
a) For lump-sum contracts, the amount due under the contract shall be determined on the basis of the
breakdown of the overall contract price, or on the basis of a breakdown expressed as a percentage of the
contract price corresponding to completed stages of the works. Where items are accompanied by
quantities, these shall be firm quantities for which the Contractor has submitted a lump-sum price and
shall be paid for irrespective of the quantities of works actually carried out.
b) For unit-price contracts:

2007

Page 89 of 240

i) the amount due under the contract shall be calculated by applying the unit rates to the quantities
actually executed for the respective items, in accordance with the contract;
ii) the quantities set out in the bill of quantities shall be the estimated quantities of the works, which shall
not be taken as the actual and correct quantities of the works to be executed by the Contractor in
fulfilment of his obligations under the contract;
iii) the Supervisor shall determine by measurement the actual quantities of the works executed by the
Contractor, and these shall be paid for in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions
concerning interim payments. Save where otherwise provided in the Special Conditions, no additions may
be made to the items in the bill of quantities, save as a result of a variation in accordance with Article 35
or another provision of the contract entitling the Contractor to additional payment;
iv) the Supervisor must, when he requires any parts of the works to be measured, give the Contractor
reasonable notice to attend or send a qualified agent to represent him.
The Contractor or his agent shall assist the Supervisor in making such measurements and shall furnish all
particulars required by the Supervisor. Should the Contractor fail to attend or to send an agent, the
measurement made or approved by the Supervisor shall be binding on the Contractor;
v) the works shall be measured net, notwithstanding any general or local custom, save where otherwise
provided for in the contract.
47.2 The Special Conditions shall stipulate the method and conditions to be used to evaluate the works.
ARTICLE 48 : Interim payments
48.1 Save where otherwise provided in the Special Conditions, the Contractor shall submit an application
for interim payment to the Supervisor at the end of each period referred to in Article 48.7 in a form
approved by the Supervisor. The application shall include the following items, as applicable:
a) the estimated contract value of the permanent works executed up to the end of the period in question;
b) an amount reflecting any revision of prices pursuant to Article 46;
c) an amount to be withheld by way of retention monies under Article 45;
d) an amount to be deducted for the repayment of pre-financing under Article 44;
e) any credit and/or debit for the period in question in respect of plant and materials on site intended for,
but not yet incorporated in, the permanent works in the amount and under the conditions set out in Article
48.2;
f) any other sum to which the Contractor may be entitled under the contract.
48.2 The Contractor shall be entitled to such sums as the Supervisor may consider proper in respect of
plant and materials intended for, but not yet incorporated in, the permanent works, provided that:
a) the plant and materials conform with the specifications for the permanent works and are set out in
batches in a way that they may be recognised by the Supervisor;
b) such plant and materials have been delivered to the site and are properly stored and protected against
loss or damage or deterioration to the satisfaction of the Supervisor;
c) the Contractor's record of requirements, orders, receipts and use of plant and materials under the
contract are kept in a form approved by the Supervisor and such records are available for inspection by
the Supervisor;
d) the Contractor submits, with his statement, the estimated value of the plant and materials on site and
such documents as may be required by the Supervisor for the purpose of valuation of the plant and
materials and providing evidence of ownership and payment therefore; and
e) where the Special Conditions so provide, ownership of the plant and materials referred to in Article 42
shall be deemed to be vested in the Contracting Authority.
48.3 Approval by the Supervisor of any interim payment certified by him in respect of plant and materials
pursuant to Article 48 shall be without prejudice to the Supervisor's right under the
contract to reject any plant or materials which are not in accordance with the provisions of the contract.

2007

Page 90 of 240

48.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage to, and for the cost of storing and
handling, such plant and materials on site. He shall take out any additional insurance necessary to cover
the risk of such loss or damage from any cause.
48.5 Within 45 days of receiving an application for interim payment, it shall be approved or amended in
such a way that it reflects, in the Supervisor's opinion, the amount due to the Contractor under the
contract. In cases where there is a difference of opinion as to the value of an item, the Supervisor's view
shall prevail. After calculating the amount due to the Contractor the Supervisor shall send the Contracting
Authority and the Contractor an interim payment certificate for the amount due to the Contractor and
shall inform the Contractor of the works for which payment is being made.
48.6 The Supervisor may, by an interim payment certificate, make any corrections or modifications to any
previous certificate issued by him and shall have power to modify the valuation in, or withhold the issue
of, any interim payment certificate if the works or any part thereof are not being carried out to his
satisfaction.
48.7 Unless the special conditions provide otherwise, the frequency shall be one interim payment per
month.
ARTICLE 49 : Final statement of account
49.1 Not later than 90 days after the issue of the final acceptance certificate, the Contractor shall submit
to the Supervisor a draft final statement of account with supporting documents showing in detail the value
of the work done in accordance with the contract, together with all further sums which the Contractor
considers to be due to him under the contract in order to enable the Supervisor to prepare the final
statement of account.
49.2 Within 45 days of receiving the draft final statement of account and of all information reasonably
required for its verification, the Supervisor shall prepare the final statement of account, which determines:
a) the amount which, in his opinion, is finally due under the contract;
b) after establishing the amounts previously paid by the Contracting Authority and all sums to which the
Contracting Authority is entitled under the contract, the balance, if any, due, from the Contracting
Authority to the Contractor, or from the Contractor to the Contracting Authority, as the case may be.
49.3 The Supervisor shall issue the Contracting Authority or its duly authorised representative, and the
Contractor, with the final statement of account showing the final amount to which the Contractor is
entitled under the contract. The Contracting Authority or its duly authorised representative and the
Contractor shall sign the final statement of account as an acknowledgement of the full and final value of
the work performed under the contract and shall promptly submit a signed copy to the Supervisor.
However, the final statement of account shall not include amounts in dispute, which are the subjects of
negotiations, conciliation, arbitration or litigation.
49.4 The final statement of account signed by the Contractor shall constitute a written discharge of the
Contracting Authority confirming that the total in the final statement of account represents full and final
settlement of all monies due to the Contractor under the contract, other than those amounts which are the
subject of negotiations, a conciliation or arbitration procedure or litigation. However, such discharge shall
become effective only after any payment due to the Contractor under the final statement of account has
been made and after the performance guarantee referred to in Article 13 has been returned to the
Contractor.
49.5 The Contracting Authority shall not be liable to, the Contractor for any matter or thing whatsoever
arising out of, or in connection with, the contract or execution of the works, unless the Contractor has
included a claim in that respect in his draft final statement of account.
ARTICLE 50 : Delayed payments

2007

Page 91 of 240

50.1 The Contracting Authority shall pay the Contractor sums due within 45 days of the date on which an
admissible payment is registered, in accordance with Article 43 of these General Conditions.
This period shall begin to run from the approval of these documents by the competent department referred
to in Article 43 of the Special Conditions. These documents shall be approved either expressly or tacitly,
in the absence of any written reaction in the 45 days following their receipt accompanied by the requisite
documents.
50.2 Once the deadline laid down in Article 50.1 has expired, the Contractor may, within two months of
late payment, claim late-payment interest:
- at the rediscount rate applied by the issuing institution of the country of the Contracting Authority where
payments are in national currency;
- at the rate applied by the European Central Bank to its main refinancing transactions in euro, as
published in the Official Journal of the European Union, where payments are in euro, on the first day of
the month in which the deadline expired, plus three and a half percentage points.
The late-payment interest shall apply to the time which elapses between the date of the payment deadline
(exclusive) and the date on which the Contracting Authority's account is debited (inclusive).
50.3 Any default in payment of more than 90 days from the expiry of the period laid down in Article 50.1
shall entitle the Contractor either not to perform the contract or to terminate it, with 30 days' prior notice
to the Contracting Authority and the Supervisor.
ARTICLE 51 : Payments to third parties
51.1 Orders for payments to third parties may be carried out only after an assignment made in accordance
with Article 6. The Contracting Authority shall be notified of the assignment.
51.2 Notification of beneficiaries of the assignment shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
51.3 In the event of a legally binding attachment of the property of the Contractor affecting payments due
to him under the contract, and without prejudice to the time limit laid down in the Special Conditions, the
Contracting Authority shall have 30 days, starting from the day on which it receives notification of the
definitive lifting of the obstacle to payment, to resume payments to the Contractor.
ARTICLE 52 : Claims for additional payment
52.1 If there are circumstances which he considers entitle him to additional payment under the contract,
the Contractor shall:
a) if he intends to make any claim for additional payment, notify the Supervisor of his intention or make
such claim, stating his reasons, within 15 days of the date on which the said circumstances became known
to him; and
b) as soon as is reasonably practicable after the date of such notification, but no later than 60 days
afterwards, unless he agrees otherwise with the Supervisor, submit to the Supervisor full and detailed
particulars of his claim. In any event, such particulars shall be submitted no later than the date of
submission of the draft final statement of account. The Contractor shall thereafter promptly submit such
further elements as the Supervisor may reasonably require to assess the validity of the claim.
52.2 When the Supervisor has received the full and detailed elements of the Contractor's claim that he
requires, he shall, after duly consulting the Contracting Authority and, where appropriate, the Contractor,
determine whether the Contractor is entitled to additional payment and notify the Parties accordingly.
52.3 The Supervisor may reject any claim for additional payment, which does not comply with the
requirements of Article 52.
ARTICLE 53 : End date

2007

Page 92 of 240

The payment obligations of the EC under this Contract shall cease at most 18 months after the end of the
period of implementation of the tasks, unless the Contract is terminated in accordance with these General
Conditions. In the event of cofinancing, this date shall be laid down in the Special Conditions.
ACCEPTANCE AND MAINTENANCE
ARTICLE 54 : Fixing a verification date
54.1 Verification of the works by the Supervisor with a view to provisional or final acceptance shall take
place in the presence of the Contractor. The absence of the Contractor shall not be a bar to verification,
provided that the Contractor has been summoned in due form at least 30 days prior to the date of
verification.
54.2 Should exceptional circumstances make it impossible to ascertain the state of the works or otherwise
proceed with their acceptance during the period fixed for provisional or final acceptance, a statement
certifying such impossibility shall be drawn up by the Supervisor, if possible after consulting the
Contractor. The verification shall take place and a statement of acceptance or rejection shall be drawn up
by the Supervisor within 30 days following the date on which such impossibility ceases to exist. The
Contractor shall not invoke these circumstances in order to avoid his obligation to present the works in a
state suitable for acceptance.
ARTICLE 55 : Verification operations
55.1 The works shall not be accepted until the prescribed verifications and tests have been carried out at
the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall notify the Supervisor of the date on which such
verification and tests may commerce.
55.2 Works which do not satisfy the terms and conditions of the contract or which, in the absence of such
terms and conditions, are not carried out in accordance with trade practices in the state where the works
are located shall, if necessary, be demolished and rebuilt by the Contractor or repaired to the satisfaction
of the Supervisor. Otherwise, this shall be done as of right after due notice, at the expense of the
Contractor, by order of the Supervisor. The Supervisor may also require the Contractor to demolish and
reconstruct, or to repair to the Supervisor's satisfaction, works in which unacceptable materials have been
used or works carried out in the periods of suspension provided for in Article 36.
ARTICLE 56 : Partial acceptance
56.1 The Contracting Authority may make use of the various structures, parts of structures or sections of
the works forming part of the contract as and when they are completed. Any taking over of the structures,
parts of structures or sections of the works by the Contracting Authority shall be preceded by their partial
provisional acceptance. However, in cases of urgency, works may be taken over prior to acceptance,
provided an inventory of outstanding works is drawn up by the Supervisor and agreed to by the
Contractor and the Supervisor beforehand. Once the Contracting Authority has taken possession of a
structure, a part thereof or section of the works, the Contractor shall no longer be required to make good
any damage resulting otherwise than from faulty construction or workmanship.
56.2 The Supervisor may, at the request of the Contractor and if the nature of the works so permits,
proceed with partial provisional acceptance, provided that the structures, parts of structures or sections of
the works are completed and suited to the use as described in the contract.
56.3 In the cases of partial provisional acceptance referred to in Article 56.1 and 56.2, the maintenance
period provided for in Article 58 shall, unless the Special Conditions provide otherwise, run from the date
of such partial provisional acceptance.
ARTICLE 57: Provisional acceptance

2007

Page 93 of 240

57.1 The works shall be taken over by the Contracting Authority when they have satisfactorily passed the
tests on completion and a certificate of provisional acceptance has been issued or is deemed to have been
issued.
57.2 The Contractor may apply, by notifying the Supervisor, for a certificate of provisional acceptance
not earlier than 15 days before the works are, in the Contractor's opinion, complete and ready for
provisional acceptance. The Supervisor shall within 30 days of receipt of the Contractor's application
either:
a) issue the certificate of provisional acceptance to the Contractor with a copy to the Contracting
Authority stating, where appropriate, his reservations, and, inter alia, the date on which, in his opinion,
the works were completed in accordance with the contract and ready for provisional acceptance; or
b) reject the application, giving his reasons and specifying the action which, in his opinion, is required of
the Contractor for the certificate to be issued.
57.3 If the Supervisor fails either to issue the certificate of provisional acceptance or to reject the
Contractor's application within the period of 30 days, he shall be deemed to have issued the certificate on
the last day of that period. The certificate of provisional acceptance shall not be deemed to be an
admission that the works have been completed in every respect. If the works are divided by the contract
into sections, the Contractor shall be entitled to apply for separate certificates for each of the sections.
57.4 Upon provisional acceptance of the works, the Contractor shall dismantle and remove temporary
structures and materials no longer required for use in connection with the implementation of the contract.
He shall also remove any litter or obstruction and redress any change in the condition of the site as
required by the contract.
57.5 Immediately after provisional acceptance, the Contracting Authority may make use of all the works
completed.
ARTICLE 58 : Maintenance obligations
58.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for making good any defect in, or damage to, any part of the
works which may appear or occur during the maintenance period and which arises either from:
a) the use of defective plant or materials or faulty workmanship or design of the Contractor;
and/or
b) any act or omission of the Contractor during the maintenance period;
c) in the course of an inspection made by, or on behalf of, the Contracting Authority.
58.2 The Contractor shall at his own cost make good the defect or damage as soon as practicable. The
maintenance period for all items replaced or renewed shall recommence from the date on which the
replacement or renewal was made to the satisfaction of the Supervisor. If the contract provides for partial
acceptance, the maintenance period shall be extended only for the part of the works affected by the
replacement or renewal.
58.3 If any such defect appears or such damage occurs, during the maintenance period, the Contracting
Authority or the Supervisor shall notify the Contractor. If the Contractor fails to remedy a defect or
damage within the time limit stipulated in the notification, the Contracting Authority may:
a) carry out the works itself or employ someone else to carry them out at the Contractor's risk and cost, in
which case the costs incurred by the Contracting Authority will be deducted from monies due to, or from
guarantees held against, the Contractor, or from both; or
b) terminate the contract.
58.4 If the defect or damage is such that the Contracting Authority has been deprived substantially of the
whole or a part of the benefit of the works, the Contracting Authority shall, without prejudice to any other

2007

Page 94 of 240

remedy, be entitled to recover all sums paid in respect of the parts of the works concerned together with
the cost of dismantling such parts and clearing the site.
58.5 In emergencies, where the Contractor cannot be reached immediately or, having been reached, is
unable to take the measures required, the Contracting Authority or the Supervisor may have the work
carried out at the expense of the Contractor. The Contracting Authority or the Supervisor shall as soon as
practicable inform the Contractor of the action taken.
58.6 Where the Special Conditions stipulate that maintenance work necessitated by normal wear and tear
is to be carried out by the Contractor, such work shall be paid for from a provisional sum.
Deterioration resulting from the circumstances provided for in Article 19 or from abnormal use shall be
excluded from this obligation unless it reveals a fault or defect justifying the request for repair or
replacement under Article 58.
58.7 The maintenance obligations shall be stipulated in the Special Conditions and technical
specifications. If the duration of the maintenance period is not specified, it shall be 365 days. The
maintenance period shall commence on the date of provisional acceptance and may recommence, in
accordance with Article 58.2.
58.8 After provisional acceptance and without prejudice to the maintenance obligations referred to in
Article 58, the Contractor shall no longer be responsible for risks which may affect the works and which
result from causes not attributable to him. However, the Contractor shall be responsible from the date of
provisional acceptance for the soundness of the construction, as laid down in the Special Conditions.
ARTICLE 59 : Final acceptance
59.1 Upon expiry of the maintenance period or, where there is more than one such period, upon expiry of
the last period, and when all defects or damage have been rectified, the Supervisor shall issue the
Contractor a final acceptance certificate, with a copy to the Contracting Authority, stating the date on
which the Contractor completed his obligations under the contract to the Supervisor's satisfaction. The
final acceptance certificate shall be issued by the Supervisor within 30 days of the expiry of the above
period or as soon as any works ordered under Article 58 have been completed to the satisfaction of the
Supervisor.
59.2 The contract shall not be considered to have been performed in full until the final acceptance
certificate has been signed or is deemed to have been signed by the Supervisor.
59.3 Notwithstanding the issue of the final acceptance certificate, the Contractor and the Contracting
Authority shall remain liable for the fulfilment of any obligation incurred under the contract prior to the
issue of the final acceptance certificate which remains unperformed at the time that final acceptance
certificate is issued. The nature and extent of any such obligation shall be determined by reference to the
provisions of the contract.
BREACH OF CONTRACT AND TERMINATION
ARTICLE 60 : Breach of contract
60.1 A Party shall be in a breach of contract if it fails to discharge any of its obligations under the
contract. Breaches of contract shall be entered in the work record. Where a breach of contract occurs, the
injured Party shall be entitled to damages and/or termination of the contract.
60.2 Where a breach of contract is attributable to the Contractor, the Contracting Authority shall also be
entitled to the following remedies as of right:
a) implementation of all or part of the works using directly-employed labour;
b) termination of all or part of the contract with or without compensation payable by the Contractor;

2007

Page 95 of 240

c) conclusion of a contract with a third party replacing the Contractor, after prior termination of the
original contract;
d) temporary or permanent exclusion from the award of contracts.
60.3 The following procedures must be used for the application of measures taken as of right:
Any decision relating to the application of measures taken as of right shall be adopted by the Contracting
Authority and notified to the Contractor by registered letter with acknowledgement of delivery.
In applying any of these measures, the Supervisor shall take all appropriate steps to protect or ensure
proper implementation of the works.
In the event of the works being executed by directly employed labour or by a contract with a third party
replacing the Contractor, the Supervisor shall inspect the works, draw up an inventory of plant and
materials and make out a statement of emoluments due to, and amounts owed by, the Contractor under the
contract, after summoning the Contractor by registered letter with acknowledgement of delivery.
In the event of the works being executed by directly employed labour, the Supervisor shall be entitled to
use the Contractor's equipment to complete the implementation of the contract. Where the works are
undertaken using directly employed labour, the Contractor shall be authorised to observe the operations,
without, however, being able to interfere in the execution of instructions given by the Supervisor. The use
of directly employed labour may be discontinued if the Contractor furnishes proof of the necessary means
to resume the works and bring them to a satisfactory conclusion.
Additional expenditure resulting from the use of directly employed labour or of a contract with a third
party replacing the Contractor shall be borne by the latter.
If the use of directly employed labour or a contract with a third party replacing the Contractor results in a
reduction in expenditure, the Contractor may not claim any part of the profit thus derived; it shall be the
property of the Contracting Authority.
60.4 In addition to the above-mentioned measures, damages may be awarded. They may be either:
a) general damages; or
b) liquidated damages.
The amount and procedures for these damages shall be laid down in the Special Conditions.
60.5 Recovery of damages, disbursements or expenses resulting from the application of measures
provided for in this Article shall be effected by deduction from the sums due to the Contractor, from the
deposit, or by payment under the guarantee.
ARTICLE 61 : Termination by the Contracting Authority
61.1 The Contracting Authority may, after giving the Contractor seven days' notice, terminate the contract
in any of the following cases:
a) the Contractor substantially fails to perform his obligations under this contract;
b) the Contractor fails to comply within a reasonable time with a notice given by the Supervisor requiring
him to make good any neglect or failure to perform his obligations under the contract which seriously
affects the proper and timely implementation of the works;
c) the Contractor refuses or neglects to carry out administrative orders given by the Supervisor;
d) the Contractor assigns the contract or subcontracts without the authorisation of the Contracting
Authority;
e) the Contractor is bankrupt or being wound up, is having its affairs administered by the courts, has
entered into an arrangement with creditors, has suspended business activities, is the subject of
proceedings concerning those matters, or is in any analogous situation arising from a similar procedure
provided for in national legislation or regulations;
f) the Contractor has been convicted of an offence concerning professional conduct by a judgment which
has the force of res judicata;
g) the Contractor has been guilty of grave professional misconduct proven by any means which the
Contracting Authority can justify;

2007

Page 96 of 240

h) the Contractor has been the subject of a judgment which has the force of res judicata for fraud,
corruption, involvement in a criminal organisation or any other illegal activity detrimental to the
Communities' financial interests;
i) the Contractor, following another procurement procedure or grant award procedure financed by the
Community budget, has been declared to be in serious breach of contract for failure to perform its
contractual obligations.
j) any organisational modification occurs involving a change in the legal personality, nature or control of
the Contractor, unless such modification is recorded in an addendum to the contract;
k) any other legal disability hindering execution of the contract occurs;
l) the Contractor fails to provide the required guarantee or insurance, or if the person providing the earlier
guarantee or insurance required under the present contract is not able to abide by his commitments.
61.2 Termination shall be without prejudice to any other rights or powers of the Contracting Authority
and the Contractor under the contract. The Contracting Authority may then complete the works itself or
conclude another contract with a third party on behalf of the Contractor. The Contractor's liability for
delay in completion shall immediately cease when the Contracting Authority expels him from the site,
without prejudice to any such liability that may already have occurred.
61.3 The Supervisor shall, upon the issue of the notice of termination of the contract, instruct the
Contractor to take immediate steps to bring the works to a close in a prompt and orderly manner and to
reduce expenditure to a minimum.
61.4 The Supervisor shall, as soon as is possible after termination, certify the value of the works and all
sums due to the Contractor at the date of termination.
61.5 In the event of termination:
a) A report on work performed by the Contractor shall be drawn up by the Supervisor as soon as possible
after inspection of the works, and inventory taken of temporary structures, materials, plant and
equipment. The Contractor shall be summoned to the inspection and the taking of the inventory. The
Supervisor shall also draw up statements of emoluments still owed by the Contractor to workers
employed by him in relation to the contract and of sums owed by the Contractor to the Contracting
Authority.
b) The Contracting Authority shall have the option of acquiring in whole or in part temporary structures
which have been approved by the Supervisor, plant and materials specifically supplied or manufactured in
connection with the execution of works under the contract.
c) The purchase price of the temporary structures, equipment, plant and materials referred to above shall
not exceed the unpaid portion of the expenditure incurred by the Contractor, such expenditure being
limited to that required for the implementation of the contract under normal conditions;
d) The Contracting Authority may purchase, at market prices, the materials and items supplied or ordered
by the Contractor and not already paid for by the Contracting Authority on such conditions as the
Supervisor considers appropriate.
61.6 The Contracting Authority shall not be obliged to make any further payments to the Contractor until
the works are completed. Once they have been completed, the Contracting Authority shall be entitled to
recover from the Contractor the extra costs, if any, of completing the works or shall pay any balance due
to the Contractor prior to the termination of the contract.
61.7 If the Contracting Authority terminates the contract, it shall be entitled to recover from the
Contractor any loss it has suffered up to the maximum amount stated in the contract. If no maximum
amount is stated, the Contracting Authority shall not be entitled to recover more than the part of the
contract price corresponding to the value of that part of the works which cannot, by reason of the
Contractor's failure, be put to their intended use.
61.8 Where termination is not due to an act or omission on his part, the Contractor shall be entitled to
claim, in addition to sums owing to him for work already performed, an indemnity for loss suffered.

2007

Page 97 of 240

61.9 This contract shall be automatically terminated if it has given risen to no payment in the three years
following its signing.
ARTICLE 62 : Termination by the Contractor
62.1 The Contractor may, after giving 14 days notice to the Contracting Authority, terminate the contract
if the Contracting Authority:
a) fails to pay the Contractor the amounts due under any certificate issued by the Supervisor after the
expiry of the deadline laid down in Article 50.3; or
b) consistently fails to meet its obligations after repeated reminders; or
c) suspends the progress of the works or any part thereof for more than 180 days, for reasons not specified
in the contract or not attributable to the Contractor.
62.2 Termination shall be without prejudice to any other rights or powers under the contract of the
Contracting Authority and the Contractor. Upon such termination, the Contractor shall, subject to the law
of the state of the Contracting Authority, be entitled to immediately remove his equipment from the site.
62.3 In the event of such termination, the Contracting Authority shall pay the Contractor for any loss or
damage the Contractor may have suffered.
ARTICLE 63 : Force Majeure
63.1 Neither Party shall be considered to be in default or in breach of its obligations under the contract if
the execution of such obligations is prevented by any event of force majeure arising after the date of
notification of award or the date when the contract becomes effective, whichever is the earlier.
63.2 For the purposes of this Article, the term "force majeure" means acts of God, strikes, lock-outs or
other industrial disturbances, acts of the public enemy, wars whether declared or not, blockades,
insurrection, riots, epidemics, landslides, earthquakes, storms, lightning, floods, washouts, civil
disturbances, explosions and any other similar unforeseeable events which are beyond the Parties' control
and cannot be overcome by due diligence.
63.3 Notwithstanding the provisions of the General Conditions relating to delays in implementation and
termination by the Contracting Authority, the Contractor shall not be liable to forfeiture of his
performance guarantee, liquidated damages or termination for default if, and to the extent that, his delay
in implementation or other failure to perform his obligations under the contract is the result of an event of
force majeure. Nor, notwithstanding the provisions of the General Conditions on delayed payments and
termination by the Contractor, shall the Contracting Authority be liable for the payment of interest on
delayed payments, for non-execution or for termination by the Contractor for default if, and to the extent
that, the Contracting Authority's delay or other failure to perform its obligations is the result of force
majeure.
63.4 If either Party considers that any circumstances of force majeure have occurred which may affect
execution of its obligations, it shall promptly notify the other Party and the Supervisor, giving details of
the nature, the probable duration and the likely effect of the circumstances. Unless otherwise directed by
the Supervisor in writing, the Contractor shall continue to perform his obligations under the contract as
far as is reasonably practicable, and shall employ every reasonable alternative means to perform any
obligations that the event of force majeure does not prevent him from performing. The Contractor shall
not employ such alternative means unless directed to do so by the Supervisor.
63.5 If the Contractor incurs additional costs in complying with the Supervisor's directions or using
alternative means under Article 63.4, the amount thereof shall be certified by the Supervisor.
63.6 If circumstances of force majeure have occurred and continue for a period of 180 days then,
notwithstanding any extension of time for completion of the works that the Contractor may by reason
thereof have been granted, either Party shall be entitled to serve the other with 30 days' notice to
2007

Page 98 of 240

terminate the contract. If, on the expiry of the period of 30 days, the situation of force majeure still
applies, the contract shall be terminated and, by virtue of the law governing the contract, the Parties shall
be released from further execution of the contract.
ARTICLE 64 : Death
64.1 Where the Contractor is a natural person, the contract shall be automatically terminated if that person
dies. However, the Contracting Authority shall examine any proposal made by the heirs or beneficiaries if
they have notified their wish to continue the contract. The decision of the Contracting Authority shall be
notified to those concerned within 30 days of receipt of such proposal.
64.2 Where the Contractor consists of a number of natural persons and one or more of them die, a report
shall be agreed between the Parties on the progress of the works, and the Contracting Authority shall
decide whether to terminate or continue the contract in accordance with the undertaking given by the
survivors and by the heirs or beneficiaries, as the case may be.
64.3 In the cases provided for in Articles 64.1 and 64.2, persons offering to continue to perform the
contract shall notify the Contracting Authority thereof within 15 days of the date of decease.
Such persons shall be jointly and severally liable, save where otherwise stated in the Special Conditions,
for the proper execution of the contract to the same extent as the defunct Contractor.
Continuation of the contract shall be subject to the rules relating to establishment.
DISPUTE SETTLEMENT
ARTICLE 65 : Amicable dispute settlement
65.1 The Parties shall make every effort to settle amicably any dispute, which may arise between them.
Once a dispute has arisen, the Parties shall notify each other in writing of their positions on the dispute
and any solution, which they consider possible. If either Party deems it useful, the Parties shall meet and
try and settle the dispute. A Party shall respond to a request for amicable settlement within 30 days of
such a request. The maximum period laid down for reaching such a settlement shall be 120 days from the
commencement of the procedure. Should the attempt to reach an amicable settlement fail or a Party fail to
respond in time to requests for a settlement, either Party shall be free to proceed to the next stage of the
dispute-settlement procedure by notifying the other.
65.2 If the amicable dispute-settlement procedure fails, the Parties may, in the case of decentralised
contracts, agree to try conciliation through the European Commission. If no settlement is reached within
120 days of the start of the conciliation procedure, each Party shall be entitled to move on to the next state
of the dispute-settlement procedure.
ARTICLE 66 : Dispute settlement by litigation
If no settlement is reached within 120 days of the start of the amicable dispute-settlement procedure, each
Party may seek:
a) either a ruling from a national court
b) or an arbitration ruling in accordance with the Special Conditions of this contract.
ETHICS CLAUSES
ARTICLE 67 : Ethics clauses
67.1 Any attempt by a candidate or tenderer to obtain confidential information, enter into unlawful
agreements with competitors or influence the committee or the Contracting Authority during the process
of examining, clarifying, evaluating and comparing tenders shall lead to the rejection of his candidacy or
tender.

2007

Page 99 of 240

67.2 Without the Contracting Authority's prior written authorisation, a Contractor and his staff or any
other Company with which the Contractor is associated or linked may not, even on an ancillary or
subcontracting basis, supply other services, carry out works or supply equipment for the project.
67.3 This prohibition also applies to any other programmes or projects that could, owing to the nature of
the contract, give rise to a conflict of interest on the part of the Contractor.
67.4 When putting forward a candidacy or tender, the candidate or tenderer shall declare that he is
affected by no potential conflict of interest and has no particular link with other tenderers or parties
involved in the project. Should such a situation arise during execution of the contract, the Contractor must
immediately inform the Contracting Authority.
67.5 The Contractor must at all times act impartially and as a faithful adviser in accordance with the code
of conduct of his profession. He shall refrain from making public statements about the project or services
without the Contracting Authority's prior approval. He may not commit the Contracting Authority in any
way without its prior written consent.
67.6 For the duration of the contract the Contractor and his staff shall respect human rights and undertake
not to offend the political, cultural and religious mores of the beneficiary state.
67.7 The Contractor may accept no payment connected with the contract other than that provided for
therein. The Contractor and his staff must not exercise any activity or receive any advantage inconsistent
with their obligations to the Contracting Authority.
67.8 The Contractor and his staff shall be obliged to maintain professional secrecy for the entire duration
of the contract and after its completion. All reports and documents drawn up or received by the
Contractor shall be confidential.
67.9 The contract shall govern the Parties' use of all reports and documents drawn up, received or
presented by them during the execution of the contract.
67.10 The Contractor shall refrain from any relationship likely to compromise his independence or that of
his staff. If the Contractor ceases to be independent, the Contracting Authority may, regardless of injury,
terminate the contract without further notice and without the Contractor having any claim to
compensation.
67.11 The Commission reserves the right to suspend or cancel project financing if corrupt practices of any
kind are discovered at any stage of the award process and if the Contracting Authority fails to take all
appropriate measures to remedy the situation. For the purposes of this provision, "corrupt practices" are
the offer of a bribe, gift, gratuity or commission to any person as an inducement or reward for performing
or refraining from any act relating to the award of a contract or implementation of a contract already
concluded with the Contracting Authority.
67.12 Such unusual commercial expenses are commissions not mentioned in the main contract or not
stemming from a properly concluded contract referring to the main contract, commissions not paid in
return for any actual and legitimate service, commissions remitted to a tax haven, commissions paid to a
recipient who is not clearly identified or commissions paid to a company which has every appearance of
being a front company.
67.13 The Contractor undertakes to supply the Commission on request with all supporting documents
relating to the conditions of the contract's execution. The Commission may carry out whatever
documentary or on-the-spot checks it deems necessary to find evidence in cases of suspected unusual
commercial expenses.
ARTICLE 68 : Administrative and financial penalties

2007

Page 100 of 240

68.1 Without prejudice to the application of penalties laid down in the contract, a Contractor who has
been guilty of making false declarations, has made substantial errors or committed irregularities and
fraud, or has been found in serious breach of its contractual obligations, may be excluded from all
contracts and grants financed by the Community budget for a maximum of five years from the time when
the infringement is established, as confirmed after an adversarial procedure with the Contractor. The
Contractor may present his arguments against this penalty within 30 days of notification of the penalty by
registered letter with acknowledgement of receipt or any equivalent means. In the absence of any reaction
on the part of the Contractor, or of withdrawal of the penalty by the Commission within 30 days of receipt
of the Contractor's arguments against it, the decision imposing the penalty shall become enforceable. That
period may be increased to ten years in the event of a repeat offence within five years of the first
infringement.
68.2 If the Contractor is found to have seriously failed to meet its contractual obligations, it shall incur
financial penalties representing 10% of the total value of the contract in question. That rate may be
increased to 20% in the event of a repeat offence within five years of the first infringement.
ARTICLE 69 : Checks and audits by Community bodies
69.1 The Contractor will allow the European Commission, the European Anti-Fraud Office and the
European Court of Auditors to verify, by examining the documents or by means of on-the-spot checks,
the implementation of the project and conduct a full audit, if necessary, on the basis of supporting
documents for the accounts, accounting documents and any other document relevant to the financing of
the project. These inspections may take place up to 7 years after the final payment.
69.2 Furthermore, the Contractor will allow the European Anti-Fraud Office to carry out checks and
verification on the spot in accordance with the procedures set out in the European Community legislation
for the protection of the financial interests of the European Communities against fraud and other
irregularities.
69.3 To this end, the Contractor undertakes to give appropriate access to staff or agents of the European
Commission, of the European Anti-Fraud Office and of the European Court of Auditors to the sites and
locations at which the Contract is carried out, including its information systems, as well as all documents
and databases concerning the technical and financial management of the project and to take all steps to
facilitate their work. Access given to agents of the European Commission, European Anti-Fraud Office
and the European Court of Auditors shall be on the basis of confidentiality with respect to third parties,
without prejudice to the obligations of public law to which they are subject. Documents must be easily
accessible and filed so as to facilitate their examination and the Contractor must inform the Contracting
Authority of their precise location.
69.4 The Contractor guarantees that the rights of the European Commission, of the European Anti-Fraud
Office and of the European Court of Auditors to carry out audits, checks and verification will be equally
applicable, under the same conditions and according to the same rules as those set out in this Article, to
any sub-contractor or any other party benefiting from EC funds.

2007

Page 101 of 240

VOLUME 2
SECTION 3 :
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
CONTENTS
Article 2 :
Article 3 :
Article 4 :
Article 5 :
Article 8 :
Article 9 :
Article 10 :
Article 11 :
Article 13 :
Article 14 :
Article 15 :
Article 17 :
Article 18 :
Article 19 :
Article 22 :
Article 25 :
Article 27 :
Article 28 :
Article 30 :
Article 31 :
Article 32 :
Article 34 :
Article 35 :
Article 37 :
Article 38 :
Article 39 :
Article 40 :
Article 42 :
Article 43 :
Article 44 :
Article 45 :
Article 46 :
Article 47 :
Article 48 :
Article 53 :
Article 56 :
Article 57 :
Article 58 :
Article 60 :
Article 65 :
Article 66 :

2007

Law and language of the contract ------------------------------------------------------ 103

Order of precedence of contract documents------------------------------------------- 103
Communications--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 103
Supervisor and Supervisor's representative ------------------------------------------- 104
Supply of documents ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 104
Access to the site -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 105
Assistance with local regulations ------------------------------------------------------- 105
The Contractor's obligations ------------------------------------------------------------ 105
Performance guarantee ------------------------------------------------------------------ 105
Insurance ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106
Implementation programme (timetable) ----------------------------------------------- 106
Contractor's drawings-------------------------------------------------------------------- 106
Tender prices ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 106
Exceptional risks -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106
Interference with Traffic ----------------------------------------------------------------- 107
Demolished Materials -------------------------------------------------------------------- 107
Temporary works-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 107
Soil studies --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 107
Patents and licences ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 107
Commencement order -------------------------------------------------------------------- 107
Period of implementation ---------------------------------------------------------------- 107
Delays in implementation ---------------------------------------------------------------- 107
Variations and modifications ------------------------------------------------------------ 108
Work Register------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 108
Origin --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 108
Quality of works and materials --------------------------------------------------------- 108
Inspection and testing -------------------------------------------------------------------- 108
Ownership of plant and materials ------------------------------------------------------ 108
General principles ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 108
Prefinancing ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 109
Retention monies -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 109
Price revision ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 109
Measurement------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 109
Interim payments -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 109
End date ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 110
Partial acceptance ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 110
Provisional acceptance------------------------------------------------------------------- 110
Maintenance obligations ----------------------------------------------------------------- 110
Breach of contract ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 110
Amicable dispute settlement ------------------------------------------------------------- 110
Dispute settlement by litigation --------------------------------------------------------- 110

Page 102 of 240

These conditions amplify and supplement, if necessary, the General Conditions governing the
contract. Unless the Special Conditions provide otherwise, those General Conditions remain fully
applicable. The numbering of the Articles of the Special Conditions is not consecutive but follows
the numbering of the Articles of the General Conditions. Other Special Conditions should be
indicated afterwards.

Article 2 :

Law and language of the contract

2.1 Community law is the law which applies to the contract, complemented, where necessary, by
Belgian law.
2.2 The language used shall be English.
Article 3 :

Order of precedence of contract documents

3.1 No additional provisions.

Article 4 :

Communications

Any written communication relating to this Contract between the Contracting Authority and/or the
Supervisor, on the one hand, and the Contractor, on the other, must be communicated to the Contracting
Authority, must state the Contract title and contract number, and must be sent by post, fax, e-mail or by
hand to the following addresses:
For and on behalf of the Contracting Authority:

Address:

Delegation of the European Commission to Bosnia and Herzegovina

Attn: Mrs. Renata Abduzaimovic
Union Bank Building
Dubrovacka 6
71000 Sarajevo
Bosnia and Herzegovina

Telephone:

+ 387 33 254 700

Fax:

+ 387 33 666 037

Name:

b) For the Supervisor:

Name of the Supervisor:
Name of the Supervisors
Representative:
Address:
Telephone:
Fax:
E-mail:

To be appointed
To be appointed
to be filled-in in connection with signing of Contract
to be filled-in in connection with signing of Contract
to be filled-in in connection with signing of Contract
to be filled-in in connection with signing of Contract

c) For the Contractor:

Name:
Contact Person:
Address:

2007

to be filled-in in connection with signing of Contract

to be filled-in in connection with signing of Contract
to be filled-in in connection with signing of Contract

Page 103 of 240

Telephone:
Fax:
E-mail:

to be filled-in in connection with signing of Contract

to be filled-in in connection with signing of Contract
to be filled-in in connection with signing of Contract

Article 5 :

Supervisor and Supervisor's representative

5.1. The following is added:

The Delegation of the European Commission, on behalf of the Contracting Authority shall
appoint a Supervisor to supervise the works on behalf of the Contracting Authority.
5.3 The Supervisor and the Supervisor's Representative shall obtain a written approval of the
Contracting Authority prior to taking any of the following actions specified in the General
Conditions:
(a)
(b)
(c)

Approve additional costs determined under the Article 19 of the General Conditions;
Approve any extension of time determined under the Article 33 of the General
Conditions;
Approve any modification of the Contract and/or issuing the Variation Order under the
Article 35 of the General Conditions.

5.4 No additional provisions

5.5 The following text is added:
In addition to the technical documentation and tests required in the Technical Specification the
Contractor shall provide the Supervisor with all technical documentation on materials and plant,
considered necessary by the Supervisor, before delivery to the Site. Further, the Contractor shall
carry out such tests on site considered necessary by the Supervisor to verify correctness of the
information provided.
5.6 Reads now:
The Contractor shall place at the disposal of the Supervisor temporarily and free of charge the patterns
and instruments necessary to perform inspections, measurements and tests enabling determination
of conformity of the executed works and built-in materials with the Technical Specification and
the technical standards referred to, including national and branch standards, and the
manufacturers instructions on the materials used.

Article 8:

Supply of documents

8.1 Reads now:

The Contracting Authority shall, within 30 days after the signing of the Contract by both parties
and not later than the Commencement Date fixed under Article 31.1 provide the Contractor free
of charge, with 3 copies of the Drawings prepared for the performance of the Contract as well as
with 3 copies of the Specification and other Contract documents.
The Contractor may purchase additional copies of these Drawings, specifications and other
documents, insofar as they are available. Upon the issue of the provisional acceptance certificate,
or upon final acceptance, the Contractor shall return to the Supervisor all Drawings, specifications
and other Contract documents.
8.4 Drawings and other documents, which the Contractor in accordance with Article 11.1 or under
the terms and conditions laid down in the Technical Specification, is obliged to prepare and
submit to the Supervisor for approval, shall be reviewed and/or commented within 14 days.
Drawings, calculations and other technical documentation shall be submitted in the format
required by the Supervisor and in the number stated in the Technical Specification.
2007

Page 104 of 240

Timely submission of drawings, calculations and other technical documentation shall be the
Contractors responsibility. The Contractor shall in case of required revisions to- or disapproval
of the documentation submitted not be entitled to any claim for additional time or cost provided
comments have been received within the above stated time limit.
The Supervisors approval of any drawings, calculations and/or other technical documentation
shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract.
8.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for the safekeeping of any formal documents relating to the
Works.
Article 9:

Access to the site

9.1 No additional provisions.

Article 10 :
10.3

Assistance with local regulations

The Contracting Authority shall assist in provision of customs clearance documents for the
materials and supplies to be provided by the Contractor.
Following the entry into force of the Law of VAT on Value Added Tax in Bosnia and
Herzegovina in January 2006, the exemption shall be performed by means of the Cessation
Scheme where the VAT shall be refunded directly to the Contractor/Consultant following a
formal request from the EC Delegation to BiH to the Indirect Taxation Authority (ITA).
The refund shall be done as per the Guidelines on application of the Instruction on conditions
and manner for VAT Refund in accordance to Article 29 paragraph 1 item 4 of the Law on
Value Added Tax signed by Delegation of the European Commission to Bosnia and
Herzegovina and Indirect Taxation Authority to Bosnia and Herzegovina on 26 Apr 2006,
attached at the end of this special conditions.

Article 11 :
11.5

The Contractor's obligations

The following text is added:

The Contractor shall develop drawings (wherever required), up to the workshop level and
submit it for the Supervisor's approval.

11.9

The last paragraph of Article 11.9 of the General Conditions reads as follows:
It shall be responsibility of the Contractor to identify drawings and documents, in addition to
those contained in the Tender Dossier or referred to in the Technical Specification, required
for proper and secure execution of the Works.
Any damage to private of public property due to the Contractor not having acquired additional
information shall be born by the Contractor.

11.11 The Contractor shall take the necessary measures to ensure the visibility of the European
Union financing or co financing. These measures must comply with the rules laid down and
published by the Commission on the visibility of external operations:
http://ec.europa.eu/europeaid/visibility/index_en.htm.
Article 13 :
13.1

2007

Performance guarantee

The Contractor shall submit a separate performance guarantee to each of the parties of the
Contracting Authority, the European Commission, the Embassy of Kingdom of Norway and
the Ministry of Justice and Administration of Sarajevo Canton, having the total amount of
10% of the Contract Price, following the proportion of the financing contribution of the
Contracting Authorities' parties in the total Contract Price.
Page 105 of 240

No additional provisions.

13.8

Article 14 :

Insurance

The Contractor shall submit a separate insurance policies to each of the parties of the
Contracting Authority, the European Commission, the Embassy of Kingdom of Norway and
the Ministry of Justice and Administration of Sarajevo Canton having the total amount as
given in the Appendix to the Tender, following the proportion of the financing contribution of
the Contracting Authorities' parties in the total Contract Price.

14.4

Article 15 :

Implementation programme (timetable)

The Contractor shall prepare and submit for the Supervisors approval:

15.1

the programme according to the General Conditions 15.1 a), b) c) and d);
performance plan (schedule of the activities including the main milestones) of works
execution and delivery and installation of equipment;
performance plan for testing and training etc.
the same shall apply to documents and items, which are to be submitted to the Supervisor
for endorsement or acceptance.

The Contractor shall draw up and submit for the Supervisors approval a detailed programme
of performance of the contract, within 30 days from Contract signature. The programme will
show all Contractors activities and sequences needed for the successful delivery of the
project.

15.2

The Supervisor shall, within the time specified in Article 8.4 after receiving such programmes,
approve, accept or comment on the programmes.

Article 17 :

Contractor's drawings

17.1 Reads now:

The Contractor shall submit to the Supervisor for his approval:
a)

Such drawings found necessary by the Supervisor to supplement the Contractors method
statements within the timeframes defined by the Supervisor.
Such drawings and information required by local authorities in connection with applications
for and obtaining of required permits.

b)

The Contractor shall bear all costs in connection with above documentation and shall be
responsible for timely submission in accordance with Article 8.4.
17.7

Drawings, manuals and manufacturers schemes of supplied/installed equipment and "as

build" drawings shall be provided in local language only, unless otherwise instructed by the
Contracting Authority and/or Supervisor. "As build" drawings shall be submitted in electronic
version and in a hard copy.

Article 18 :

Tender prices

The unit prices for unforeseen works, to be recognised throughout the project and ordered by the
Contracting Authority, shall be derived from the contracted unit prices of a similar type or
extracted from referent recent similar contracts.
Article 19 :

2007

Exceptional risks

Page 106 of 240

19.5

No additional provisions.

Article 22 :

Interference with Traffic

22.1 No additional provisions.

22.2 No additional provisions.

Article 25 :

Demolished Materials

25.1

No additional provisions.

25.4

Removal of rubble, other demolition materials, rubbish and debris from the site shall be done
by the Contractor at his expense.
The Contractor can not reinstall demolished materials and/or dismantled equipment, unless
otherwise instructed by the Supervisor.

Article 27 :
27.2

Temporary works

No additional provisions.

Article 28 :

Soil studies

28.1

No additional provisions.

28.2

No additional provisions.

Article 30 :
30.1

Patents and licences

No additional provisions.

Article 31 :

Commencement order

The following text is added:

31.1

Construction works shall start on the working day following the issuance of the letter of
commencement by the supervisor.

31.2

The commencement date shall not be later than 30 calendar days following signature of the
Contract by all parties.

Article 32 :
32.1

Period of execution of rehabilitation works, as defined in the Appendix to Tender is 12

(twelve) months following issuance of the commencement order.

Article 34 :
34.1

2007

Period of implementation

Delays in implementation

Amount of liquidated damages defined in the Appendix to Tender. The benefit from the
liquidated damages is to be split between the parties comprising the Contracting Authority,

Page 107 of 240

following the proportion of the financing contribution of the Contracting Authorities' parties in
the total Contract Price.

Article 35 :

Variations and modifications

35.7

No additional provisions.

35.8

No additional provisions.

35.9

No additional provisions.

Article 37 :
37.1

Work Register

The following is added:

Work register shall be kept in local language and in accordance with the local legislation.

37.2

No additional provisions.

Article 38 :

Origin

No additional provisions.
Article 39 :
39.1

Quality of works and materials

The following is added:

Prior to ordering, placement and/or instalment of any construction materials the Contractor
shall provide attest and samples of all material he proposed to build in, in the timely manner to
the Supervisor and/or Contracting Authority for the approval.

39.4

The Works and Materials shall also comply with any European Union standards and any
requirements of the applicable technical regulations and local legislations.

Article 40 :
40.8

Inspection and testing shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the
applicable technical regulations and local legislations.

Article 42 :
42.2

Ownership of plant and materials

All equipment, temporary works, Plant and materials on Site owned by the Contractor or by a
company in which the Contractor has a controlling interest, shall, for the duration of the
performance of the Contract, be made subject to a lien in favour to the Contracting Authority.

Article 43 :
43.1

Inspection and testing

General principles

Payments shall be made in euro. Payments shall be authorised and made by the respective
finance sections of the parties comprising the Contracting Authority.

43.1.1 Payment requests shall be submitted separately to each of the parties comprising the
Contracting Authority, the European Commission, the Embassy of Kingdom of Norway and
the Ministry of Justice and Administration of Sarajevo Canton.

2007

Page 108 of 240

Payments shall be executed separately and autonomously from the other parties, by each of the
parties comprising the Contracting Authority, following the proportion of the financing
contribution of the Contracting Authorities' parties in the total Contract Price, of the respective
amount eligible for payment under the respective invoice.
43.3

The 45-day period for payment shall start from the date when each of the parties representing
the Contracting Authority register receipt of Contractors invoice submitted with progress
registration approved by the Supervisor in accordance with Article 48.5.

Article 44 :

Pre-financing

44.1 and 2 The amount of the advances shall not exceed the equivalent in Euro of the amount of
BAM 800,000.
Pre-financing payment requests shall be submitted to the Ministry of Justice and
Administration of Sarajevo Canton for execution, with a copy provided for information to
other parties of the Contracting Authority
In order to obtain pre-financing payment, the Contractor must forward to the Ministry of
Justice and Administration of Sarajevo Canton, the payment request, and the financial
guarantee for the full amount of the pre-financing payment.
Article 45 :

Retention monies

45.1 and 2
The sum to be retained from the interim payments by each of the parties comprising the
Contracting Authority, to guarantee performance of the contractors obligations during the
maintenance period shall be 10% of the executed works and supplies.
Retention could be replaced by submission of the separate bank guarantee issued in
accordance with Article no. 13.3 of the General conditions.
45.3

Each of the parties comprising the Contracting Authority retains its responsibility for the
release of its share of the retention moneys following the proportion of the financing
contribution of the Contracting Authorities' parties in the total Contract Price, of the total
retention moneys, subject to submission of the retention guarantee, mentioned above, or
expiration of the Defect Liability Period.

Article 46 :
46.1

Price revision

Prices and rates in the Bills of Quantities are fixed for the duration of the Contract and shall
not be subject to any revisions.

Article 47 :

Measurement
Methods and conditions to evaluate the works shall be in accordance with the local
regulations and norms for construction works.

47.2

Article 48 :

Interim payments

48.1

g) Minimum total amount of Interim Payment Certificate shall be 100,000 Euro, presenting
total amount payable by the parties comprising the Contracting Authority.

48.8

Interim payment requests shall be submitted separately to each of the parties comprising the
Contracting Authority, the European Commission, the Embassy of Kingdom of Norway and
the Ministry of Justice and Administration of Sarajevo Canton, subject to split of the total

2007

Page 109 of 240

amount following the proportion of the financing contribution of the Contracting Authorities'
parties in the total Contract Price.
Accordingly, the respective interim payments, not to exceed the proportion of the financing
contribution of the Contracting Authorities' parties in the total Contract Price, of the total
amount subject to the interim payment, shall be executed by the respective party of the
Contracting Authority, separately and autonomously from the other parties.

Article 53 :

End date

No additional provisions.

Article 56 :
56.3

The maintenance period of the building begins on the date of the latest Provisional Acceptance
of the building is signed.

Article 57 :
57.6

Breach of contract

Each parties comprising the Contracting Authority is entitled to damages in the total amount
of 10 % of the contract value, excluding the provisional sum, subject to split of the total
amount following the proportion of the financing contribution of the Contracting Authorities'
parties in the total Contract Price.

Article 65 :
65.2

Maintenance obligations

The maintenance period shall be 365 days after the latest Provisional Acceptance Certificate is
issued by the Supervisor, as it is stipulated by the Appendix to the Tender.

Article 60 :
60.4

Provisional acceptance

The operating and maintenance manuals, as built drawings and warranty certificates of
mechanical, electrical and all other engineering components necessary to put building into the
full operation; and/or required by the Supervisor and/or Contracting Authority shall be
submitted by the Contractor to the Supervisor before the Provisional Acceptance Certificate is
issued by the Supervisor.

Article 58 :
58.7

Partial acceptance

Amicable dispute settlement

No additional provisions.

Article 66 :

Dispute settlement by litigation

Any dispute between the Parties that may arise during the execution of this contract and
cannot be settled amicably between the Parties shall be submitted to the courts of Brussels.

2007

Page 110 of 240

GUIDELINES ON APPLICATION
OF THE INSTRUCTION ON CONDITIONS AND MANNER FOR VAT REFUND
IN ACCORDANCE TO ARTICLE 29 PARAGRAPH 1 ITEM 4
OF THE LAW ON VALUE ADDED TAX
BETWEEN
DELEGATION OF THE EUROPEAN COMMISSION TO BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA
AND
INDIRECT TAXATION AUTHORITY OF BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA
In accordance with the Instruction on Conditions and Manner for VAT Refund No: 02-1526/06, signed by
the Director of the Indirect Taxation Authority on 08 March 2006, the Indirect Taxation Authority of
Bosnia and Herzegovina (hereinafter ITA) and the Delegation of the European Commission to Bosnia and
Herzegovina (hereinafter EC) have agreed on the following Guidelines on Application of the Instruction
for VAT Refund:
1. Contractor provides to the EC:
a) two originals or verified copies of invoice indicating VAT amount for which refund is to be
claimed
(with net amount, VAT amount and total amount for payment) and
b) an evidence on paid VAT subject for refund (for import of goods it is copy of SAD /single
administrative document/customs declaration form/ and bank statement on paid VAT; for internal
transactions it is copy of the VAT application with specification of invoices subject to VAT
refund).
2. Following internal verification and payment of net amount to contractor, the EC submits to the
ITA Regional Centre (RC) Sarajevo:
a) completed claim form CD PDV 1M (attached),
b) copy of the ECs notification of payment of invoice to contractor and
c) copy of contract on the basis of which refund is being claimed
(only needed for the first refund claim within one contract).
3. ITA RC Sarajevo processes claim, makes inquiries and corrections as necessary. Rejected refund
claims can be corrected and resubmitted. Bank transaction expenses shall be covered by the ITA.
4. The Head of Tax Unit in the RC Sarajevo issues refund decision if required conditions are met.
5. RC Sarajevo provides refund decision to the EC and submits it to the ITAs Business Services
Sector in Banja Luka for execution.
6. The EC informs contractor on the ITAs refund decision.
7. Business Services Sector in Banja Luka makes refund by transferring funds directly to
contractors bank account.
(as provided in CD PDV 1M form).
8. ITAs Taxpayers Service Unit in the RC Sarajevo and the EC shall keep special records on
submitted and resolved VAT refund claims.
This document is drawn up in the English and Bosnian language in two original copies.

2007

Page 111 of 240

FOR THE INDIRECT TAXATION AUTHORITY OF

BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA
(SIGNED)
Mr. Kemal CAUSEVIC
Director
FOR THE DELEGATION OF THE
EUROPEAN COMMISSION TO BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA
(SIGNED)
Ambassador Michael B. HUMPHREYS
Head of Delegation

At:

Sarajevo

Date:

2007

Page 112 of 240

VOLUME 2
SECTION 4 :
SPECIMEN PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE

(To be completed on paper bearing the letterhead of the financial institution)

For the attention of
Delegation of the European Commission to Bosnia and Herzegovina
Contract and Finance Section-Procurement
Dubrovacka 6/ II Floor
71000 Sarajevo
Bosnia and Herzegovina
referred to below as the Contracting Authority
Subject: Guarantee No
Performance Guarantee for the full and proper execution of contract (contract number and title) (please
quote number and title in all correspondence)

We, the undersigned, [name, and address of financial institution], hereby irrevocably declare that we
guarantee, as primary obligor, and not merely as a surety on behalf of [Contractor's name and address],
hereinafter referred to as the Contractor, payment to the Contracting Authority of [amount of the
performance guarantee], representing the performance guarantee mentioned in Article 13 of the Special
Conditions of the contract (contract number and title) concluded between the Contractor and the
Contracting Authority, hereinafter referred to as the Contract.
Payment shall be made without objection or legal proceedings of any kind, upon receipt of your first
written claim (sent by registered letter with confirmation of receipt) stating that the Contractor has failed
to perform his contractual obligations fully and properly or that the Contract has been terminated. We
shall not delay the payment, nor shall we oppose it for any reason whatsoever. We shall inform you in
writing as soon as payment has been made.
We accept notably that no amendment to the terms of the Contract can release us from our obligation
under this guarantee. We waive the right to be informed of any change, addition or amendment to the
Contract.
We note that the guarantee will be released within 45 days of the issue of the final acceptance certificate
and in any case at the latest on (at the expiry of 18 months after the implementation period of the
Contract).
The law applicable to this guarantee shall be that of Belgium. Any dispute arising out of or in connection
with this guarantee shall be referred to the courts of Belgium.

2007

Page 113 of 240

The guarantee shall enter into force and take effect upon its signature.
Done at .., ../../..
Name and first name: On behalf of:
Signature: ..

[stamp of the body providing the guarantee]

2007

Page 114 of 240

VOLUME 2
SECTION 5 :
SPECIMEN PREFINANCING PAYMENT GUARANTEE

(To be completed on paper bearing the letterhead of the financial institution)

For the attention of
(Address of the Contracting Authority)
Referred to below as the Contracting Authority
Subject: Guarantee No
Financing Guarantee for the repayment of pre-financing payable under contract (Contract number and
title) (please quote number and title in all correspondence)

We the undersigned, [name, and address of financial institution], hereby irrevocably declare that we
guarantee as primary obligor, and not merely as surety on behalf of [Contractor's name and address],
hereinafter referred to as the Contractor, the payment to the Contracting Authority of [indicate the
amount of the pre-financing], corresponding to the pre-financing as mentioned in Article 44 of the
Special Conditions of the contract (Contract number and title) concluded between the Contractor and the
Contracting Authority, hereinafter referred to as the Contract.
Payment shall be made without objection or legal proceedings of any kind, upon receipt of your first
written claim (sent by registered letter with confirmation or receipt) stating that the Contractor has not
repaid the pre-financing on request or that the Contract has been terminated. We shall not delay the
payment, nor shall we oppose it for any reason whatsoever. We shall inform you in writing as soon as
payment has been made.
We accept notably that no amendment to the terms of the Contract can release us from our obligation
under this guarantee. We waive the right to be informed of any change, addition or amendment of the
Contract. .
We note that the guarantee will be released 45 days at the latest after the provisional acceptance of the
works [and in any case at the latest on (at the expiry of 18 months after the implementation period of the
Contract) ]10.
The law applicable to this guarantee shall be that of Belgium. Any dispute arising out of or in connection
with this guarantee shall be referred to the courts of Belgium.
The guarantee will enter into force and take effect on receipt of the pre-financing payment in the account
designated by the Contractor to receive payments.

10

This mention has to be inserted where the law applicable to the guarantee imposes a precise expiry date.

2007

Page 115 of 240

Done at .., ../../..

Name and first name: On behalf of:
Signature: ..

[stamp of the body providing the guarantee]

2007

Page 116 of 240

VOLUME 2
SECTION 6 :
SPECIMEN RETENTION GUARANTEE
(To be completed on paper bearing the letterhead of the financial institution)
For the attention of
(Address of the Contracting Authority)
referred to below as the Contracting Authority
Subject: Guarantee No
Retention Guarantee for contract (contract number and title) (please quote number and title in all
correspondence)

We, the undersigned, [name, and address of financial institution ], hereby irrevocably declare that we
guarantee, as primary obligor, and not merely as a surety on behalf of [Contractor's name and address],
hereinafter referred to as the Contractor, payment to the Contracting Authority of [amount of the
retention guarantee], representing the retention guarantee mentioned in Article 45 of the Special
Conditions of the contract (contract number and title) concluded between the Contractor and the
Contracting Authority, hereinafter referred to as the contract
Payment shall be made without objection or legal proceedings of any kind, upon receipt of your first
written claim (sent by registered letter with confirmation of receipt) stating that the Contractor has failed
to perform his contractual obligations fully and properly or that the Contract has been terminated. We
shall not delay the payment, nor shall we oppose it for any reason whatsoever. We shall inform you in
writing as soon as payment has been made.
We accept notably that no amendment to the terms of the Contract can release us from our obligation
under this guarantee. We waive the right to be informed of any change, addition or amendment to the
Contract.
We note that the guarantee will be released within 45 days of the issue of the final acceptance certificate
[and in any case at the latest on (at the expiry of 18 months after the implementation period of the
Contract) ]11.
The law applicable to this guarantee shall be that of Belgium. Any dispute arising out of or in connection
with this guarantee shall be referred to the courts of Belgium.
The guarantee shall enter into force and take effect upon its signature.

Done at .., ../../..

11

This mention has to be inserted where the law applicable to the guarantee imposes a precise expiry date

2007

Page 117 of 240

Name and first name: On behalf of:

Signature: ..

[stamp of the body providing the guarantee]

2007

Page 118 of 240

VOLUME 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2007

Page 119 of 240

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
NOTE: The Technical Description comprise all activities related to overall rehabilitation of the
premises of the Municipal and Cantonal Courts in Sarajevo.
However, subject of funding under this particular contract shall be only the works defined under
items presented in the Bill of Quantities for the project in mention.

ARCHITECTURAL AND CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS

1.

INTRODUCTION

Main Design on reconstruction and repair of the Municipal and Cantonal Court in Sarajevo has been
prepared on a basis of the following:

Requirements set out in the Annex II of the Contract No. 95900, concluded between
Energoinvest, d.d. Sarajevo and the High Judicial and Prosecutorial Council of B&H,
Functional Schemes, which have been approved by authorised persons of the Investor, the
Municipal and Cantonal Court and Project Term of Reference, approved by the Investor.
Previously prepared Preliminary design.

Project goal was introduction of changes that shall result in higher quality and more efficient operation of
the courts using the building. In that sense, the following units have been formed: units used by both
courts, rooms used by the Municipal Court and rooms used by the Cantonal Court.
Reconstruction and repair do not include faade works. The only modification in respect of the existing
facades is related to the part of the attic, detailed description of which is given in the forthcoming text.

2.

ARRANGEMENT OF THE BUILDING

The designed building consists of the following floors: basement + ground floor + three floors + attic. The
works subject to the Design concern parts of the building used by the Municipal and Cantonal Court on
all floors.
2.1.
Basement
In the basement, there are common rooms that are already in use for a purpose of service installations of
the building (boiler room, sub-station, aggregate and hydroflex plant) with maintenance rooms for staff.
The room next to the entrance from Branilaca Grada Street is aimed for security staff.
Remaining rooms are used for the archives of the Municipal and Cantonal Court and registry office of the
Municipal Court. In order to facilitate connection to the registry offices on the ground floor, the two new
stairways have been designed, to be used exclusively by the staff working in the registry offices and
archives.
2.2.
Ground Floor
The Ground Floor is used for services that the Courts offer to citizens. Thus, this floor contains the
following common rooms:

2007

Two large court rooms with anterooms, rooms for the judges and witnesses
Multifunctional hall
Mailing room
Room for document verification
Mail boxes for lawyers
Page 120 of 240

Information desk
Copy room
Newspaper store
Smoking room
Rooms for security and video-surveillance
Server room (in the Annex)
Store rooms
Toilets for visitors
Toilets for staff
Toilet for persons in wheelchairs

Space used by the Municipal Court:

Registry offices with the main room

Reception of apprehended persons
Offices for Non-contentious Procedure Department
Multifunctional spaces of registry room and the archive (in the Annex)

In addition to the aforementioned, on the ground floor there is a registry room of the Cantonal Court with
the main room.
It has been already mentioned that the ground floor was connected to the basement through the new
stairway. In the part of the Annex there is a new stairway formed for connection to the rooms on the first
floor of the Annex.

2.3.
First Floor
In the part of the first floor, next to the central stairway and aula, there is a public space and common
rooms formed by means of conversion, consisting of:

10 (ten) court rooms

Mediation rooms
Information desk
Telephone exchange
Store rooms
Tea kitchen
Toilet for visitors and staff

In addition to the aforementioned, on the first floor there are the rooms used by the Cantonal Court:

Office of the Cantonal Court President consisting of the rooms for the Court President,
Presidents Secretary, Secretary of the Court and journalists.
21 (twenty-one) offices for the judges + 3 (three) offices for the judges in the Annex
4 (four) administration offices in the Annex
4 (four) offices for experts in the Annex
2 (two) offices for judicial trainees
2 (two) offices for reserve judges

First floor of the Annex is connected to the ground floor of the annex through the new stairway and to the
first floor of the main building through the closed corridor. This enables unification of the prison
stairway, whose continuity is presently disrupted, and its separation from the court space, as well as
putting it into operation.
Existing connection to the building called Hotel is becoming a controlled connection by installing the
door with controlled entrance (magnetic card).
2.4.
Second Floor
In the part of the second floor there are common rooms consisting of:

2007

Meeting room
Page 121 of 240

Store room
Rooms for the auxiliary staff
Tea kitchen
Toilets for staff
Two safe-rooms

In addition to the aforementioned, on the second floor there are the rooms used by the Cantonal Court:

6 (six) offices for judges

4 (four) administration offices,

as well as the offices used by the Municipal Court:

Office of the Municipal Court President consisting of the rooms for Court President, Presidents
Secretary, Secretary of the Court and journalists
28 (twenty-eight) offices for the judges (criminal law department and bossiness law department,
fourteen offices each)
Bossiness Registration Department Offices (three offices)
4 (four ) offices for experts

2.5.
Third Floor
In the part of the third floor, there are common spaces encompassing the following:

Store rooms
Tea kitchen
Toilets for staff

In addition to the aforementioned, on the third floor there are the rooms used by the Municipal Court:

46 (forty-six) offices for judges of Litigation Department

2.6.
Attic Floor
In the part of the attic floor there are common rooms consisting of:

Library
Reading-room and Internet
Restaurant with handy kitchen
Room for additional typists
Room for courier service
Store rooms
Room for maintenance staff
Tea kitchen
Toilets for staff

In addition to the aforementioned, on the attic floor there are the rooms used by the Municipal Court:

25 (twenty-five) offices for judges of Executive Department

2 (two) rooms for court bailiffs
2 (two) rooms for the Executive Department registry room
2 (two) administration offices
3 (three) offices for Financial Department
2 (two) rooms for Supply Department

Rooms of library, reading-room, internet, restaurant, bailiffs, typists and courier service will be located in
the room presently used as a loft and will change its purpose by this reconstruction.
3.

2007

MATERIALIZATION - CIVIL AND CRAFTSMENS WORKS

Page 122 of 240

3.1.1. Basement
Part of the basement consisting of the corridor, hydroflex room, the existing buffet and archive, currently
used by the Cantonal Court have been reconstructed recently. Walls and ceilings have been painted with
semi-dispersive paint, except for the corridor, where the ceiling is suspended type maid of metal lamellas.
Floors are covered with ceramic tiles.
The other rooms (part of the corridor, archive, boiler room, corridor before the boiler room and rooms for
technical staff) havent been rehabilitated and suffer a great damage due to age, humidity, either from
installation or from the terrain.
These rooms are to be completely rehabilitated. Floors are to be covered with ceramic tiles including
hydro-insulation made of bituminous stripe thickness 4.0mm. Mortar has to be removed from the walls
with visible wet areas; walls are to be re-plastered using water-proofing hydro insulating mortar and
painted with semi-dispersive paint in corridors, archives and rooms for staff, while the walls in the service
rooms and toilets are to be partially covered with ceramic tiles.
Ceilings are to be repaired and painted with semi-dispersive paint. In the corridor, suspended ceiling is to
be placed, on the model of the existing ceiling.
Doors and windows in the reconstructed part have been brought into functional condition. Repair of
window should be performed where necessary: glazing /where glass is missing, adjusting, handle
replacement, gaskets, painting). Doors are to be brought into function by installing the new hardware,
adjusting and varnishing.
Floor structure between the basement and the ground floor will be removed on two places due to the new
stairways. The stairways are made from concrete, covered with stone.
All necessary rehabilitation works are to be done after making the openings in the floor structure between
the basement and the ground floor for placement of the new stairways.
3.1.2.

Ground floor

In the frame of the ground floor, it is planned to eliminate all spatial elements which disrupt original
appearance of the buildings interior with preservation and improvement of the space functionality. The
following rooms are displaced: information room, access control room, newspaper shop and copy room
and their function will continue in the other rooms.
3.1.2.a. Structural interventions
Floor structure between the ground floor and the first floor in the Annex will be removed due to the new
stairway. The stairway is made from steel with PVC lining. All necessary rehabilitation works are to be
done after making the openings in the floor structure between the basement and the ground floor for
placement of the new stairways.
Corridor and the Annex, firstly used as registry offices, will be used as archives at last. That is why the
floor structure is straightened in order to take over additional load of archive material. Floor level is
presently different in the corridor and in the offices and is to be levelled. Strengthening is to be done with
steel profiles anchored in the existing walls. Over profiles, wooden boarding of 24mm thickness and PVC
floor will be done.
3.1.2.b. Walls
In order to form larger rooms, part of partition walls made from solid brics 15cm thick is removed. As
required, new door openings are made in bearing walls, including opening strengthening.
New partition walls are made from gypsum-carton boards 2x12.5mm on both sides, on a standard zinccoated metal sub-structure, including the mineral wool filling, total thickness 15 cm, apart for the new
walls in toilets, maid from siporex. Previously visible water supply and sewerage installations are covered
with gypsum-carton boards on the metal sub-structure.
Semi-dispersive paint will be used for final wall treatment in the offices and registry rooms. Court rooms
will be painted with three shades of semi-dispersive paint, by the designer's choice.
2007

Page 123 of 240

In the corridors and main stairways, the existing paint will be removed from the walls. After preparation,
the walls will be painted in three shades of a decorative paint, highly resistant to mechanical damage
(StoLook Picolo or similar) by designer's choice.
Walls in toilets are covered with ceramic glazed tiles, in glue, up to a height of 2,20m. Remaining surface
is painted with semi-dispersive paint.
Remark: Plaster damaged due to a leakage from installations is to be removed and these walls are to be
re-plastered.
3.1.2.c. Ceilings
In majority of the rooms there are existing ceilings, plastered and painted with semi-dispersive paint.
In the toilets, predicted are suspended modular water-resistant ceilings on a standard metal sub-structure.
Suspended ceiling in the court rooms, anterooms of the court rooms and information room is made from
monolithic gypsum-carton boards on a standard metal sub-structure.
Remark: Plaster damaged due to a leakage from installations is to be removed and these ceiling are to be
re-plastered.
3.1.2.d. Floors
In the court rooms and part of court room anterooms, laminate floor is to be removed. It is assumed that
the old parquet is bellow. On the cleaned base surface, OSB boards 2x12 mm are placed crosswise, glued
and connected to each other by bolts. The boards are covered with the following layers: preparatory coat
for wood, impregnation mass for wood and classical parquet 25mm thick, in glue.
In the existing toilets, the existing base and the floor ceramic tiles are to be removed. The following new
layers are made: new hydro insulation maid of bituminous stripe thickness 4.0 mm, layer of extruded
polystyrene 2cm thick, PVC foil and a new floor ceramic tiles, non-glazed, placed in lightly reinforced
cement base, 4cm thick.
In the space predicted for a new toilet for visitors the existing base and the parquet are to be removed
down to supporting structure. New layers are the following: lightly reinforced 7cm-thick concrete slab (on
a floor formwork), anchored in the existing beams and walls; hydro insulation maid of bituminous stripe
thickness 4.0 mm, layer of extruded polystyrene 2cm thick, PVC sheet and a new floor caramic tiles, nonglazed, placed in lightly reinforced cement base, 4cm thick.
The existing corridor floors are maid of a cast terrazzo, which is to be grinded and polished after other
works on this floor are completed. New stony thresholds are placed. In the corridor of the annex, over
existing ceramic tiles, there will be placed PVC floor, including base preparation.
Existing floors in the other rooms are covered with parquet, grinded and varnished with high wearing
resistance varnish. Part of parquet surface, as per percentage indicated in BoQ, is removed and replaced
with new, and part will be adjusted (re-arranged). Where partition wall is demolished, wooden varnished
strip is to be placed on that place, including prior base preparation.
3.1.2.e. Doors
Existing doors are being retained and will be repaired (adjusting, replacement of all parts and handles,
removal of paint and repainting, including necessary preparation and rubber gasket placement.
New doors in the corridors are to be made and finalised, on a model of the existing doors. Doors in the
new partitions in the offices and registry rooms are to be joiner's, covered with veneer. Doors on toilet
cabins are painted with varnish for wood, including prior preparation. All new doors must have good
quality hardware and cylindrical locks.
New locksmith's items (railings etc.) are made from inox. Newspaper store is made of anodised
aluminium profiles, with glass and aluminium panel infillings.

2007

Page 124 of 240

Based on requirement of fire prevention, a new fire-proof door will be installed on first, second and the
third floor. These are glazed fire-proof items, fire-proof for 90 minutes, arrangement of which is shown in
the drawing.
3.1.2.f. Windows
Where found necessary, window repair is done, including glazing (where glass is missing), adjusting, new
hardware, gaskets, removal of old paint and repainting, including preparation. For the windows facing the
yard, outside glass is to be wired glass and inside unpolished glass. These windows are fixed after
reparation.
3.1.3. First, Second and Third Floor
Covered corridor will be constructed for connection of the main building to the Annex on the level of the
first floor. Floor slab exists and roof slab is reinforced concrete with a wooden one-slope roof, roofed
with zinc-coated and plastic-covered sheet metal. Walls are made from bricks with outside hydro
insulation. Windows are made of wood, glazed with wired thermo insulation glass. Floor is covered with
PVC, and walls are painted with semi-dispersive paint.
3.1.3.a. Walls
In order to form larger rooms, part of partition walls 15cm thick, made from solid brick, is removed. As
required, new door openings are made in bearing walls, including opening strengthening.
New partition walls are made from gypsum-carton boards 2x12.5mm on both sides, on a standard zinccoated metal sub-structure, including the mineral wool filling, total thickness 15 cm. Previously visible
water supply and sewerage installations are covered with gypsum-carton boards on the metal substructure.
Semi-dispersive paint will be used for final wall treatment in the court rooms and offices.
In the corridors and main stairways, the existing paint will be removed from the walls. After preparation,
the walls will be painted in three shades of a decorative paint, highly resistant to mechanical damage
(StoLook Picolo or similar) by Supervisor's choice.
Walls in toilets are covered with ceramic glazed tiles, in glue, up to a height of 2,20m. Remaining surface
is painted with semi-dispersive paint.
Remark: Plaster damaged due to a leakage from installations is to be removed and these walls are to be
re-plastered.
3.1.3. b Ceilings
In most of the rooms there are existing ceilings, plastered and painted with semi-dispersive paint.
Suspended ceiling in the court rooms, anterooms of the court rooms and information room is made from
monolithic gypsum-carton boards on a standard metal sub-structure.
In the court room anterooms (in places where one room is converted to two rooms) suspended ceiling is
modular, made of pressed mineral wool boards on standard metal zinc-coated sub-structure. In the
meeting room and court room next to the aula, monolithic suspended ceiling on a standard zinc-coated
metal sub-structure is done.
Remark: Plaster damaged due to a leakage from installations is to be removed and these walls are to be
re-plastered.
3.1.3.c. Floors
In the existing toilets, the existing base and the floor ceramic tiles are to be removed. The following new
layers are made: new hydro insulation maid of bituminous stripe thickness 4.0mm, layer of extruded
polystyrene 2cm-thick, PVC foil and a new floor ceramic tiles, non-glazed, placed in lightly reinforced
cement base, 4cm thick.

2007

Page 125 of 240

The existing corridor floors are maid of a cast terrazzo, which is to be grinded and polished after other
works on this floor are completed. New stony thresholds are placed. In the corridor of the Annex, on the
first floor, the existing floor ceramic tiles are to be removed and new, non-glazed ceramic tiles dim.
30x30 cm will be glued, including base preparation.
Existing floors in the other rooms are covered with parquet, grinded and varnished with high wearing
resistance varnish. Part of parquet surface is removed as per percentage indicated in B o Q, and replaced
with new, while part will be adjusted (re-arranged). Where partition wall is demolished, wooden
varnished strip is to be placed on that place, including prior base preparation.
3.1.3.d. Doors
Existing doors are being retained and will be repaired (adjusting, replacement of all parts and handles,
removal of paint and repainting, including necessary preparation and rubber gasket placement).
New doors in the corridors are to be made and finalised on a model of the existing doors. Doors in the
new partitions in the offices and registry rooms are to be joiner's, covered with veneer. Doors on toilet
cabins are painted with varnish for wood, including prior preparation. All new doors must have good
quality hardware and cylindrical locks.
New locksmith's items are made from anodised aluminium profiles with lamistal glass infilling.
Based on requirement of fire prevention, a new fire-proof door will be installed on first, second and the
third floor. These are glazed fire-proof items, fire-proof for 90 minutes, arrangement of which is shown in
the drawing.
3.1.3.e. Windows
Where found necessary, window repair is done, including glazing (where glass is missing), adjusting, new
hardware, gaskets, removal of old paint and repainting, including preparation. For the windows facing the
yard, outside glass is to be wired glass and inside unpolished glass. These windows are fixed after
reparation.
3.1.4.

Attic

3.1.4. a Roofs
In the attic, planned are structural interventions, including removal of the part of the existing roof which
is parallel to the central light well and construction of the new roof, in order to convert the existing space
to the capacities planned by this design. New supporting structure is from steel profiles painted with fireresistant paint and roofing is made from zinc plain sheet metal (self-integrative) plastic-coated, including
the required hydro- and thermal insulation.
This intervention does not change total height of this part of the building and only eaves elevation will be
changed.
Because of the obvious aging, part of the pitched roof, roofed with zinc plain sheet metal, will be
repaired, in a way that sheet metal and roof boarding are removed. After that, a new roof boarding, hydro
insulation and self-integrative sheet metal roofing shall be placed. In the space under the Administration
Building cupola, hydro insulation of deed-level terrace must be repaired.
3.1.4.b. Walls
Wooden and cabinet partitions are removed and new walls are made from gypsum-carton boards 2x12,5
mm on both sides, on a standard zinc-coated metal sub-structure, including the mineral wool filling, total
thickness 15 cm, apart for new walls in toilets that are made of siporex. Previously visible water supply
and sewerage installations are covered with gypsum-carton boards on the metal sub-structure.

2007

Page 126 of 240

In order to form larger rooms, part of partition walls is removed. The wall is 15cm thick, made from solid
bricks. As required, new door openings are made in bearing walls, including opening strengthening.
Semi-dispersive paint will be used for final wall treatment in the court rooms and offices.
Walls in toilets are covered with ceramic glazed tiles, in glue, up to a height of 2,20m. Remaining surface
is painted with semi-dispersive paint.
Remark: Plaster damaged due to a leakage from installations is to be removed and these walls are to be
re-plastered.
New steel supports in the space to be reconstructed are covered with three-layer gypsum-carton flameproof boards 3x12,5 mm.
3.1.4.c. Ceilings
In most of the rooms there are existing ceilings, plastered and painted with semi-dispersive paint.
In part of the rooms, the existing damaged suspended ceiling is removed and replaced with modular
suspended ceiling, made of pressed mineral wool boards on standard metal zinc-coated sub-structure.
New suspended ceilings are placed also in the offices with present height of 5m.
In the part of the attic space to be converted to office space, ceilings are suspended monolithic and in a
part next to the light well they are suspended modular.
In the toilets, predicted are suspended modular water-resistant ceilings on a standard metal sub-structure.
Remark: Plaster damaged due to a leakage from installations is to be removed and these ceiling are to be
re-plastered.
3.1.2.d. Floors
In the court rooms and part of court room anterooms, laminate floor is to be removed. It is assumed that
the old parquet is bellow. On the cleaned base surface, OSB boards 2x12 mm are placed crosswise, glued
and connected to each other by bolts. The boards are covered with the following layers: preparatory coat
for wood, impregnation mass for wood and PVC covering. Joint of threshold and door is covered with Lprofile. Wooden profiled skirting is made next to the walls.
In the existing toilets, the existing base and the floor ceramic tiles are to be removed. The following new
layers are made: new hydro insulation maid of bituminous stripe thickness 4.0mm, layer of extruded
polystyrene 2cm thick, PVC foil and a new floor ceramic tiles, non-glazed, placed in lightly reinforced
cement base, 4cm thick.
In the restaurant and corridor around the light well, the following layers are placed on the existing base
cleaned from the old layers: hard 2cm-thick Styrofoam, PVC sheet and new floor ceramic tiles, nonglazed, placed in lightly reinforced cement base, 5,5cm thick.
In the library the following items will be placed over the existing floor structure: steel profile
reinforcement, wooden boarding 2,5cm, thick Styrofoam 2cm, knauf-dry cement base 4cm, on which a
2,5cm thick classical parquet in a glue. Parquet is than grinded and varnished with a varnish of high
wearing resistance.
Existing floors in the other rooms are covered with parquet, grinded and varnished with high wearing
resistance varnish. Part of parquet surface, as per percentage indicated in BoQ, is removed and replaced
with new, and part will be adjusted (re-arranged). Where partition wall is demolished, wooden varnished
strip is to be placed on that place, including prior base preparation.
3.1.4.e. Doors
Part of the existing doors is being retained and will be repaired (adjusting, replacement of all parts and
handles, removal of paint and repainting, including necessary preparation and rubber gasket placement).
Joinery doors are to be covered with veneer. Doors on toilet cabins are painted with varnish for wood,
including prior preparation. All new doors must have good quality hardware and cylindrical locks.

2007

Page 127 of 240

New locksmith's items are made from anodised aluminium profiles with lamistal glass infilling, and
external ones are to be made of anodised aluminium profiles with thermo insulating glass and aluminium
panel infilling
Based on requirement of fire prevention, a new fire-proof door will be installed on first, second and the
third floor. These are glazed fire-proof items, fire-proof for 90 minutes, arrangement of which is shown in
the drawing.
3.1.4.f. Windows
Where found necessary, window repair is done, including glazing (where glass is missing), adjusting, new
hardware, gaskets, removal of old paint and repainting, including preparation.
3.2.

ELEVATORS

There were not elevators in the building until now, what made communication seriously difficult.
Independent movement of the persons in a wheelchair was not possible, due to the invincible entrance
slope. At the same time, sloping platform between the entrance tambour elevation from the Senoina Street
and the ground floor elevation is not in function.
In order to overcome the mentioned, the design comprises installation of the following:
3.2.1.

One elevator in the existing elevator shaft, presently not used for that purpose. The elevator has
stations from the basement to the attic and has the following characteristics:
Capacity..1000 kg/13 persons,
Speed..1 m/s,
Number of stations/entrances..6/5 on the same side/1 under 90o,
Elevation height..22 m,
Control: ..................Simplex, collecting in both directions
Drive type: .........Asynchronous, frequency regulated
engine, no reducer,
Electricity connection... 3x380V/220V - 50 Hz,
Machine room...No machine room,
Cabin door (width x height).Automatic telescopic,
900x2100 mm, wings covered with
brushed stainless steel, with
infra-red screen, frequency-regulated,
Shaft door (width x height)..Automatic telescopic,
900x2100 mm, stainless steel wings
Cabin (width x length x height) 1100mm x 2100mm x 2300mm,
Sides of brushed stainless steel,
indirect overhead fluorescent
lighting, overload device, granite
floor, inox handle and a mirror at the rear side,
digital display of floor and direction indicator in
the cabin and at the main station, at the other
stations - further movement direction arrows
with sound signal for stopping, ventilator,
interphone connection between reception,
machine room and the cabin, ventilator,
emergency lighting, cabin control board with a
key for priority ride, device for bringing the
cabin to the nearest station in case of power cut
of,
Dimensions of shaft (width x height) 1800x3000 mm, bricklayer plastered
Shaft pit.................Depth 1400 mm,

2007

Page 128 of 240

Distance between the last stations

floor to the top of the shaft ................3600 mm,
3.2.2.

One elevator with the new elevator shaft in the part next to the entrance from enoina St. Shaft is
made of steel profiles covered with panels made of steel zinc-coated sheet metal, coated with
plastic, with polyurethane filling (self-extinctive). Elevator has a stations from ground floor to the
third floor and has the following characteristics:
Capacity ..800 kg/10 persons,
Speed ..1 m/s,
Number of stations/entrances 4 on the same side,
Elevation height .14m,
Control.. ...............Simplex, collecting in both directions
Drive type .. ....Asynchronous, frequency-regulated
Engine, no reducer,
Electricity connection ..3x380V/220V - 50 Hz,
Machine room ......no machine room,
Cabin door (width x height)..Automatic central,
900x2100 mm, wings of stainless
steel with infrared screen, frequencyregulated,
Shaft door (width x height). Automatic central, 900x2100 mm
wings of stainless steel,
Cabin (width x length x height)..1350mm x 1400mm x 2300mm,
Sides of brushed stainless steel, indirect
overhead fluorescent lighting, overload device,
granite floor, chromium-coated handle, cabin
control board with a key for priority ride,
overload device, digital display of floor
indication in the cabin and main station,
direction indicator at all stations with sound
signal for stopping, ventilator, interphone
connection between cabin and reception,
emergency lighting, device for bringing the
cabin to the nearest station in case of power cut
of,
Dimensions of shaft (width x height).....2000x1900 mm
Shaft pit ...............1400 mm,
Distance between the last station
floor to the top of the shaft ............... 3600 mm,

3.2.3

Vertical elevating platforms for persons in wheel chairs, for lifting from the level of the enoina
St. up to the level of the tambour, with minimum platform dimensions 1400 x 800 mm, minimum
capacity 350 kg. (Vimec A20 EP or similar)

3.2.4

Platforms for persons in wheel chairs, movable along the slope, from the tambour level (next to
the enoina St. Entrance) up to the ground floor level 830 x 700 mm, minimum capacity 200 kg.
(Vimec V64 or similar)

4.

SURFACE BREAKDOWN

4.1.
Basement
Common rooms in the basements are:
102,00 m2

- Boiler Room

2007

Page 129 of 240

- Sub-station

21,00 m2

- Generator

20,60 m2

- Hydroflex

15,20 m2
105,90 m2

- Rooms for technical staff and store

- Room for evidence material

16,00 m2

- Toilets for staff

28,30 m2

- Rooms for security staff

21,60 m2

- Corridor

434,40 m2

The rooms used by the Municipal Court:

197,60 m2

- Archive

35,20 m2

- Registry room
The rooms used by the Canton Court:

225,90 m2

- Archive

1.223,70 m2

Total Basement:

4.2.
Ground Floor
Common space and public space:
- Two large court rooms with anterooms, rooms for judges and witnesses

476,50 m2

- Multifunctional hall

41,28 m2

- Mail reception and delivery

40,70 m2

- Room for document verification

36,88 m2

- Mail boxes for lawyers

21,74 m2

- Information desk

9,26 m2

- Copy room

9,23 m2

- Newspaper shop

10,57 m2

- Smoking rooms

32,77 m2

- Rooms for security staff and video surveillance

22,88 m2

- Server rooms (in the Annex)

49,68 m2
9,04 m2

- Store rooms

34,00 m2

- Toilets for visitors

2007

Page 130 of 240

31,28 m2

- Toilets for staff

5,30 m2

- Toilets for persons in a wheel chairs

- Aula, corridors, tambours and new stairways

1.084,38 m2

Space used by the Municipal Court:

- Registry office with the main room

306,46 m2

- Offices for non-litigation department

120,77 m2

- Multifunctional space and registry room and archive (in the

Annex)

120,83 m2

- Room for acceptance of apprehended persons

16,58 m2

Space used by the Cantonal Court:

101,48 m2

- Registry room with the main room

2.581,61 m2

Total Ground Floor:

4.3.
Floor I
Common space and public space:
510,70 m2

- 10 (ten) court rooms

- Mediation room

78,60 m2

- Information desk

10,00 m2

- Telephone operator room

12,40 m2

- Store room

11,10 m2

- Tea kitchen

9,40 m2
39,70 m2

- Toilets for visitors and staff

896,20 m2

- Corridor
Space used by the Cantonal Court:
- Office of the Cantonal Court President consisting of the rooms for the Court
President, Presidents Secretary, Secretary of the Court and journalists
- 21 (twenty-one) offices for the judges + 3 (three) offices for the judges in the
Annex

107,40 m2

- 4 (four) administration offices in the Annex

106,20 m2

498,90 m2

- 4 (four) offices for experts in the Annex

89,60 m2

- 2 (two) offices for reserve judges

34,60 m2

- 2 (two) offices for judicial trainees

33,00 m2

2007

Page 131 of 240

2.437,80 m2

Total Floor I:

4.4.
Floor II
Common space consisting of:
- Meeting room

84,90 m2

- Store room

10,20 m2

- Room for auxiliary staff

26,30 m2

- Tea kitchen

10,70 m2

- Toilets for staff

32,20 m2
636,50 m2

- Corridor

36,40 m2

- Safe rooms
Space used by the Cantonal Court:

121,40 m2

- 6 (six) offices for judges

61,55 m2

- 4 (four) offices for administration

Space used by the Municipal Court:
- Office of the Municipal Court President consisting of the rooms for Court
President, Presidents Secretary, Secretary of the Court and journalists
- 28 (twenty-eight) offices for the judges (Criminal Law Department and
Business Law Department)

110,61 m2
548,85 m2

- 3 (three) Business Registration Department Offices

72,00 m2

- 4 (four) offices for experts

68,25 m2
1.819,86 m2

Total Floor II:

4.5.
Floor III
In the part of third floor, there is common space, consisting of:
- Store rooms

22,90 m2

- Tea kitchen

9,40 m2
32,20 m2

- Toilets for staff

664,00 m2

- Corridors
Space used by the Municipal Court:
- 46 (forty six) offices for the judges of Litigation Department

1.648,90 m2

Floor III:

2007

920,40 m2

Page 132 of 240

4.6.
Attic
Common space, consisting of:
- Library, reading room and internet

132,40 m2

- Courier room

58,00 m2

- Typists

68,40 m2

- Restaurant with kitchen

183,60 m2

- Store room

16,80 m2

- Room for auxilliary staff

18,40 m2

- Tea kitchen

12,95 m2

- Toilets for staff

33,05 m2

- Corridor

511,00 m2

The rooms used by the Municipal Court:

- 25 (twenty-five) offices for judges Executive Department

556,78 m2

- 2 (two) rooms for court bailiffs

145,60 m2

- 2 (two) rooms for Executive Dpt. Registry office

102,30 m2

- 2 (two) offices for Supply Department

78,20 m2

- 2 (two) administration office

36,70 m2

- 3 (three) offices for Financial Department

47,80 m2
2.002,00 m2

Total Attic:
Remark: The surface does not include existing stairways.

11.713,87 m2

TOTAL SURFACE:

Part of the total surface which does not change the purpose:

11.125,87 m2

Part of the total surface which changes the purpose (loft, library,
reading- room and internet-room, restaurant):

588,00 m2

DESIGN OF VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS

With drafting of the Main design of reconstruction and renewal of Municipal and Cantonal Courts in
Sarajevo, and because of its comlexity, it is necessary to draft design of visual communication. The aim is
to enable a visitor better orientation, movement in the space.

2007

Page 133 of 240

CENTRAL WALL INFORMATION BOARD

The central wall information board provides complete information to a visitor of the building and it is
fitted on entrance in the building.
In wind screen it is included two info-placards placed on column on left and right side of entrance door.
Dimension of placards is 1.50 x 1.00 m, placed between two antireflexive lamistal glasses, dim. 1.60 x
1.10 m, fixed on the wall with joints.
The placards provide general view of functional scheme per horizontal ( per floors), and represent
preamble information for a visitor.
FREESTANDING LIGHTING BOX TOTEM DISPLAY
The totem display is placed in entrance hall in the ground floor, by second right column near info-desk
and vertical communications.
Dimension is 1.00 x 2.00 m. It is made by box sections of anodized aluminium in natural colour,
thickness 15 cm, plexiglass and neon lamps fitted inside of the totem. Its base is of concrete lined by
aluminium , height 30 cm and lenght 80 cm. It should be done anchoring to the floor. In the totem display
is placed info-placard with plan of the ground floor indicating more specified functional scheme of room
disposition. It is printed on special vinil foil light permeable.
FLOOR WALL INFORMATION BOARD
Floor wall information board provides complet information about the floor on which is fitted. The board
is fitted near exit from elevator or from main stairs. Dimension of the placard inside of information board
is 100 x 70 cm, between two antireflexive lamistal glasses dim. 110 x 80 and fixed on the wall with joints.
NOTICE BOARDS
The notice board is made by box sections of anodized aluminium, antireflexive glass, the back of
aluminium lined by cork and lock with lock-up.
Dimension is 100 x 70 cm and it is fixed on the wall with joints. On each floor it is included two notice
boards, except in the basement, where is included one notice board.
NAMEPLATES OF INDICATION OF ROOMS
Nameplates of indication of rooms provide complete, quality and permanent information for one room.
Besides, they allow easy and prompt change because they are made from portable anodized aluminium
profile and where is put printed inscription protected by plastic transparent foil.
Nameplates have two dimensions : 22,2 x 30 cm and 15 x 20 cm.
They are fixed with screw on the wall to the right of door, in height of 1,50 m.
PICTOGRAMS AND WALL DIRECTION POSTS
Pictograms are elements of visual communication that give us, with help of symbols, precise and
unequivocal information. Wall direction posts are used as additional indication on the way between
information boards and rooms.
Pictograms, as well as wall direction posts are made of anodized aluminium , thickness 3,0 mm, naturale
colour, engraving with program CNC machine and colouring of engraved text in black or red colour.
They are fitted on the wall with two screws for fixing.
There are several dimensions:
15 x 15 cm
30 x 10 cm
30 x 15 cm
30 x 30 cm
HANGING PICTOGRAMS
Hanging pictograms are hung on cables and give possibility of signalization in space from further
distance. They are made of anodized aluminium, both sides in natural colour. Over sheet is fitted plastic
label of pictogram. This method is flexible, and it is possible simple change of pictogram if it is
necessary.
Hanging pictograms have several dimensions:
30 x 30 cm
2007

Page 134 of 240

90 x 30 cm
120 x 30 cm

TECHNICAL REPORT - RCC STRUCTURE

INTRODUCTION
Design of reconstruction and repair of the Cantonal and Municipal Court in Sarajevo has been developed
on a base of Investor's requirements for more functional and modern working conditions of judicial
prosecution authorities.

DESCRIPTION OF THE STRUCTURE

Structural part concrete structure contains six structural entities. Technical characteristics, work
performance and other important details will be developed separately for each structural entity.

1.

ATTIC REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURE

Attic concrete structure is a support for new-designed steel frame girders. The closest attention is to be
paid to construction of floor concrete beam, which will be a support for the columns of a bigger frame
and to steel ceiling girders at the elevation 18,81m. This girder has to be well connected to the existing
horizontal string courses on the faade support wall. Due to requirements by urban planers and architects,
the existing ring has been retained undamaged. Therefore, it has been adopted the variant of the frames,
laying on a 25cm-wide concrete beam, that is widening to a dimensions of 40/40 cm on the place of
supporting. As for the existing faade ring, prior construction of the supporting concrete beam and during
that construction, it is necessary to conduct a strict control of the faade ring, in terms of both quality of
the existing material and stability.
Since, due to a changed geometry, stability of the existing ring can be dangerously damaged and
considering the fact that the works are performed on higher elevations, a supervising body has to conduct
a close control of the work performance.
In case that even a minor sign of damage occurs on the ring, that can endanger its local or global stability,
it is compulsory to repair the existing ring or to construct the new one. The decision on the better variant
shall be made jointly by Supervisor and Investor.
The beam is to be connected to the old structure by mean of the anchors in the holes at every 70 cm.
Depth of anchor placement is to be minimum 25 cm. The anchors are to be connected with a new
reinforcement of the beam. Before concreting, the hole is to be filled up with a mixture of cement mortar
and epoxies resin.
In order to obtain longitudinal structure stability, ending fields are structurally designed as a rigid
concrete frame.
Other attic beams are string courses constructed on the supporting wall after its designed shape is formed.
This form is to be obtained either by adjustment of the existing wall or by building of the new wall. It is
irrelevant which variant will be adopted and it depends only on situation on the spot.

CONCRETE STAIRWAY
In order to establish a vertical communication between the basement archive space and office space
located on the floor, concrete staircases have been designed. Structurally, the most favourable solution
was to make an opening in the slab between the two adjoining supporting walls. Since we dont know,
what is the kind of the existing ceiling; it is necessary to contact the Designer when the opening making
starts in order to reconfirm location of the opening and reconstruction of the existing slab, if necessary.
Details of connections of the new and old structure are given in the formwork plans.
2007

Page 135 of 240

FOOTBRIDGE
For realization of a horizontal communication between the two structural entities, a footbridge has been
designed. Reinforced concrete footbridge ceiling is supported by the beams that are placed in the existing
supporting wall. Detail of connections of the new beam and the old wall is given in the formwork plan.

ELEVATOR FOUNDATION
An elevator structure foundation is necessarily solved as a reinforced concrete box. Box bottom is
founded on the elevation of the existing building foundations. Based on the existing backgrounds, the
bottom of the box will be dug into the existing ground for app. 1.5 m. Structural dimensions are
determined for structural reasons and they can be seen in the formwork plans.

STATIC AND DYNAMIC CALCULATION

Static calculation has been performed in accordance with the applicable regulations for building designing
(Book of regulations on technical norms for construction of buildings in seismic areas, JUS U.C7.121).
Calculation was performed for the following impacts:
o

permanent load (own weight)

movable load (depending on the structural element)

impact of wind, JUS U.C7.110, JUS U.C7.111, JUS U.C7.112, JUS U.C7.113

impact of snow s=1.25 kN/m2

seismic load

Specific loads have been combined with the specific safety coeficienTs, according to the regulations:
=1.60 for permanent load
=1.80 for movable load
=1.30 for seismic load
Loads have been combined according to the regulations: with the specific safety coefficients: I = 1.60 x
permanent + 1.80 x movable
II = 1.30 x permanent + 1.50 x movable + 1.30 x seismic
Dimensioning has been done based on a maximum load combination. Calculation was done by the
computer. Static and dynamic calculation of the whole building has been done by the method of definite
elements, using the TOWER program.

MATERIAL FOR THE STRUCTURE

CONCRETE
Concrete grade 30 concrete strength after 28 dys
Protective layer 2 cm Portland cement 350 kg/m3 with maximum aggregate grain 20 mm
V/C=0.45
REINFORCEMENT
Reinforcing fabric MAR 500/560
Reinforcement bars RA 400/500

2007

Page 136 of 240

CLOSING REMARKS
1.

Quality of material and works is to be entirely in accordance with the applicable regulations and
standards for specific items and works.

2.

All possible modifications necessary or suggested are to be approved in advance by the Supervisor.

DESCRIPTION OF STEEL STRUCTURE

Structural part - steel structure contains six structural entities. Technical characteristics, work
performance and other important details will be developed separately for each structural entity.
1. ATTIC FRAME STRUCTURE
In order to obtain more functional space in one part of the building, the existing roof is to be removed and
a new roof structure, of a smaller slope, is being constructed. Decision on selection of steel two-joint
frame girders for a supporting system was dictated by the following structural conditions:
Simple mounting with least number of structural joints and connections made on the spot.
Prefabricated structure, produced in the factory is delivered and lifted up with a crane and fixed on
previously prepared bearings.
Steel girders are lighter than alternative concrete structures for this span. It is particularly
important for balance between the weights that are removed from the existing building and the weights
of the structures to be added to the existing one.
Before frame placement, anchors are to be levelled by mean of the third nut. Girders are to be placed and
fill the space between the steel plate and a concrete beam with leveling mixture. After mounting of
frames, roof bracings and horizontal roof and facade girders, exact positions of wooden purlins can be
determined. After fixing their position (distance and position is given in the architectural design), steel
sections are to be welded to the main girder in order to obtain connection of purlins to the steel girder.
Dimensions of this steel girder are determined based on recommended deflection of the main girders
supporting structure of gypsum suspended ceiling.
Static system of the smaller span main girder is different for left and right part of the reconstructed
building. In the part A (right part of the building), the girder is supported by the existing concrete beam
and its static system is two-joint frame. In the part (left part of the building), the main girder has a
simple girder static system. The girder is connected to the existing concrete columns using hilt'or
similar expansion screws.
This simple way of connection could not be used in the part A, since main girder axis could not be match
the axis of the existing columns, due to passing over the chimneys. In the part B, this problem with
chimneys did not occur, so we could use the existing concrete columns as a supports for the main roof
girders.
In some parts of the building, there are not existing suitable structures for supporting of new-designed
frames. This problem is solved by inserting new steel beams which are going to provide well
supporting of frame columns. These beams are supported by the existing supporting walls.
For securing a lateral stability of the main girders and taking over of longitudinal forces in a roof
plane, bracing in a roof plane has been designed. Since wooden putlins can't be treated as horizontals
of that bracing (that would be possible for steel purlins), we had to add a steel horizontals. Roof
bracing is designed to be with crossed diagonals.

2. STEP IRONS, PLATFORMS

2007

Page 137 of 240

For access to roof, designed are steel step irons with steel platforms. Manufactured step irons will be
delivered to the site ready to be mounted on the existing structure in a simple way. Same applies to the
platform structures.

3. FLOOR AT THE ELEVATION 18,570

By changing the roof pitch, previously unused space will be used as internet room and a library, office
space and a restaurant. In one part of the attic, before reconstruction, there was an office space with small
archive. The main design defines such purpose for this part of the attic. On a basis of the aforementioned, the existing attic floor has been designed to stand the maximum load of 200 kg/m2, according
to the regulations for office space.
For new-designed rooms whose prescribed maximum load does not exceed 200 kg/m2, the existing floor
is not to be strengthened. It applies to the new offices, restaurant, dining room and a toilet.
By regulations, internet room and library must be calculated with load of minimum 300 kg/m2. That
requirement conditioned strengthening of the existing floor or construction of the independent one, which
is to transfer total load to the supporting walls.
Due to impossibility of thorough access to the existing floor, the designer chose the second variant:
establishment of independent supporting structure, above the existing floor.
To enable faster and easier placement and transportation, the designer chose steel girders for a supporting
structure of the new-established floor.
Girders are placed higher than the existing floor for 3,00 cm, which is a value obtained by calculation of
vertical deflection for maximum load of the new floor.
One girder end is welded to the steel plates, anchored into the new concrete beam. For easier fixing of
new girders, while welding on the anchor plate, predicted a sections supports for girders.
The other end of the girder is placed on a concrete base, 3 cm thick, that is set over the existing
supporting wall.
At this end, after floor girders are mounted, the space between the girders is to be poured with concrete.
In that way, a concrete beam is formed, serving both as girder connection and as a step.
After girders are placed and concrete beam is hardened, floor layers can be placed. A type of 2.5 cm-thick
pressed wooden plates is placed over the steel girders. Over these boards, a dry Knauf base is laid and
than comes a parquet in glue. Details of floor layers and their connections with the steel structure are
given in architectural design.

4. FLOOR AT THE ELEVATION 0,163

Due to a changed use of the space, from office to archive, and load increase for 150%, it would be
necessary to undertake necessary structural measures for strengthening of the existing structure so it is
enabled to take over this new-designed load.
From identical reasons like in case of the attic floor structure, the designer has chosen an independent
structure of steel sections which is to take over entire load of the floor to the supporting walls.
If there are problems while bringing 4 m long steel sections, the contractor can chose the option of the
girder length 1m+3m. These parts are to be welded to each other, using butt joint, after being placed on
the place designed.
While girder mounting, it is necessary to take account of working in chess order, by the drawing of steel
girders. Right and left parts of the annex are to be done first, and than, after filling up the niches in the
wall, works on the middle part are to be started. The contractor must take care of careful and proper
filling up of the niches with the concrete for filling up, after girders are placed.

2007

Page 138 of 240

After girders are placed and concrete in niches is hardened, floor layers can be placed, identically as the
previously described layers on the floor elevation 18,88. The only difference is the final layer; in this case
it is a PVC floor. Details of floor layers are given in architectural design.

5. STEEL STAIRWAY
In order to establish a vertical communication between the archive and the offices on the floor, a steel
stairway has been designed. For easier mounting, transportation of smaller weight, simpler connection to
the existing floor, a steel stairway solution is selected.
At the stairway opening positioning in the existing floor, the designer was limited by position of beams
in the floor. The most favorable structural solution was making the opening in the slab between the two
adjoining beams. Since we don't know, what is the kind of the existing ceiling; it is necessary to
contact the Designer when the opening making starts in order to reconfirm location of the opening and
reconstruction of the existing slab, if necessary.

6. ELEVATOR
Reasons for the designer to adopt a steel elevator structure were simpler mounting, lighter structure and
less works on the site.
In order to, as much as possible, release the foundation, steel structure of the elevator shaft is fixed to the
horizontal string course on each floor. This has a positive static impact on both foundation dimensions
and on the dimensions of the elevator shaft steel structure.
Designer's suggestion is that the elevator structure is transported in segments of the length identical to the
floor heights of the existing building. After the elevator segment is placed and fastened to the existing
floor structure, the next segment can be placed and welded to the previous one.
Control of the structure verticality is to be done for each segment. If possible, each stage of the structure
mounted is to be assessed in terms of geometry. That is important because of low tolerance of the elevator
shaft structure in terms of verticality deviation.
At the time of design completion, neither the type of the elevator to be installed nor the way of cabin
cable hanging on the main beam on the top of the elevator was known. Therefore, that detail will be
definitely solved after a supplier of elevator is chosen.
Before mounting of the final elevator segment and closing of the elevator structure, it is recommended to
contact the designer in order to figure out the best solution adjusted to the producer's requirements for
hanging of the elevator cabin.

CALCULATIONS AND IMPACT ANALYSIS

Static calculation has been performed in accordance with the applicable regulations for building
designing.
Calculation was performed for the following impacts:
- Permanent load, according to the weight from tables, and producer's catalogues
- Variable load-snow, by experience 1,25kN/m2 -Wind
load, by JUS. U. C7.100 to 113, 1991
- Temperature changes 30 C
- Seismic load (Book of regulations on technical norms for construction of buildings in seismic areas,
JUS U.C7.121).
Structures of the building have been dimensioned for:
I

BASIC LOADS
- Permanent

2007

Page 139 of 240

- Snow
- Wind
II

ADDITIONAL LOAD
- Temperature
- Seismic

Allowed stress for steel .0361.

- Base material and screws by JUS U.E7.145/1987
- welded connections by JUS U.E7.150/1987
Calculation has been done mostly with a computer. TOWER program has been used, calculating by the
method of definite elements. Results of static calculation were presented in diagrams and after that,
specific structural elements have been dimensioned.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION POWER ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

1. BASIC DATA
Main Design of power electrical installations for reconstruction and sanation of Municipal and Cantonal
court in Sarajevo is made on:
-

Project task
Evaluation of existing condition
Existing design documentation
Layout from designers of other installations
Equipment data
Code and Regulations
Investors special request

As a layout for making of Main design layout from Arhitectural, Hydro and Mechanical design were used
in scale 1:100.
The building which is the design subject consists: basement + ground floor + I-III floor + attic. The
design treats the part of building used by Municipal and Cantonal Court on all mentioned floors.
Main Design of electrical installation for power distribution consists of:
-

Building power supply system (network, generator )

Cable distribution
Distribution boards
Installation of indoor and emergency lighting
Installation of sockets and technological connections
Diesel electrical generator
Equipotential bonding
Lightning installation and earthing system

DISMANTLING OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL

During the evaluation of existing situation and requests of the Investor it was concluded that it is
necessary to carefully dismantle of existing equipment and material in areas marked on attached
drawings.
Dismantled equipment and material must be examined and tested to determine what can be reused and
what should be transported to depot.
All dismantled equipment and material which can be used, with hand-over documentation must be
submitted to the Investor.

2007

Page 140 of 240

2. POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS

Total installed load supplied by diesel electrical generator(GRT/N) is Pist.GRT/N = 360 kW, with demand
factor fi = 0,4 maximum power requirement is:
Pmax. GRT/N = Pinst. GRT/N x fi = 360 x 0,4 = 144 kW
Pmax. GRT/N = 144 kW
Total installed load supplied by network is Pist.GRT = 915 kW, with demand factor fi = 0,35 maximum
power requirement is:
Pmax. GRT = Pinst. GRT x fi = 915 x 0,35 = 320 kW
Pmax. GRT = 320 kW
Total installed load supplied from distribution board GRT/M(ROZ) is Pist.GRT/M = 700 kW, with demand
factor fi = 0,55 maximum power requirement is:
Pmax. GRT/M = Pinst. GRT/M x fi = 700 x 0,55 = 385 kW
Pmax. GRT/M = 385 kW
3. PROTECTION
The following protections are foreseen in design:
- protection from electrical shock, using distribution system TN-S
- protection of all circuits from short circuit currents with fuses and mcbs
- protection from atmospheric dishcarge using lightning system protection
4. POWER SUPPLY
Outdoor and indoor LV power supply connection on electrical network are not the subject of this
design, and they have to be done by local electricity authorities (Elektrodistribucija).
Investor must provide the power supply permition for the connection of the building on the
electrical network. Permition will be issued by local electricity authorities (Elektrodistribucija
Sarajevo).
The detailed power connection and power measuring conditions including eventual power supply
changes will be defined in above mentioned permition.
Power supply of Municipal and Cantonal court will be done from main distribution board(DB) GRT
consists from network section GRT and diesel generator section GRT/N.
The existing DB GRT and GRT/N have to be changed with new one. Before the production of DB it is
necessary to examine the existing disposition of equipment on site considering the connection of existing
cables on new equipment.
Main DB is supplied from board GRT/M. GRT/M is supplied from existing DB ROZ with cable 3xPP00
4x150mm2.
The vice-chancellor office, faculty of law, boiler room and printing office are supplied from GRT/M.
Power loads balance for the mentioned buildings are assumed according to the existing current measuring
transformers. Power load balance does not include electrical heating.
Considering the technical calculations and rising of maximum power load for the building, the existing
power supply cables 3xPP00 4x150mm2 satisfy the needs of Building.
In main distribution board GRT/M, the measuring current transformers have to be changed according to
attached single line diagram and considering the conditions in permition issued by local electricity
authorities (Elektrodistribucija).
Kitchen technology and electrical design for kitchen are not the subject of this design.

2007

Page 141 of 240

For the power supply of DB RT-KUH it is predicted the power supply cable to be laid to the place of DB
mounting.
After the installation of kitchen equipment, the Investor must require the power supply permition from
local electricity authorities (Elektrodistribucija).
In case of power failure from normal network the power supply of important consumers will be provided
by diesel electrical generator 200kVA container type, with automatic start, install in the yard of faculty of
law.
All outgoing cables for floor DB are secured with compact circuit breakers with thermal and over current
protection installed in DB GRT/M,GRT and GRT/N.
Power supply of floor DB RT-P7,RT-I7,RT-I8,RT-IV1...RT-IV5 and RT-KUH will be done with cables
pulled in horizontal laying routes through the basement and attic and vertical laying routes on scale cable
shelves through the stairway.
All cables have been chosen according to the current load, laying conditions and drop voltage. Type and
dimension of power supply cables are shown on single line diagrams and calculation lists.
5. FLOOR DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
Examining the existing situation on the site, it is concluded that all floor distribution boards in basement,
ground floor, I floor, II floor and III floor are reconstructed. Considering the costumer request the old DB
RT-KOT will be changed with new one.
In the area called Annex in ground floor and I floor the new DB with sign RT-P7,RT-I7 and RT-I8 will be
installed.
The new DB RT-IV1...RT-IV5 and RT-KLIMA will be installed in attic. In already reconstructed DB a
new equipment will be installed according to attached single line diagrams and scope of works.
All existing and new designed DB consist two separate parts of busbars:
-

normal network busbars supplied from from network busbars of DB GRT

emergency(diesel generator) busbars supplied from emergency busbars of DB GRT/N

New DB are made as tin case from steel sheet 2mm thickness, with protection not lower than IP44.
Boards will be manufactured as multi part sections(normal part and emergency part) according to
attached single line diagrams.
All DB are equipped with typical locks with key, signs, warning signs, single line diagrams, manuals and
factory test reports.
Design predicts and 20% of spare part for eventual adding of new equipment.
Considering the designed TN-S protection system, DB consist the system of 5 busbars.
The neutral and earthing busbars are not connected in floor DB. Connection of this two busbars is done
only in main DB.
The power supply cables will be pulled for each new DB. The cable distribution is visible in attached
block scheme of power supply cables.
6. CABLE LAYING ROUTES
To ensure simple and reliable cable layout, cable laying routes are defined and mounting of cable shelves,
PVC conduits, floor boxes and parapet channel is foreseen.
Cable shelves (perforated cable shelves PNK) are to be mounted in false ceiling, in zones of high cable
concentration and above distribution boards.
Dual PVC parapet channel, dimensions 160x65mm, is to be mounted below parapet wall and partially on
walls and enables simple and flexible distribution of cables and functional organizing of working places.
One compartment of channel is dedicated for power supply and the other one for communications.

2007

Page 142 of 240

Before parapet channel installation it is necessary that Contractor, together with Architect and Investor,
defines exact requirements for each working space.
During cable shelves, floor box and parapet channel installation it is necessary to ensure good galvanic
connection between elements.
7. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
Installation in the building (from distribution panels to the individual loads) is to be done with installation
cables PP-Y. Cable are to be laid in previously prepared cable runs
(in cable shelves, PVC conduits and parapet channels). As an exception, cables are to be laid under
plaster or surface mounted on cable clips. Each cable must have blue and yellow-green core. Blue core is
to be used as neutral conductor and yellow-green as protective conductor. On every 10-15 meters of cable
run, and on every floor slab passing, it is necessary to protect cables from fire with poring of fire
protective foam.
All cable joints are to be maid in junction boxes and splicing of cables is not allowed.
All junction boxes are to be mounted below false ceiling so they are accessible after installation. In toilets
all installation material must be waterproof.
8. INSTALLATION OF INTERNAL AND EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Internal lighting design is done with respect to room purpose and furniture layout. Lighting is designed in
accordance to code and regulations and manufacturers recommendations for type and intensity of lighting
for this kind of buildings. According to photometric demands and calculations for every space a proper
type of lighting fixture (luminaries) is chosen.
Every lighting point is marked with its sign and circuit as indicated on enclosed drawings.
Lighting fixtures selection is fully coordinated with Architect to meet esthetical requirements.
Types and way of mounting of lighting fixtures(luminaries) are indicated on enclosed drawings.
Portion of lighting installation (30%) is supplied from generator busbars of new DB, so in case of power
failure this portion continues to work normally supplied from generator.
In office areas with existing lighting installation supplied from normal network busbars design predicts
additional lighting using the standing luminaries supplied from generator busbars.
Lighting installation in basement is surface mounted on the wall and in other areas it is flush mounted or
in false ceiling, done with installation cables PP-Y (3-5)x1,5(2,5)mm2.
In courtrooms in ground floor lighting fixtures(luminaries) are controlled via switches installed on control
signal panels ST-1 and ST-2.
Lighting control in the offices is locally via switches mounted by the entrance on 1,1m height.
Lighting control in toilets will be done locally via movement detectors.
Besides general lighting in the building, emergency lighting is foreseen, with lighting fixtures with local
power supply (Ni-Cd battery), 3 hours autonomy.
In case of network-generator power outage, fixture is automatically turning on supplied from the battery.
When mains restore, fixture is turning off and battery is loading from inbuilt rectifier.
This fixtures(luminaries) are mounted on corridors and exits, and are directed to show safe exit from the
building.
Complete installation of emergency lighting is designed in accordance with project assignment and
requests for this type of building, all in accordance with code and regulations for this type of installation.
Complete installation of emergency lighting is to be done with installation cables

2007

Page 143 of 240

PP-Y 3x1,5 mm2. Emergency lighting fixtures are mounted in the building as indicated on enclosed
drawings.
9. INSTALLATION MATERIAL
All designed equipment (installation material, sockets, pushbuttons) is highest quality and fully
compatible with space assignment and esthetical requirements.
For control of electrical equipment adequate number of control units (one way, two way and intermediate
switches, pushbuttons, control panels) is foreseen and they are mounted on optimal positions.
For connection of portable loads adequate number of sockets is foreseen, as indicated on drawings.
For one working place is foreseen:
o
o

One socket supplied from generator busbars of existing DB

Two sockets supplied from network busbars of existing DB

For two working places are foreseen:

o
o

One socket supplied from generator busbars of existing DB

Four sockets supplied from network busbars of existing DB

For sockets supplied from new DB for each working place is foreseen:
o
o

Two sockets supplied from generator busbars

Two sockets supplied from network busbars

Sockets are foreseen to be mounted in dual parapet channel, floor boxes and flush mounted. In basement
sockets will be surface mounted.
Installation cables are to be mount in parapet channel, flush and surface mounted, in perforated cable
shelves and false ceiling.
Three phase and one phase cable outlets are to be finished in fixed cable outlet box.
One phase sockets are to be supllied via installation cable PP-Y 3x2,5 mm2, and three phase cable outlets
with installation cable PP-Y 5x2,5 mm2.
10. PROTECTION FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK AND EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING
Protection from electric shock is executed with application of TN-S distribution system in whole building.
For that purpose third, fifth core is foreseen as non-load conductor that is connected to protective busbar
in distribution board. Colour of that core is yellow-green. Protective busbar in each distribution panel is
connected via protective conductor and from main distribution panel to the grounding system.
For connection of protective busbar with grounding system, by the vertical raisers cables of PP-Y or
PP00-Y type are laid.
In the toilets all metal parts not belonging to electrical installation (metal bath tub, drainage pipe, water
pipes, heating pipes and other metal parts in the toilets) are firmly interconnected.
This is executed in following manner:
From distribution panel installation conductor P/F 1x10 mm in installation PVC conduit
fi 13,5 mm is laid to the toilet entrance where equipotential bonding box is installed with
6-7 terminal blocks. From this box installation conductor P/F 1x6 mm in installation PVC conduit fi 11
mm is laid in concrete to the metal bath tub, drainage pipes, water pipes, heating pipes, electric heater,
wash-stand, and other metal parts. For al enumerated metal part separate conductor from the box is to be
laid.
Start point of equipotential conductor is to be connected to protective busbar and all other endings are
connected to metal parts via copper clips and screws. Before clips installation metal part must be cleaned.

2007

Page 144 of 240

All metal parts then share same potential. Equipotential bonding box is to be mounted 0,4m above
finished floor.
11. DIESEL GENERATOR SETS
In case of network power outage for supply of priority load diesel generator set of rated power 200 kVA
container type with automatic start and high quality diesel engine and generator is foreseen. Generator
must had control panel with LCD of electronic, digital type, with following instruments and signalization:
- thermometer of engine temperature with contacts for engine shut-down in case of overheating.
- manometer for lubrication oil pressure with contacts for engine shut-down in case of low oil level.
- Audio and optical signalization of all deviations of crucial parameters of engine and generator.
- Indication of kW, kVA, kWh, kVAr, kVArh, cos, Hz, rpm, hourmeter, self diagnostic, controls auto
start / stop, emergency shutdown, optical indication.
Supplier of equipment is obligated to deliver:
- Control panel 400A for automatic start of diesel generator with complete metering and regulation
equipment (voltmeter, ampermeters, frequency meter).
- battery
- battery rectifier
- necessary quantity of engine oil
- necessary quantity of engine cooling liquid
- Daily fuel tank beneath generator with signalization levels and interlock (low and high level) with
generator interlock for level lower than permissible.
- Exhaust with flanges and silencer
- Signal, control and supply cables for interconnection of generator control panel and control panel
(cables are delivered by the generator supplier)
- Electrical pump for fuel refilling from season tank.
- Manual fuel pump in case of electrical pump failure
- Set of maintenance tool
- Spare parts for one year period in accordance to manufacturers recommendation.
Technical documentation
- Certificate that supplier is authorized by the manufacturer for generator service for B&H
- Certificate that in period of ten years supplier can provide spare parts and service
- Warranty for minimum one year period
- Set of documentation for installation and maintenance of diesel engine, maintenance of electric
generator, workshop drawings, electrical diagrams, attests, warranty sheets, manual for generator usage,
certificate of compatibility with safety regulations, factory attest for diesel engine, connection diagrams.
Diesel generator is to be mounted in yard of Faculty of law.
12. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS FOR HVAC
12.1 DISTRIBUTION BOARD RO-KLIMA
The free standing distribution board (DB) protection IP54 is foreseen for supplying and controling the
equipment of HVAC systems S1, S2 and S3, as well as the exhaust fans S4-S7. The DB dimensions are
2200x1400x250mm (HxWxD). It will be located in the attic hall. DB equipment will be built according to
the attached wiring diagram. Cable inlets are foreseen from the upper side of DB.
System S1 is aimed for airconditionig of the Courtrooms and is located in the loft area. It consists of
supply, exhaust section and mixing dampers section. The power consumption of supply fan (1M1) is
2,2kW, and power of the exhaust fan (1M2) is 1,5kW. Supply section also has a heater with 3-way
regulating valve and circulating pump (1M3) with power consumption of 0,1kW. Control of the system
S1 can be manual or automatic, depending on the position of the selection switch 1S0, mounted to the DB
door:

2007

Page 145 of 240

MANUAL (1): Control of the fans and circulating pump is performed directly from the DB by using ONOFF switches 1S1/1S2/1S3. In order to power-on these consumers, a certain conditions must be met,
according to the wiring logic.
OFF (0): System is switched off. Frost protection remain active.
AUTOMATIC (2): Control is performed via DDC controller XL50 located in the DB. The system is
running according to the time program which is adjustable. In this control mode, switches 1S1/1S2/1S3
have no function.
Condition for switching on the fans is the same in both manual and automatic mode and it is that frost
alarm mustnt be active (thermostat 1F1). In case of a frost alarm, heater valve opens 100% and
circulating pump powers on, irrespective of the position of the switches 1S0 and 1S3 (see wiring
diagram).
System S2 is aimed for airconditionig of Restaurant and Kitchen and is located in suspended ceiling in the
hall, just above the DB RO-KLIMA. It has only supply section. The power consumption of the supply fan
(2M1) is 2,2kW and the air extraction is performed by means of the exhaust roof fan (2M2) with power
consumption 1,1kW. Supply section also has a heater with 3-way regulating valve and circulating pump
(2M3) with power consumption of 0,1kW. Control of the system S2 can be manual or automatic,
depending on the position of the selection switch 2S0 in the same way as described for system S1. ONOFF switches for fans and pump in manual control mode are 2S1/2S2/2S3.
Conditions for switching on the fans are the same in both manual and automatic mode and they are that
frost alarm mustnt be active (thermostat 2F1) and fresh-air damper (2Y1) must be open. Damper actuator
is on/off type, with spring return and couple of end switches for signalization of damper openness. In
manual mode, it is necessary to open the damper before powering up fan, by using the switch 2S4 (0-1).
When the damper is open, the signal from end switches is transmitted and fan is released. Now, the switch
2S1 can be used. In automatic mode, switch 2S4 has no function and damper control is performed by
means of DDC controller. In case of frost alarm, damper closes and fan switches off. In the same time,
heater valve opens 100% and circulating pump powers on, irrespective of the position of the switches 2S0
and 2S3.
System S3 is aimed for airconditionig of the Library. It is located in suspended ceiling in the hall, cca 15
meters to the left from the DB RO-KLIMA. It has supply, exhaust section and mixing dampers section.
The power consumption of supply fan (3M1) is 2,2kW and power of the exhaust fan (3M2) is 1,1kW.
There is also a heater with 3-way regulating valve and circulating pump (3M3) with power consumption
of 0,1kW. Control of the system S3 can be manual or automatic, depending on the position of the
selection switch 3S0 in the same way as described for other systems. ON-OFF switches for fans and
pump in manual control mode are 3S1/3S2/3S3. Given that systems S1 and S3 have the same regulating
elements, the same notes apply to both.
In automatic mode, all control and regulating functions (for systems S1, S2 and S3) are performed by
means of two free programmable DDC controllers XL50, based on signals aquired from the field
(statuses, temperatures, pressure switches, etc.). Controllers have user-friendly operator displays and
keyboard. Switching of the equipment in automatic mode is performed via auxiliary relays 24Vac (1da1,
1da2, ...) that are activated by controllers digital outputs - DO. Temperature sensors located in supply,
return and fresh air ducts measure temperature and transmit the values to respective controller. Based on
aquired values as well as the type of regulation, controller drives the heater valve actuator and damper
actuators (mixing of fresh and return air in systems S1 and S3). System runs according to the time
program which can be readjusted by end-user. Other parameters, e.g. temperature setpoints can also be
modified if needed.
In normal operating conditions, selection switches 1S0/2S0/3S0 have to be always in position 2
(AUTOMATIC), while other switches (1S1-1S3, 2S1-2S3 i 3S1-3S3) have to be in position 0 (OFF).
System will start/stop according to the time program. Manual mode should be used only in case of
emergency or for testing purposes.
Exhaust roof fans (4M1, 5M1) and exhaust duct fans (6M1, 7M1) are also supplied and controlled from
the DB RO-KLIMA. All these fans are single phased with power consumptions of 0,55kW (4M1, 5M1)

2007

Page 146 of 240

and 0,1kW (6M1, 7M1). Control of these fans can be manual or automatic, depending on the position of
the selection switches 4S1/5S1/ 6S1/7S1, located on the DB door:
MANUAL (1): The fan runs without any additional conditions, except in case of the overload (thermal
protection activated)
OFF (0): The fan is switched off.
AUTOMATIC (2): The fan control is performed by means of DDC controller XL50.
The synoptic schemes with LED signalization are foreseen on the cabinet door. Fan and pump statuses,
pressure switch, damper and frost protection statuses will be directly visible on the cabinet door. In the
same time, all those statuses will be transmitted to DDC controllers for the purpose of local control and
signalization as well as the eventual connection to the future building management system (BMS).
Therefore, DDC controllers are supplied with C bus and LON bus interface.
12.2. CABLE INSTALLATION
A perforated cable shelves, PK200 mm are foreseen from the distribution board(DB)
RO-KLIMA towards systems S1, S2 and S3. Cable shelves will be mounted in suspended ceiling above
the DB and along the airconditioning sections. In the spaces between cable shelves and field equipment,
cables have to be laid in protective PVC pipes. For the system S1, located in the loft area, cable shelves
are foreseen through vertical installation shaft for air ducts. The same applies for the exhaust roof fans
where cables will be laid in protective PVC pipes.
Connection of three phase fans will be performed with cable PP00-Y 4x2,5 mm2 and for single phase fans
it will be cable PP00-Y 3x2,5 mm2. Connection of the field equipment (sensors, pressure switches,
damper and valve actuators) will be performed with cable IY(St)Y 2x2x0,8 mm.
Electrical installation in these areas are to be installed after completion of mechanical works, so it is
possible to make corrections on position of particular load. So it is possible to avoid changes on finished
installation. At the beginning of works it is necessary to check and make corrections on drawings to meet
changes in mechanical design and equipment, all in coordination with designers and supervisors for
electrical and mechanical installation.
13. LIGHTNING INSTALLATION AND EARTHING
Existing lightning installation on Building has been done on the principle of Faraday cage. The new
lightning installation will be done on the parts of the roof which are the subject of reconstruction. The
design predicts and performing the earthing for two lift plants and diesel generator.
The dismounting of the existing lightning installation have to be done first on the above mentioned parts
of the roof.
The galvanized tape Fe/Zn 20x3mm will be mounted on adequate tape holders on the roof as acceptance
line and connected with main vertical lines. Performing the connections and bypass connections of all
metal parts and constructions on the roof, gutter, chamfer etc have to be done. All connections have to be
done
with:
tape
Fe/Zn
20x3mm,screws,cross
elements
JUS.N.B4.936,gutter
clamps
JUS.N.B4.914,chamfer clamps JUS.N.B4.908 and screws 2xM8x18mm.All connection points have to be
protected with anticorrosive material.
Earthing of two lift plants and diesel generator will be done completely according to the technical
description and specification given in scope of works.
Design predicts and performing the functional testing of the installation, including the earth resistance
measuring done by authorised company and providing the test reports(protocol).
14. FIRE PROTECTION
To prevent fire expansion over power and communication cables it is necessary to take proper measures.

2007

Page 147 of 240

Fire is spreading because of cable insulation burning so fire protection measures must localize fire and
prevent further expansion.
Main distribution cables and feeders from distribution power and communication panels,, cable penetration
through fire zones and other cables are to be protected with special fire foam (type as PLAMAL-S or
similar), applied with spraying or with brush. All main cable runs laid in cable shelves and clips must be
treated every 10-15m with 1m wide zone.
Cables passing fireproof doors and penetrating from one fire zone to another must be protected from both
sides with 1m wide zone.
These measures are not taken for cables laid in concrete or flush mounted.
15. TESTING BEFORE START UP OF INSTALLATION
Before start up Contractor is obligated to perform testing of installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Testing and inspection of supplementary protection measures with protective conductor

Testing of equipotential bonding
Measuring of earthing system resistance with attest issuance
On each distribution board put ingraved plate with board nomenclature
Test all distribution boards and circuits
In every distribution board put single line diagram with indication of load on particular circuit
All changes and additions must be in single line diagrams before building commissioning
8. Contractor is obligated to submit attest documentation for all inbuilt material in the building

2007

Page 148 of 240

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION FEEBLE CURRENT INSTALLATION

1. IT INSTALLATION (TELEPHONE AND COMPUTER)
Existing IT System in building is foreseen that the installation will enable different types of network
organization. In order to satisfy the needs in the future, and considering the fact that this is the field with
very fast changes, the most important is:

To provide sufficient concentration of connection places

To accomplish rapid data transfer, to satisfy the standards, which will depend on active
network equipment in use.

The existing structural network concentration (computer and telephone) is placed in 10 existing 19
communication racks on different floors as follow:
rack R0-groundfloor, racks R1-R4-I floor, racks R5-R7-II floor and racks R8,R9-attic.Existing structural
IT installation is covering the ground floor, I-III floor and partly the attic. The new structural IT
installation will be done in basement, partly in attic, and in all other floors in rooms which are the subject
of reconstruction. New designed installation for basement and for the biggest part of attic will be finished
on communication racks R10(basement) and R11(attic).For the other parts of building the new structural
IT installation will be finished on existing communication racks. Existing IT structural network is
finished for 535 telephone and computer connections. This phase of reconstruction predicts performing
the new structural IT installation for 323 new telephone and computer connections. The primary
telephone and computer installation will be done with four pair UTP cables of category 5e, and using dual
network sockets RJ45,cat 5e with two connectors. One connector will be used for telephone and another
one for computer. The surface mounted dual network sockets RJ45,cat 5e will be installed in basement,
partly on the ground floor, I-III floor and partly on attic. Dual network sockets for the mount in floor box
should be installed partly on ground floor and partly on attic. In one part of ground floor the dual network
sockets mount in parapet channel have to be installed. Cables will be pulled from the communication
racks to the dual network sockets, partly in adequate flexible conduits in floor and flush mount and partly
into the cable shelves and PVC trunks. Two 4 pair UTP cables cat.5e will be pulled to each socket. Cables
will be conected on both ends(on the socket and in communication racks on patch panel). For the needs of
new designed installation it is necessary to provide and install 6 new 19,45U communication racks as
follow:
2 communication racks will be used for the concentration of existing and new designed equipment of
racks R0
and R3, one rack will be used for the concentration of new equipment in attic(R11) and 3
communication racks will be installed in TC room on first floor and they have to be used for installation
of main telephone distribution frames GRT1,GRT2 and telephone exchange. The dismounted
communication racks R0 and R3 will be used to mount equipment of racks R4 and R10.
We have to mention that in hole building the old telephone installation is still in function. The existing
structural telephone installation until now is not connected with telephone exchanges and is not in
function. The new design solution predicts the connection of pasive structural installation with new
designed telephone exchange by laying the cables IY-St-Y 100(50)x2x0,6mm from each communication
rack up to main telephone distribution frame GRT2 on first floor(TC room).Also the cable
IY-St-Y 100x2x0,6mm have to be pulled from main PTT distribution box up to main telephone
distribution frame GRT1 on first floor(TC room). New digital telephone exchange with capacity of up to
960 connections will satisfy the needs of costumers in hole building. Detailed specification for the
telephone exchange has been given in scope of works.
The main PTT connection in Building exists and has been done with cable type TK59 50x2x0,6mm,
and this is not the subject of this design.
2. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

2007

Page 149 of 240

Fire alarm system in Municipal and Cantonal Court already exists. More then 90% of areas are covered
by Fire Alarm system. According to design new fire alarm system will be done in the areas which are
going to be reconstructed. In control room on ground floor is already installed main fire alarm panel with
seven addressable detector loops. Already installed fire alarm equipment (detectors, alarm sounders, fire
panel, call points) are product of company Cerberus, so the same type of equipment will be used for these
phase of reconstruction. For the needs of new designed fire alarm equipment it is necessary to extend the
existing fire alarm panel with new elements specified in scope of works. According to the new room
disposition, it is necessary the existing fire detectors to be removed on the new positions. The system has
ability to assign addresses to every detector, supervision and inspection. All produced fire detectors have
got possibility of remote-control testing and local indication of operation.
Fire alarm system should been provided installing the cable IY(St)Y 2x2x0.8 (red colour). Cables should
be laid through adequate flexible PVC conduits, mostly in the wall and partly in cable shelves and PVC
trunk. Program of fire alarm panel has developed scenario of actions (necessary work in different status
of detectors) and the ability to automatic alarm in fire station in the case of absence of alarm cancel in the
programming team. It is provided that fire alarm system has sound alarming in the building, using
addressable alarm sounders with definition of activating from the exchange(panel). The existing number
of alarm sounders is deficient, so the new number of sounders will be installed on each floor in Building.
3. ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
The existing connection with the building named hotel on the first floor and official entrance in ground
floor will be putted in function of controlled connection, by installing the door with access control
system, using the card readers and ID cards.
This system provides the entrance in mentioned area just for the persons with authorised ID cards. System
will register all persons who are entering or going out, including the date and time memory, card number
and name of the card owner. System will provide printing of all necessary information. Card reader will
be connected on the controller. Controller through the converter will send the data on the central PC in
control centre on the ground floor. The installation of access control system has to be done with cables
specified in scope of works and on the drawings. Cables have to be laid in adequate flexible conduits
partly flush mounted and partly in PVC trunk.
Considering the fact that access control system with software already exists for the main entrance in
ground floor and it is a product of company Jantar, the new designed equipment have to be the product of
same company.
13 4. CCTV SYSTEM
The existing CCTV system, product of the German company Ever Focus is already completely covering
the outdoor perimeter of the Building and mostly the internal corridors inside the Building. Considering
the Investors requests, the new internal cameras product of the same company will be installed. The
concept of CCTV system is that cable concentration from all cameras have to be finished in CCTV
control room in the ground floor. Eleven (11) new cameras will be installed as follow:
4 cameras in basement, 2 cameras in ground floor, 1 camera on first floor and 4 cameras on attic.
CCTV system will use the internal colour cameras with high resolution 520 TVL, 0,5lux sensitivity,
equipped with 1/3 DC iris lens. The right camera positions will be defined in coordination with Investor.
The 16 channel digital video recorder for the proceeding of video signal will be installed in CCTV control
room. For the central monitoring two 19 LCD monitors will be installed in control room in ground
floor. CCTV cabling will be done with coaxial cable type RG 59 B/U, impedance 753 . Cable will be
laid mostly in PVC trunk and partly in cable shelves and flush mounted in adequate PVC flexible
conduits. Besides the coaxial cable, it is necessary for each camera to provide the power supply cable type
PP00-Y 3x1,5mm2 from belonging distribution board.

5. CALLING SYSTEM

2007

Page 150 of 240

The designed calling system gives possibility of independent call of party from each of predicted
courtroom. The calling system have to be installed in two big courtrooms (rooms nr.002,006) in ground
floor and seven courtrooms on first floor
(rooms nr.101-107). Calling system equipment for the each of above mentioned courtrooms consists the
following: 4 channel 100V amplifier with preamplifier, calling unit complete with system cable and
surface mounted speaker. Amplifier with preamplifier have to be installed inside the recording secretary
desk of each courtroom. The calling units will be installed on same desks. Adequate surface mounted
speakers 100V,20W will be installed on the wall in front area of each above mentioned courtrooms.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION OF THERMOTECHNICAL PLANTS

General
The main design of mechanical installations for reconstruction and renewal of municipal and cantonal
courts in Sarajevo has been carried out in accordance with the Terms of Reference and the valid norms
and standards for such type of installations.
The whole building being used nowdays is provided with installation featuring two-pipe radiator heating
with central distribution network laid down under the basement ceiling.
The building is the existing one with spaces for archives, technical spaces to accommodate the boiler
room, diesel generator, low voltage distribution board roomand similar in the basement, spaces for
registry, archives and courtrooms at the ground floor, court offices and courtrooms at the 1st, 2nd, and 3d
floors. Within the attic space, the judge offices and rooms for public gathering have been forseen. The
latter ones include the library, the reading room, internet, the restaurant and similar. At each floor the
communications and sanitary facilities have been anticipated.
For such a conceputalized building, the main design of thermotechnical installations has been prepared,
and all according to valid local, i.e. DIN standards, as well as in accordance with usual engineering
practice for these types of installations.
During the design preparation, it is necessary to use the following microclimatic conditions:
- external winter design temperature
- external winter relative humidity
- external summer design temperature
- external summer relative humidity
- air stream velocity
- the building lies in the III climatic zone
- the building is situated in line with others, being of shaft type

- 16 oC
90 %
33 oC
30 %
2 m/s

The design of thermotechnical plants has been prepared according to the architectural-civil design data
for the existing and reconstructed part of the building. For all elements of the structure, the overall
coefficients of heat transfer have been calculated according to the real values of the existing structure.
Calculations of the heat losses have been done according to DIN 4701 for the following internal design
temperatures:
- offices
- restaurant, reading room and internet space
- toilets
- halls

20 oC
20 oC

18 oC
16 oC

Calculations of the heat gains, for the rooms to be air conditioned, have been carried out according to
VDI 2078, and for the climatic conditions which are usual for the City area.

A. Radiator heating

2007

Page 151 of 240

The existing system of the central heating is the hot-water two-pipe system with central horizontal
distribution run under the basement ceiling, wherefrom the riser pipes are lifting up to the floors. The
existing heat emitting units are provided as the cast iron radiators with built-in radiator control valves.
During the stage of previous reconstruction and renovation of the installations, replacement of the heat
emitting units has been executed together with appurtenant fittings in the entire building of the Municipal
and Cantonal courts, as well as replacement of the riser and appurtenant connections to connect the heat
emitting units. By this design, a replacement of the total horizontal distribution has been planned,
building-in the fittings at the branching pipes of the risers, building-in the air-escape cocks within
the air-evacuation netowrk on the 3d and 4th floor, as well as building-in the new heat emitting
units as per the requirements of the newly created spaces at the individula floors.

B. Cooling system
For the pruposes of cooling the court rooms beside the light wells, server rooms and rooms within
the attic space intended for gathering a great number of people, the split and mulitsplit systems
have been provided.

C. Ventilation
For rooms at the ground floor level, 1st floor and 2nd floor beside light well, as well as the rooms within
the attic such as the restaurant, the library, the reading room and internet, a ventilation system to satisfy
the required hygienic conditions has been forseen. Number of air changes has been defined according to
number of people people and recommendations for specified type of the room.
Ventilation of these rooms is divided on the following systems
-

system 1. court rooms next to the light well, level the ground floor, 1st floor, 2nd floor
system 2. the library, the reading room, the internet the attic
system 3. the restaurant the attic

D. Boiler room
The boiler room is situated in the basement part of the Municipal and Cantonal Courts and supplies not
just the Municipal and Cantonal Courts with hot water, but also the Faculty of Law, vice-chancellor's
office oft the University and the Prison facility. A partial conversion of the boiler room was executed in
1994 according to the Main design for the boiler room conversion, whereby the approval was issued by
JP Sarajevogas no.680 as of 26.02. 1994. By the new reconstruction as per the documentation prepared
in 1996, the missing equipment at the gas and hot-water installation was completed, but even until today
the building did not obtain the permission for gas usage. A replacement of the fittings on the distributors
as well as building-in of the pressure maintenance device within the installation to undertake the activities
related to the attic reconstruction have been foreseen.

E. Diesel generator
The diesel electric generator wiil be designed. The diesel generator nominal power will be definied based
on the requestes arising out of the electrical installations design.

F. Radiator heating and distribution network

Installation of the heat emitting units within all spaces at the floors that have changed its view or use as
per the architectural-civil design has been foreseen by this design. A part of the required heat emitting
units will be provided by using the existing radiator batteries to be re-packaged in order to satisfy the
requirements. The remaining part will be the new batteries. For the new batteries within the attic, the
design provides for installation of Al-made column radiators (product such as Ekonomik Lipovica) whose
dimensions will fit the place of installation.
The newly designed radiators are connected to the existing riser pipes which are partly run visually under
the ceiling of the 3rd floor. These radiators are provided with valves and subvalves R 1/2" for two-pipe
2007

Page 152 of 240

heating. For a part of the building up to the 3rd floor, air-evacuation of the installation is done by means of
the aeration network and valves, and by means of automatic air-relief valves built into the radiator plug
for the heat emitting units within the attic space.
The radiators are installed beneath the window, and where is not feasible, then they are mounted against
the lateral wall by using the support accessories being appropriate for the installation location.
This design has foreseen for replacement of the total horizontal distribution laid down under the basement
ceiling. There is also a provision for building-in the axial expansion joints to compensate the movements
as a result of the temperature variations. Isolation valves have been foreseen at the riser branches. After
carrying out the installation works at the pipe distribution and its cold-pressure test, the pipings are to be
insulated by means of profiled insulation.

G. Cooling system
For provision of appropriate environmental conditions during the summer period, the split and multisplit
systems for cooling the courtrooms and hall next to the light well, as well as server room at the basement,
then library, restaurant, a part of the court rooms and offices within the attic have been designed. On
overview of the designed systems is shown in a tabular form as an enclosure to the technical description.
The interior units have been chosen to match the interior conditions of an individual space in subject,
whereby the roof cassette units will be incorporated into the suspended ceilings where available. On the
other side, for the spaces where such ceilings are not available, the wall interior units will have to be
installed. The external units are to be, as a rule, installed against the faade oriented towards the backyard.
So as to reduce the number of the external units, the multisplit systems have been mostly used. The
cooling media and condensate pipes are to be lead either under-surface or within ducts.

H. Ventilation
For rooms at the ground floor, first and second floor next to the light well, as well as for rooms within the
attic such as the restaurant, library, reading room and internet, the ventilation system to meet the required
hygienic conditions has been foreseen. Number of air changes has been defined as per the number of
people and recommendations for specified type of space.
Ventilation of these spaces is divided into the following systems:
-

SYSTEM 1 court rooms next to the light well, the ground floor level, 1st floor, 2nd floor
SYSTEM 2 library, reading room, internet attic
SYSTEM 3 restaurant attic

Balance of air quantity

SYSTEM 1
A.

Court rooms, hall and court offices next to the light well

Court rooms and hall next to the light well, located at the ground floor, 1st and 2nd floor as well as three
court offices within the attic are subject to the ventilation system -SYSTEM 1. These areas are not
provided with the natural ventilation. The air quantity for each space has been adopted as 4 l/h, amounting
up to 1350 m3/h for the court rooms and 150 200 m3/h for individual court office.
The air quantity within the SYSTEM 1 amounts up to L = 4700 m3/h.
The air is prepared and treated by using the selected air conditioning chamber, type KNN 9/6, situated
within the attic space.
The air suction is performed through a roof-mounted rain protection louvre. The air exhaust is also
performed by a roof-mounted fixed louvre.
Introduction of the air into the spaces is foreseen by means of pressure air diffusers, such as type OD-8
size 500/16, whereas air exhaust is done by the exhaust grilles AR-1V, steel sheet ducts and the air

2007

Page 153 of 240

exhaust ventilation section. The arrangement of air diffusers and grilles provides for optimal distribution
of air for each space.
The air distribution ducts are located inside the suspended ceiling. All pressure ducts will be thermally
insulated by using an insulating material, having a class such as Armaflex with a thickness of 20 mm.
The system is provided with the automatic regulation elements allowing an independent and quality
operation, as well as maintenance and control of the designed microclimatic conditions in the spaces.
All of the required calculations are given in the enclosures hereto.
SYSTEM 2
B.

Restaurant

Restaurant is situated within the attic. Next to the restaurant, there is a first-hand kitchen for which the
equipment has not been defined in this stage of design. The air quantity has been adopted based on 6 l/h,
that amounts 2600 m3/h, and according to the number of persons of 66 and 40 m3/h per each person. This
system is also foreseen for air preparation for another three court offices without natural ventilation. So,
therefore, the total air quantity for SYSTEM 2 amounts to L = 3000 m3/h.
The air is prepared within the subceiling-mounted air conditioning chamber, such as type KSM 30,
incorporated within the suspended ceiling of the attic hall. The air suction is performed through a roofmounted rain protection louvre. The air exhaust is performed by means of a roof-mounted fan.
Introduction of the air into the spaces is foreseen by means of pressure air diffusers, such as type OD-8
size 500/16 and pressure grilles such as type AR-1V within the court offices. The air exhaust will be
performed through an exhaust nappe (to be supplied as a part of the kitchen equipment) and a roofmounted fan. The air is introduced inside the kitchen through the grilles mounted in the doors and walls.
The arrangement of air diffusers and grilles provides for optimal distribution of air for each space.
The air distribution ducts are located inside the suspended ceiling. All pressure ducts will be thermally
insulated by using an insulating material, having a class such as Armaflex with a thickness of 20 mm.
The system is provided with the automatic regulation elements allowing an independent and quality
operation, as well as maintenance and control of the designed microclimatic conditions in the spaces.
All of the required calculations are given in the enclosures hereto.
SYSTEM 3
C.

Library and reading room

The library and reading room are situated within the attic ant they belong to the SYSTEM 3 ventilation
system. The air quantity has been adopted based on 4 l/h, that amounts 1620 m3/h, and according to the
number of persons of 21 and 78 m3/h per each person. The total air quantity for SYSTEM 3 amounts to
L = 1620 m3/h.
The air is prepared within the subceiling-mounted air conditioning chamber, such as type KSM 20,
incorporated within the suspended ceiling of the attic hall. The air suction is performed through a roofmounted rain protection louvre. The air exhaust is also performed by a roof-mounted fixed louvre.
Introduction of the air into the spaces is foreseen by means of pressure air diffusers, such as type OD-8
size 500/16, whereas air exhaust is done by the exhaust grilles AR-1V.
The air distribution ducts are located inside the suspended ceiling. All pressure ducts will be thermally
insulated by using an insulating material, having a class such as Armaflex with a thickness of 20 mm.
The system is provided with the automatic regulation elements allowing an independent and quality
operation, as well as maintenance and control of the designed microclimatic conditions in the spaces.
All of the required calculations are given in the enclosures hereto.

2007

Page 154 of 240

Installation of a circulating pump within the circle of the chambers heaters has been provided within the
boiler room. At the existing distributors, a connection of the pipes for the air systems is to be provided.
The pipe is to be run up to the attic space by using the air evacuation pipe runs which have been
previously dismantled. The pipes are insulated by using the profile insulation.
D.

Boiler room

This design provides for replacement of fittings at the distributors, fixing the distributors' insulation as
well as buidling-in the pressure maintenance device inside the installation due to re-use of the spaces
within the attic. As per the installed capacity in the boiler room and water contents, the pressure
maintenance system, such as type EM D2, has been chosen. Inclusive of all refits to be carried out at the
installation.
E.

Diesel generator

The diesel electric generator for outdoor installation has been designed and it is elaborated within the
electrical installations design.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION - INTERIOR WATER SUPPLY AND SEWAGE

INTRODUCTION
According to terms of reference and after-consultations and agreement with the Investor, in this design, it
is necessary to include renovation and partial reconstruction of the existing sanitary ware, and to specify
some new sanitary facilities, as the tea kitchen and the room for cleaners as well as the new- design
restaurant in the attic.
Consequently, it is necessary to include a renovation and change of a major part of the existing old
plumbing system, sanitary fitting and accessories for the existing and also for the new sanitary rooms.
During the visit, survey of the existing situation and during the consultation and meeting with technical
personnel working on the maintenance of plumbing system and their observation of works during some
prior renovations (1996), we concluded that has been realized only partial replacement of this plumbing
system , sanitary fitting and accessories.
In many sanitary facilities, there are often some floods from the superior floors. The reason of it, could be
probably an insufficient or most likely outstanding work of waterproofing in the mentioned rooms.
(Personnel confirmed this situation because there is not a design documentation of record drawings).
The preposition of solution of this problem is a placing of new waterproofing in all sanitary rooms, in
existing sanitary rooms as well as in new designed ( new tea kitchen, new stores and similar) with all
necessary preliminary works and necessary works after waterproofing. It requests additional investments,
but it is necessary to do it.
Furthermore, the reason of this situation is, the most probably, non-execution of total renovation of old
plumbing system, only partial.
During the document preparation, the existing places and some solutions of sanitary facilities should be
observed. The new water consumers are specified on the basis of architectural drafts the tea kitchen,
rooms for cleaners, the new restaurant in the attic and some new design sanitary facilities.
1. SANITARY ROOMS ON THE FLOORS:
According to terms of reference and after-consultations with the Investor i.e. the user, some works are
specified in following rooms.
-

The basement

- In the basement is predicted complete reconstruction of sanitary facilities opposite to the

boiler room, where instead of existing toilets and deteriorated bath are predicted a shower enclosure as
2007

Page 155 of 240

well as a toilet beside of it with complete new sanitary equipment, as well as change of plumbing
installation.
- Complete reconstruction of sanitary facilities opposite to the restaurant and beside of the
archives is also predicted. Instead of existing old bath is predicted two toilets with complete new
sanitary equipment, as well as change of plumbing installations.
- The existing restaurant is eliminated and in this place is predicted the registry room and
instead of the existing service room is predicated new designed elevator.
- In the boiler room is predicted a wash basin with new necessary plumbing installations.
- In existing new repaired sanitary block (where there are lawyers' rooms) it is not
necessary complete renovation except obligate change of foul vertical as well as the fitting of new
designed boiler and connection to the existing wall installations ( the boiler in current service room on
which is connected the system of mentioned sanitary facilities is eliminated because of existing elevator
in place of the service room). It is predicted also eventual change of floor humidity insulation and
eventual floor distribution if necessary. It will be determine in-place according to the Investor and the
Supervisor.
-

The ground floor

- It is not necessary to repair two toilets ( left and right) at the end of entrance hall beside
of the courtroom, but it is predicted change of installations as well as deteriorated sanitary fitting and
sanitary accessories.
- It is necessary to repair completely the toilets near the main stairway and the existing
room of mechanic ( on the right). Instead of existing mentioned toilets is predicted toilets for disability
people with all necessary equipment and beside of it it is specified the store room with trokadero with
new necessary plumbing installation..
- The existing toilets in the right wing of the existing criminal department should not be
repaired, but it is predicted a change of installation as well as old sanitary fitting and sanitary
accessories.
- The existing toilets near the existing safety vaults and janitors should not be repaired, but
it is predicted a change of installation as well as old sanitary fitting and sanitary accessories.
1st floor
- the existing toilets near the existing criminal registry room should not be repaired , but it
is predicted a change of installation as well as old sanitary fittings and sanitary accessories.
- It is not necessary to repair the existing toilets near the existing headquarters of the
Cantonal court, but it is predicted a change of installation as well as old sanitary fittings and sanitary
accessories.
- The existing toilets near the litigation department of the Municipal court should not be
repaired, but it is predicted a change of installation as well as old sanitary fittings and sanitary
accessories
- The existing toilets of the Ministry of justice should not be repaired, but it is predicted a
change of installation as well as old sanitary fittings and sanitary accessories.
- Instead of the storeroom of the Cantonal court is predicted the cleaner's room with
trokadero, with new necessary plumbing installations, trokadero, water heater and the rest necessary
accessories.
- In place of the existing tea kitchen is predicted an elevator, and in place of the existing
headquarters of the Cantonal court is predicted the tea kitchen with new necessary plumbing
installation, sink, flow heater and the rest necessary outgoes.
- 2nd floor
The same as the 1st floor.
- 3d floor
The same as the 1st floor. ( except, instead of archives of the Cantonal court i.e. instead of
economists of the Cantonal court are rooms for cleaners and the tea kitchen)
- The Attic

2007

Page 156 of 240

- The existing sanitary facilities near the extra-judicial registry room of the Municipal
court are not changed, except a partial replacement of the old sanitary fitting and accessories.
- the existing tea kitchen next to the sanitary facilities near some rooms of the Cantonal
court should be replaced in the room next to the mentioned sanitary facilities on the other side, with
new necessary plumbing installations and equipment, and instead of the kitchen should be planed the
new wash basins, and partial change of old sanitary fitting and sanitary accessories.
- the existing sanitary facilities and the tea kitchen next to them, near the existing extrajudicial section and Cantonal prosecutor should be completely rebuilt in two independent sanitary
facilities with separated WCs for ladies and men, and rooms for cleaners with trocadero. For mentioned
rebuilt rooms, all new plumbing system and sanitary fittings and accessories should be planed. Because
there is the Faculty of Law under mentioned rebuilt sanitary facilities, the running-off should be done
by pipes above the floor which will be hidden, if possible, in the floor adding loading coats as raise
floor ( store room for running-off from trokadero) or by a mask of waterproofing gypsum card boards.
This will be realized in the architectural part of the design. For that purpose, WC pans, should be
included.
- In one part of the attic is planed the restaurant. The water supply and exit should be
realized on plumb lines of the nearest sanitary facilities on the 3d floor. Next to the restaurant is planed
kitchenette for the restaurant needs where should not be planed equipment nor complete distribution
system, but only the main water supply and the main running-off in the floor as well as vertical, and
complete distribution system as well as complete equipment will be in special design.
2. WATER SUPPLY
-

WATER RETICULATION OF POTABLE WATER-

According to the personnel working on the maintenance of plumbing system, the actual water
reticulation of potable water is at several places joined to the hydrant reticulation and it is contrary to
regulations (sanitary facilities of court police in the ground floor and Ist floor). The pumping plant for
the hydrant reticulation turns on and off every few minutes.
For this reason, it is predicted a separation of these parts of reticulation from hydrant system (sanitary
facilities of the court police in the ground floor and Ist floor) and a connection to the reticulation of
potable water (under ceiling of the ground floor) with obligate control water gauge. It is included a
price list of works.
There are many rooms in the building, especially new design rooms (as new sanitary facilities, rooms
for cleaners etc.), and because of some pressure loss, by this design is planed additional pumping plant
for potable water.
After an examination of the existing plumbing fixtures and according to personnel working on the
maintenance of plumbing system, there are few renovated i.e. replaced plumbing fixtures. By this
design, a replacement of all vertical and horizontal parts of reticulation should be realized and also old
pipes. (except the eventual part of the reticulation in the basement, rebuilt in 1996, which will be define
in-place according to the Investor and the Supervisor).
The section of the water public connection is 80 with water quantity of 7,50 8,50 litter per second.
The pressure in the room with pumping plant is measured and amounts 4 bars and in public connection,
the pressure is some higher.
The existing main water gauge is placed in the basement in the archives part for needs of the court,
namely in the existing water manhole where passes a foul drain and which is completely under the
water and in very bed situation.
As agreed with JKP Vodovod is predicted that this water gauge will be replaced on the wall above the
floor, but near of the same (see in the drawings). In this place are separated special pipe lines for the
Court, and special pipe lines for the prison and is predicted separate water gauge set.
From water gauge set, for needs of the Court, the pipe is connected to the earlier repaired pipe line
under the ceiling of the basement which conduits to the room where is placed the pumping plant and
2007

Page 157 of 240

where are separated two spatial reticulations, of potable water and fire extinguishing water with
special water gauge sets.
The water gauge sets in niches in the building for the needs of other users i.e. the Faculty of Law and
State archives, as well as water gauge for the measurement of potable water in the room of pumping
plant for needs of the Court are partially available and it is predicted to change them.
Pipes are made of galvanized steel with necessary fittings and insulated under ground by the quilt, in
the wall by felt and plastic band. Exposed pipes should be insulated by prefabricated polyurethane
insulation Armaflex or similar with appropriated thickness according to the pipe profile.
After pipe placing it is necessary to execute a pressure test of 12 bar. Before the start it is necessary to
execute a disinfection of the pipe work.
The hot water should be provided by separate electric boiler in the sanitary facilities , and for sinks, by
single-point heaters.
-

WATER RETICULATION FOR FIRE PROTECTION

During the prior renovation (1996), the reticulation for fire protection, insulated by Plamaflex, has been
replaced as well as some fire hydrant sets made from sheet, red colour, double, with separate doors. (at
the superior part there are angle valve, trevira hose, length 15 m, as well as jet nozzle, and in inferior
part there are fire extinguishers type S9 and CO2.). All is in function, as well as the pumping plant. The
one external face hydrant should be realized.
As in the attic, in the part of the space there is not fire-extinguishing water , (according to the
regulations ) are predicted two hydrants and part of the fire-extinguishing system, and one hydrant is
replaced because of reconstruction of sanitary ware.
On new designed additional reticulation in the attic on top of the verticals are predicted air valves. To
prevent backwater in hydrant system and blocking of the plant for build-up of pressure , as well as for
the reason of occasional automatic switching-on of the plant, on top of the hydrant verticals at some
place is connected one cistern to the hydrant system
3. SEWERAGE SYSTEM
-

FOUL SEWERAGE SYSTEM-

Some reconstruction and reparation have been executed. But installations and sanitary ware are in bad
condition. Different repairs have been executed using different kind of material and patching. All this
prior work had influence to the quality. There are some sweating and wetting of walls and structure.
By prior repairs, the quality was not realized.
Consequently, it is necessary to execute a replacement of all vertical drains as well as horizontal parts
of foul sewerage system and in the major part by SML pipes with fittings, and partially by PVC pipes.
The Investor does not have the design documentation of the last renovation and the work is harder
during the renovation work.
The ground sewerage has more exits i.e. connections to the street.
Towards personnel ,in the part of the ground reticulation there are cloggings, and it is necessary to
repair i.e. plan few manholes as well as a change of the part of sewerage system in the ground, and all
according to the drawings and bill of quantities. With the rest of the ground reticulation, there are not
big problems in its function.
-

RAINWATER GOODS-

After survey of the existing situation in the building and after consultation with technical personnel
there are some problems with outlet of rainwater. It is insufficient number of rainwater verticals.
Consequently, there are facade wetting and peeling because of that. There is a danger for security of
people passing by under that parts of facade.

2007

Page 158 of 240

An additional number of new rainwater gutters are necessary including the same number of concrete
yard gullies. Additional excavations should be planed and new offtake pipes in the ground for
connection to the existing reticulation of rainwater goods. ( because there is not design of the existing
reticulation it is necessary to realize some bigger excavations to find existing pipeline in the ground ).
Consequently , the reconstruction and renovation of the roof should be planed and also a replacement of
the existing old vertical and horizontal gutters made from sheet.
- SANITARY FITTINGS AND ACCESSOIRES
The major part of the sanitary fittings have been rebuilt, but one part of it is lasted or damaged and it is
necessary their replacement.
All new sanitary fittings have to be from the I class. The contractor has to point out samples to the
supervision because of choosing of type and colour of sanitary ware.
The hot water should be provided in the tea kitchen, the restaurant as well as in majority sanitary
facilities.
Toilets for disability people have to be equipped with all elements according to prescriptions and
standards for disability people.
The kitchen equipment (sinks and cupboards) as well as trokaders in cleaner's rooms are specified as Ist
class and all according to the Designer and the Investor.
Complete equipment of the kitchen for the restaurant as well as equipment of the restaurant are not
predicted by this design. Only the outgoes for water supply and sewerage system in the floor and
partially in the wall are predicted.
Sanitary accessories should be made from inox.

2007

Page 159 of 240

VOLUME 4
MODEL FINANCIAL BID
BREAKDOWN OF THE OVERALL PRICE
IN LUMP-SUM CONTRACTS
BILL OF QUANTITIES
IN UNIT-PRICE CONTRACTS

2007

Page 160 of 240

1. Contracts may be:

a)
b)
c)

lump-sum contracts,
unit-price contracts,
hybrid contracts.

2. In lump-sum contracts, an all-in price covers all the services/works/supplies concerned by the contract.
The all-in price will, if necessary, be calculated on the basis of the breakdown of the overall price. In
the latter case an all-in price will be given for each separate item in the itemised breakdown. The total
price will be calculated by adding together the various all-in prices for all such items. Where items are
accompanied by quantities, these will be firm quantities drawn up by the Contracting Authority. The
firm quantity is the quantity for which the Contractor has submitted an all-in price, which will be paid
to him irrespective of the quantity actually supplied.
3. In unit-price contracts, the supplies/services/works are broken down into different items on the basis
of bills of quantities drawn up by the Contracting Authority, and the proposed unit price for each item
is indicated. The unit prices for the contract are predetermined. The amounts due under the contract
will be calculated by applying the said unit prices to the quantities actually supplied, in accordance
with the contract.
4. In hybrid contracts, the prices will be fixed and supplies, services and works paid for in accordance
with two or more of the methods laid down in paragraphs 2 and 3. The tender dossier for a hybrid
contract will indicate how prices are to be determined.
5. Each tender dossier must specify the exact type of contract used. The bill of quantities/breakdown of
the overall price must provide sufficient information on the quantities of works to be performed to
enable bids to be prepared efficiently and accurately, and when a contract has been entered into, to
provide an itemised basis for measuring the works executed. In order to attain these objectives, works
should be itemised in the bill of quantities/breakdown of the overall price in sufficient detail to
distinguish between the different classes of works, or between works of the same nature carried out in
different locations or any other circumstances which may give rise to variations in cost. The layout
and content of the bill of quantities/breakdown of the overall price should be as simple and brief as
possible, while remaining consistent with these requirements.

Daywork schedule
A daywork schedule should be included only if there is a high probability of unforeseen works not
covered by the bill of quantities. To facilitate checking by the Contracting Authority of the realism of
rates quoted by the tenderers, the daywork schedule should normally comprise the following:
(a) a list of the various classes of labour, materials, and construction plant for which basic daywork rates
or prices are given by the tenderer, together with a statement of the conditions under which the
Contractor will be paid for work executed on a daywork basis;
(b) the nominal quantities for each item of daywork, to be priced by each tenderer in his bid. The rate to
be entered by the tenderer against each basic daywork item should include the Contractor's profit,
overheads, supervision and other charges.

2007

Page 161 of 240

Provisional sums/Contingencies
A general provision for physical contingencies (quantity overruns) may be made by including a
provisional sum in the overall bill of quantities. The inclusion of such provisional sums often facilitates
budgetary approval by avoiding the need to request periodic supplementary approvals as the future need
arises. Where such provisional sums or contingency allowances are used, the Special Conditions must
state the manner in which they will be used, and under whose authority (usually the Supervisor's).

These notes for preparing financial bids are intended only as information for the Contracting
Authority or the person drafting the documents for the invitation to tender. They should not be
included in the final documents. Attached are two examples of breakdown of the overall price and
bill of quantities. These are purely indicative and may be modified/ combined as required by the
project.

2007

Page 162 of 240

TECHNICAL CONDITIONS FOR EXECUTION OF ARCHITECTURAL -CIVIL WORKS AND

CRAFTSMENT'S WORKS

1.

GENERAL

Introduction
All works proposed in technical documentation, design, details, specifications and Bill of Quantity shall
be performed as specified. The works shall be performed according to instructions by supervisor
(designer), applicable laws and regulations and instructions (manufacturer's instructions) which affects
the object.
Before work start, contractor is obliged to perform all prior (preparatory) works on a building site, such as
construction of fence around the building site, accomodation of technical staff, construction of temporary
facilities, conecting building site to utilities.
Contractor is responsible for delivering Elaborate on fire-protection and Elaborate on work protection
certified by an authorised institutions.
Procedure for submission of request for work comencement shall be established imediatelly, as well as
procedures of materal and drawing approval, possible modifications and request for paymentr.
Also, contractor is obliged to amounce begining of all kinds of works at least seven days in advance and
to use only materials aproved. All materials (samples and models) must be aproved by the supervisor and
the investor through apropriate procedures. Requests for aprovals, together with samples must be
submitted at least 15 days prior comencement of work with that material.
Items of Bill of Quantities include procurement, transportation and making all elements necessary for
correct instalation and functioning.
Upon work completion, before technical acceptance, a contractor is obliged to remove all temporary
structures, to claen a building site and bring everything in an original status.
For above reason, it is necesary to make Organisation scheme of a building site , taking care of an
elements, such as movement on a building site, public traffic, enedangerement of surrounding buildings
etc. No temporary works or objects used by contractor shall be paid separately and should be included in
a proposed price, if otherwise not stippulated by the contract.
Any Contractor's works shall not be accepted if it is not performed in accordance with specifications,
design and BoQ. Contractor is obliged to remove such works at its on cost and to perform it again
acording ro the design and BoQ. Also, works performed by a Contractor incorrectly and inproperly can be
removed upon request by a Supervisor, at Contractors's cost.
In case that contractor performs bad quality works, not included in a design or specifications, and in case
that such structures can not be demolished, said objects and works shall not be paid.
Also, all consequences of possible repairs shall be contractor's obligation and expence, according to a
supervisor's request.
Contractor must not modify material types described in BoQ, no matter if they are cheaper or more
expensive. If some materails, upon contractor's request before signing the contract should be modified
for some justified reason, contractor shall obtain a written aproval by a supervisor (designer) for such
modification.
All materials used must be of excellent quality, with all necesary atests. All materials must comply with
standards and regulations required. Workers for specific works must be qualified and quality, so all works
are performed in quality manner.
If, on Supervisor's request, some items indicated in BoQ are not performed, it is supervisor's obligation to
inform contractor, through a building diary about these works and these works shall not be paid.

2007

Page 163 of 240

Prices that are additionaly proposed by the contractor shall not be changed on a contractor's request,
unless encompassed and regukated by the contract in case of strict stipulations by the government in
respect of changed market prices. In case of increased prices of material and labour, these prices shall be
detaily determined in amendment to the contract.
Prices proposed shall contain all costs for finalisation of complete items as stated in BoQ, such as:
Procurement of material, supporting and qualified labour, internal and external transportation, necessary
tools, temporary installations, preparatory and final works, scaffolding with ramps, and protective fence,
slabs with supports, all fees and costs that may arise during construction, and, as necessary taking care of
all above listed measures and of the fact that completed building must serve its purpose.
Price of additional and unforeseen works shall be calsulated according to construction standards,
construction material market prices, total working hours and factor, all in accordance with a Main
Contract on Execution and Contract's Directives.
During work performance, contractor is obliged to maintain a building site and buildings clean, tide and
safe.
Contractor is responsible to comply all prescribed measures of fire-protection, work protection, and
hygienic-technical regulations, such as Law on fire protection (Official gazzete of SRB&H, 2/82), Fire
protection plan for city of Sarajevo (Official gazzete 6/78), Book of regulations on general measures and
norms of work protection concerning work execution (Official Journal of SFRJ 27/67, 29/67, 41/68),
Book of regulations on work protection for civil work execution (Official Journal of SFRJ 42/68, 45/67).
Imediately upon work comencement, contractor is responsible for providing required Design on work
protection and Design on fire protection aouthorised by competent institution, that shall not be paid
separately. During work performance, all damages on objects and installations at the building site or
surrounding shall be borne by a contractor.
As for all works, in conection to roads, contractor is obliged to construct a protective fence in order to
provide safety for passerbys and traffic. On the building site, a Building diary must be kept regularly and
correctly, with description of daily works at the building site, number of employees, engineer's records
and supervisors' and contractor's notofications. Also, contractor is obliged to keep a building book in
which all performed work quantities are recorded, according to descriptions from BoQ. Each page shall
be signed by the contractor and the suoervisor.
Building book has to have pages numerated, authorised and closed. It is also valid for a building diary.
At Supervisors' request, contractor is obliged to conduct testing of materials and structures and to provide
necessary attests in case that the attests provided previously are suspicious.
During construction it is necessary to make all openings, holes for chimnies, ventilations, installations, in
accordance with the drawings.
At the end of the works, these openings shall be closed by bricklaying and plastering, which shall not be
paid additionaly, aldought not predicted in BoQ. Additonal groove deepening for instalations is not going
to be additionaly aproved, unles special requirements are in quaestion.
Contractor is obliged to coordinate all kinds of works and to perform them timely, including all phases.
Also, a Contractor must respect Book of regulation on technical measures and conditions for final works
execution (Official Journal of SFRJ 49/70).
Contractor is obliged to clean the building from waste and to transport it to a city damp. Before handover,
the building must be cleaned and ready for movement and use. General cleaning include all works
performed and shall not be paid separately.
For technical acceptance by a comission, contractor is obliged to prepare all technical documentation,
complete design as aproved at the time of getting building permit, all modification occured during work
execution, contractor's time table, building books, documentation related to building permits, attests for
materaila nd equipment and all other documentation needed.

2007

Page 164 of 240

At occasion of handover of the building to the investor, building must be cleaned and ready for use. Also,
handover report shall be created, respecting conclusions and objections of members of technical
commision.
Contractor is obliged to submitt to the investor all documents to be used by the commision for technical
acceptanc, as well as warantees for the elements and equipment built in.
Regulations
Up to date, in Federation of BiH and cantons, completely renewed technical regulations do not exist.
Therefore, regulations and standards inherited from SFRJ and Republic of B&H are mostly in use.
Official gazzete of SRB&H, 2/92 dated 11. 04.1992, addopted was Decree law on adoption and
application of federal that are applied as republic laws in B&H. By this decree law adopted was the law
on standardisation- revised text, (Official Journal of SFRJ, 8/91). Therefore, all former Jugoslav standards
are still valid and will be used until futher notice.
Foreign standards are aplied if inherited standards are missing, or if new materials or technical solutions
are introduced.
For information purpose, listed are base documents and manuels with the data on designing, execution,
control and supervision on the works performed, as well as the data on civil work inspection:
"Collection of technical regulations in civil engineering", Volume 1,2,3 and 4 -Graevinska knjiga,
Beograd, 1980
"Building and structural design and construction" Volume 1,2,3 and 4 - Poslovna politika, Beograd, 1990
"Catalog of Jugoslav and international standards in the field of civil engineering 1987, Architect
Asociation of Jugoslavia, Beograd 1988
"Applicable regulations in civil engineering", material for seminar for urbanistic civil engineering
inspectors, Neum 1990-SR BiH, Republic secretariat for spatial arrangement and environment protection,
Sarajevo, 1990
"Law on Spatial Arrangement of Sarajevo Canton" Official Journal of Sarajevo Canton, 07/2005.
"Law on Civil Engineering" , Official Journal of B&H, 55/2002.
"General technical conditions for designing and construction of appartment buildings and appartments ,
Official Journal of Sarajevo City, 21/87.
Norms and standards of work in civil engineering-Building design and construction, Volume 1,2,3,4 and
5- IRO Graevinska knjiga, Beograd 1980,
Technical conditions for execution of final works in civil-engineering, Part I and II- ZAVRAJ Business
asociation of companies for final works in civil-engineering SFRJ, BEOGRAD 1975.
Decree law on establishment of base criteria for sanation of damaged or demolished buildings - Official
gazzete of R BiH 9/92.
Book of regulations on technical norms for repair, streightening and reconstruction of buildings damaged
by earthquake and for reconstruction and revitalisation of buildings ( Official Journal, 52/85).
Book of regulations on urban and civil engineering protective measures in case of natural disasters and
war activities (Official Journal SR BiH, No. 29/75),
"Graevinska knjiga 1995 - Zagreb-Europska normizacija:
EN 1991 EUROCODE 1 Basis of designing, calculation and dimensioning, loading and other effects to
supporting structures,
EN 1991 EUROCODE 2 Designing, calculation and dimensioning of reinforced concrete structures and
pre-stressed concrete supporting structures,
EN 1991 EUROCODE 3 Designing, calculation and dimensioning of steel supporting structures,

2007

Page 165 of 240

EN 1991 EUROCODE 4 Designing, calculation and dimensioning of supporting composite construction

in steel and concrete ,
EN 1991 EUROCODE 5 Designing, calculation and dimensioning of wooden supporting structures,
ASTM American norms,
BS British norms,
DIN German norms,
NF French norms,
In cases when technical and technological procedures and materials originate from the listed or other
countries, it is necessary to submitt, or reffer to credible attests, agreements or regulations of the
countries, technological processes and materaials are originating from.
If regulations of other countries aplied for conditiaouns, works and materials proposed for aplication, it is
necessary to enclose authorative documentation. Investor reserves a right of acceptance or rejection of
such evidences.
For undertaking measures of technical protection of workers and work protection measures, the following
regulations are applied:
Book of regulations on work protection in civil-engineering,Official Journal of SFRJ, 42/68 and 45/68.
Book of regulations on general measures and standards of work protection for working with tools and
devices, Official Journal of SFRJ, 17/87 and 18/91,
Book of regulations on means for personal work protection and personal protective equipment, Official
Journal of SFRJ, 35/69,
Law on work protection - Official Journal of SFRJ, 31/84 and 22/90.
Book of regulations on work protection for working with electrical current - Official Journal SR BiH
34/88.
Law on fire protection, Official Journal SR BiH, No. 2/82, 15/87, 38/89, 19/90 and 36/90.
Law on basis of secutity for oil and gas pipelines transportation, Official Journal SR BiH, No 64/73.

Geodetical works
Contractor shall have its own geodetical department, having at disposal geodetical instruments and
devices that provide apropriate work accuracy. Handover of geodetical data is done in writen, through a
record or by recording in building book.
For Contractor abd Suoervisor, official are those geodetical data takeover and authorised by Supervisor.
Record on geodetical data is maintained by the Supervisor. Contractor is obliged to use that record and to
deliver its data imediately, e.g. one day after emerging.
Contractor is obliged to ensure or displace all geodetical points that can be destroyed by works. It is also
obliged to take care not to damage or destroy with machinery or in other way, the points that are out of
reach of ongoing works.
Supervisor shall conduct control in all phases of work perfrmance. Contractor is obliged to ensure
undisturnbed work to the Supervisor's team.
Organisational design and timetable
Contractor is obliged, on a basis of timetable enclosed to contractual documents, main design and
situation on site, to prepare a detailed work execution organisation design. The design sghall contain
necesary descriptions of work perfprmance for specific works and work phases, machinery types and way
of its use, and timetable of realisation of entire contract.

2007

Page 166 of 240

While preparing Work organisation design, contractor must respect fixed (permanent milestones) points
within contractual time- schedule. During work performance, a contractor must comply with its
organisation design and any possible modification is registered through building book, with all
repercussion, according to conditions of contract. Investor has a right to request modifications in respect
of engaged machinery utilisation and/or way of performance of specific works, if there is opinion that it
will prevent damage or delay of the works.
Giving posesion of the site
Investor shall give possession of the site to the Contractor by handing over of ownership documentation
and bulding permit , all in accordance with "Conditions of the contract". Contractor shall, acording to
permissions received, undertake all preparatory activities by his time table and with all measures of
protection of environment, people and works in accordance with applicable regulations. Contractor shall
also enable undisturbed work of companbies and institututions located in imediate vicinity.
Work performance
Contractor is responsible for execution of the works in accordance with drawings, schemas and measures
from Main design and in accordance with Work organisation design. During work performance , a
contractor shall comply with requirements and instructions by local authorities, as well as with
contractual obligations. Works shall not be put in danger. There shall not be any damage to people,
surounding land and private property, and if such damagy occures, a contractor is responsible to repair it
at its own expence. Prior to work start, a contractor is obliged to asses the existing situation and to make it
official by recorging it to a building book, in order to make possible calculation of as built quantities upon
work completion and assessment of as-built status.
Performance of civil-craftsmenn's works must be harmonised with performance of installation and
montage works, e.g. with order of activities as contracted through time-table and network plan of work
performance. When required, contractor for civil-craftsmen's works shall subordinate its expertise and
technological potentials to the needs of other subjects involved in reconstruction of the building, and vice
versa., always upon a supervisor's request and aproval.
In any sich case, decesion shall be made jointly and hatmonised , with possible help and concent by
designer.
In case of circumstances beyond Contractor's responsibility, that are endengering work quality or work
performance deadline, a contractor is obliged to claim them timely by recording them in a building book,
in order to enable Investor to take apropriate measures, through a supervisor.
Conditions and handover of specific work during work performance are described in a chapters of
technical conditions for these specific works.
Request for work acceptance must be submitted through record in a building book at least two days in
advance.
Work handover and technical acceptance
After contractor finishes all contractual works, it shall, by recording in a building book request from a
Supervisor aproval for technical acceptance of works. Supervisor shall conduct a control and inspection
of works and documentation and get down to organisation activities of technical inspection. After
Supervisor, through a record in a building book, agrees on Contractor's request, Investor is obliged to,
within seven days, form a commision for technical acceptance of works and gets down to technical
acceptance. Contractor is responsible for collecting all required documentation as built designs,
building book closed with calculation of work qwuantities as performed, signed building diary and
obrtained attests on qualiyt of all works and materials used.
Upon technical acceptance, a commision shall give a deadline for remeding of all possible deffects and
control inspection. After remeding of all defects recorded, a contractor shall invite a commision to
undertake a control inspection. If all defects are removed, commision shall, through a minute, state that
all works are executed completely and properly, and shall give its agreement on putting the n+building
into function.
2007

Page 167 of 240

Contractor is obliged, until handover of a building to a final user, to guard and maintain works and
objects in as good condition. Investor shall organise all necesary activities for handover and final
calculation within 15 (fifteen) days upon completion of work of technical acceptance commision.

PRELIMINARY WORKS
Fence placement
The Contractor is obliged to protect the building site, as well as all dangerous places with protective
fence, aiming at prevention of unauthorised access to the zone of construction works and falling down of
the people, tools and material. It is also obliged, using appropriate measures, to protect passer-bys and
traffic against falling down of the people, tools and material from the object.
Dismounting
Dismounting is predicted for locksmith and joinery items that can not be repaired and function of which is
cancelled with this project. Arrangement is given in the drawings.
Dismounted material that is in good condition is Investor's property and at its request, such material
(doors for example) can be transported and stored on some place other than city damp.
Dismounting of parquet as predicted in BoQ concerns the rooms where there a parquet is damaged and
improperly laid. Rooms and their arrangement will be specified at the spot with Investor's and
Supervisor's approval. Parquet shall be dismounted carefully so good parquet can be used for smaller
repairs in some rooms. Smaller repairs and parquet replacement are done on the existing base (including
smaller corrections if necessary). Parquet replacement in complete rooms requires a new base. The
existing base is to be removed and taken outside the building and transported to a city damp and the space
is to be cleaned and prepared for a new base. Base is to be made from wooden boarding or double OSB
boards, in accordance with applicable regulations and standards.
Where walls are demolished, the existing floors, walls and ceilings which shall be kept, are to be
protected.
In case of making new openings and plaster removal, it is necessary to take care of surrounding elements,
predicting special protection for parquet that is kept (protection with sufficiently thick stiropor and PVC
sheet). Making openings for instillations is done according to the design of installations.
Making openings for doors and windows, as well as bricklaying of the existing openings is done
according to the design, including protection of nearby elements.
Where stairway opening is made, everything is to be done according to the drawings from structural part
of the design, including all necessary measures for protection of people and structure.
After demolishing and opening making, all material and waste is to be taken out, loaded on a truck and
transported to a city damp, and rooms are to be entirely cleaned and prepared for next work phase.
Dismounting of ceramic tiles is to be done together with a base (ceramic glue) down to the plaster or floor
base. Material and waste are to be taken out, loaded on a truck and transported to a city damp.
Existing reception information with newspaper shop and copy room everything is to be dismounted
and all waste material is to be transported to a city damp.
Cleaning the rooms after all opening makings, dismounting and demolishing is compulsory, as well as
final cleaning of all rooms against material and dirt and preparation for handover.
Scaffolding
Contractor is obliged, for the purpose of works, to construct scaffolding in the aula, according to schedule
and time-table indicated in the work organisation. Scaffolding is to be firm and stable, well fixed to the
object. Platforms must have handrails for protection of people and prevention of falling down of tools and
material.

2007

Page 168 of 240

Contractor is obliged to enable use of the scaffolding to the other sub-contractors, whenever requested by
the Supervisor.
After scaffolding removal, the Contractor must remove damages caused by fixing scaffolding to the
building or other circumstances related to scaffolding erection and dismounting.

ARCHITECTURAL-CIVIL AND CRAFTSMEN'S WORKS

1.

Concrete and reinforced concrete works

Introduction
Structures from concrete and reinforced concrete at the building shall be performed in accordance with
the Main Design, these General Conditions and respective applicable regulations and standards.
Concrete and reinforced concrete works are performed in accordance to Book of regulation on technical
measurements for concrete and reinforced concrete, Official gazette SFRJ No. 11/87 and JUS standards.
Investor shall deliver to the Contractor all required main designs, for all concrete works, with all
necessary contents technical description, structural calculations and formwork and reinforcement plans,
BoQ, cost estimate, specification of equipment and parts. Contractor is obliged to study the design and to
timely notify the supervisor on possible errors or incorrectnesss in the design. All claims in respect of
design contents, possible changes suggested or alternative solutions with supporting explanations are to
be submitted to the Investor by the contractor through Building diary, at least 10 (ten) days prior to the
planned commencement of the works concerned by the record.
Contractor is obliged to comply with the following procedure in respect of work performance:
Supervising body shall, prior to start of any work, make inspection of the works performed earlier and
than give an approval for the works to be performed.
Contractor is obliged to notify the Supervisor on completion of the specific work phase, at least 3 (three)
days earlier, through a record in a Building diary, and to request acceptance of the works.
If the Supervision body does not respond to the contractor's request, the Contractor may continue
working, but it does not release it of responsibility for obtaining required work quality.
Contractor is responsible for conducting quality tests for all materials intended to be built in. Material
quality proving tests are contained in work unit prices and are not paid separately. Supervising body has
the right of requesting additional check on the quality of all materials that are built in or intended to be
built in by the contractor. If that additional check proves that material or structure comply with a required
quality, testing cost shall be born by the Investor. If work and material quality is proved to be below
required quality, testing and repair costs of non-quality works shall be born by the Contractor.
Works shall be performed in accordance with respective drawings, details, calculations, with expertise, by
appropriate skilled labour and under expert supervision.
Materials for concrete
Materials for concrete are: mineral aggregate, cement, water and additives. All listed materials must be of
proved quarry in respect of usability for concrete production.
Aggregate for concrete
As an aggregate for concrete the following materials can be used: tested river gravel or stony material
from quarry, crushed and screened to fractions, clean, without dust, mud, organic or other dirt.
Petrography composition and quality of mineral aggregate for concrete production must be tested in a
certified institute for testing of construction materials and structures. Each delivery must have quality
attest, regardless of supplier, kind and origin of the material.

2007

Page 169 of 240

Granulometric composition- material shall comply with conditions given by granulometry curves by
FULLER and EMPA i.e. that the curve of specific aggregate delivery is placed between the two listed,
e.g. that it is in accordance with some other widely respected criteria.
Minimum and maximum grain is determined for each concrete type that is for each structure and that
magnitude shall not be exceeded.
Adhesive material
As adhesive material, standard portland cement shall be used, which is to comply with regulations given
in chapter 4.1., articles 21 to 24 and quality according to JUS B.C1.013.
Non-standard adhesive materials can be used only if their use is officially approved by authorised bodies
and/or if the Investor explicitly approves their use.
Contractor is obliged to perform adhesive material quality testing and to submit quality attests issued by
certified institute.
Contractor is responsible for appropriate storage of cement on the building site and for taking care of its
quality. Supervising body has a right to forbid use or to order extraordinary testing of suspicious quality.
Water for concrete
Water for concrete preparation shall be taken from the city water supply system.
Concrete supplements - additives
If predicted by the design or proposed by the Contractor, or requested by the Supervising body requests
additive application, is must have an attest on quality and harmlessness to concrete by a certified institute.
Requested additives shall be applied in a way and in quantity as prescribed by producer for specific use.
Investor may request quality testing for concrete prepared with additives, which is built in structures.
Calculation and payment of additives is done in accordance with actually spent quantity.
Concrete preparation and control
Dosage of material composing concrete is performed exclusively by weight. Measurement tolerance can
be within 2% limit.
Concrete mixing shall be exclusively mechanical, with mixers of required capacities. Manual concrete
mixing is not normally allowed. At water dosing, prior aggregate humidity should be taken in
consideration.
If the Contractor purchases concrete from the other companys concrete plant, it is obliged to ask for and
to obtain consent of the Supervisor. Supervisor shall undertake control of conditions under which
concrete is produced, and give or deny this consent.
Contractor shall submit for the Supervisor's approval each concrete composition document. Approval can
be withdrawn at any time, if required quality and class of concrete is not obtained.
Mixing time should be optimal to enable completely mixed homogenous mixture but without segregation
of aggregate with concrete.
Before starting concrete production, mixing machine must be clean to avoid that the mixture gets polluted
with old concrete and other dirt.
Concrete plant must be equipped with all required fractions and equipment for precise dosage of concrete
component. Concrete cubes compression testing is done upon Supervisor's request. Depending on
structure type, some other concrete properties are demanded: resistance to freezing, water absorption,
resistance to braking, adhesion time etc. Contractor is obliged to conduct all required testing and to
confirm requested concrete quality with appropriate attests.
Transportation of concrete

2007

Page 170 of 240

Transportation means for concrete transportation and moving must not cause segregation and pollution of
concrete mixture. Tank for concrete must be washed, so each new delivery is transported in clean
transportation mean.
In case that some transportation means or way of transportation cause concrete mixture segregation, the
contractor is responsible for removal of all such causes immediately.
Transportation time plus time of concrete setting, must be at least one hour shorter than time required for
concrete hardening to start.
During transportation, concrete must be protected from sun, frost and rain.
Concrete setting
While unloading concrete its segregation must be taken care of, so the concrete can properly fill up the
formwork and cover reinforcement. Concrete setting is done exclusively mechanically, with vibrators of
optimum power and rotation velocity.
Vertical and horizontal working extensions must be performed on places and in a way as predicted in the
concrete design.
Supervising body can at any time suspend concrete setting in case that any work phase is conducted
improperly. Work continuation will be allowed after discovered defects are removed.
After formwork removal, Contractor shall clean a concrete surface of wire, bumps and all other things
sticking out of concrete. Holes and other irregularities noticed shall be reported to the supervising body
and repaired immediately upon the approval.
Formwork
Formwork and scaffolding for concrete setting must be done in accordance with measurements in the
design, firm and stable. Before concrete setting, formwork must be clean, coated with means against
concrete adhesion which are harmless for concrete. While making formwork, anchor boxes, opening
formworks and other elements are to be placed in a concrete according to the design. These elements are
to be placed and fixed properly, geodetically controlled if necessary. They shall not be moved during
concrete setting.
Scaffolding and struts must be stable and immovable, structurally calculated as required.
Generally, formwork with belonging scaffolding is included in concrete works unit prices, by specific
surface of scaffolding for 1 m3 of concrete. It is not calculated and played separately.
If specific surface is changed for more than 0,50 m2 for 1 m3 of concrete, the Contractor has right to
change a price of specific concrete work unit price, according to conditions of contract, and based on
contractual calculative elements.
Reinforcement
Before use, reinforcement must be carefully cleaned from rust, grease and other dirt. Cleaning with acids
is not allowed. Reinforcement banding is done in cold state.
Reinforcement extension is done in accordance with reinforcement drawings, e.g. according to
Supervisor's request, based on the design.
In case that Contractor does not have profiles required by the design, recalculation can be done under
control and with approval of the Supervisor; the Contractor can build in reinforcement available.
Reinforcement placement shall be done in accordance to reinforcement plan. Each profile shall be placed
on the place as designed. All bars are to be present and firmly fixed to each other. Fissured bars must be
removed. Reinforcement must be distanced from a formwork for a designed thickness of protective
concrete layer.
Supervisor must inspect reinforcement and give approval for concrete setting.

2007

Page 171 of 240

Reinforcement unit price includes procurement, transportation, straightening, cleaning, cutting, bending,
bringing to a building site, placement, fixing, welding if required, of reinforcement, as well as distancing
elements, cutting waste.
Calculation and payment are done per 1 kg of reinforcement, depending on type and quality, based on
approved specification and according to masses of built in profiles and mashes that given in tables.

2.

Bricklayer's works

Materials
Construction materials intended to be built in by the Contractor must be new and corresponding to
recognised standards by its dimensions and quality. Non-standard materials can be used only if its quality
is evidenced with recognised and upon supervisor's approval.
Cement must comply with the same conditions like concrete works.
Lime must comply with JUS B.1.020. Slaked lime for bricklaying shall rest for at least 1 month, and 2
months for plastering. Hydrated lime shall rest 3 to 4 days before being used.
Sand can be river sand or grinded sand, and must be clean, without mud, dust and other dirt. For rough
plastering, it can be used a river sand or grinded sand of coarse granulation up to 4 mm. For fine
plastering, it is preferable to use river sand, granulation up to 1 mm.
Solid bricks, hollow bricks, clay blocks of different dimensions, slag blocks and other blocks must by
their dimensions and quality comply with JUS standards. They shall be well baked, without fissures, lime
and saltpeter, and shall have sharp edges with uniform and solid cross-section.
Water must be clean, complying in all with conditions for concrete.
Mortars are prepared according to the description of respective BoQ and Cost estimate item, containing
indication of required mortar type and component ration. Mortar must be plastic and adhesive to of brick
or stone surface.
Cutting grooves and openings
Cutting grooves encompasses grooves up to 5 cm depth for wiring or similar.
Surface concrete demolition is done for the purpose of preparation of new water-tightening layer. In this
case, by picketing a surface concrete layer is removed up to a depth as required in cost estimate. After
concrete demolition, concrete surface shall be splashed with water.
Making openings encompasses openings deeper than 5cm. Making openings is done in bricks and
concrete.
Making grooves is calculated and paid by 1m of groove in concrete or bricks.
Surface demolition is paid by 1m2 of surface.
Making openings is calculated and paid by 1m3 of volume of an opening in concrete or brick, to
dimensions predicted in the project.
Unnecessary demolition is not calculated and paid. Unit price include loading and transportation of waste
material to a city damp.
Masonry works
Material quality for solid bricks shall comply with JUS B.D1.011, for clay blocks JUS B.D1.015, and for
blocks of foam concrete with JUS U.M1.050.
Mortar for bricklaying and plastering shall comply with JUS U.M2.010 i U.M2.012.
Calculation and payment for walls of 7 and 12 cm is per 1 m2 of the wall. For walls thickness over 12 cm,
calculation and payment is done per 1 m3. Unit price shall include procurement and transportation of all

2007

Page 172 of 240

material necessary for bricklaying, mortar preparation, all transports and movement, scaffolding and other
costs.
Plastering
Plastering is done with mortar of required kind, ratio and layer thickness. Before use, mortar must be well
mixed, sand must be screened and clean, and lime and sand shall be of good quality. Before mortar
mixing, the supervisor will inspect quality of components and approve use of the material for mortar
preparation.
Materials for mortar must comply with standards:
Cement JUS B.C1.010., B.C1.011 and B.C1.012
Lime
JUS B.C1.020
Sand
JUS U.M2.010 and U.M2.012
Quality control JUS U.M8.002
Before plastering, on the wall surface to be plastered, joints are to be cleaned up to 1 cm deep. Joints are
to be cleaned from old mortar, unevenness or similar and sprayed with cement. Concrete surfaces are
treated the same way.
Plastering can be done mechanically and manually. Mortar consistency is to be adjusted to application
mode in order to prevent pouring of mortar down the wall surface.
Rough plastering is done with rough screened sand in the layer, thickness of 1,5 to 2,5 cm.
Fine plastering is done with fine sand in the layer, thickness of 0,50 to 1,0 cm.
If the wall is to be covered with ceramic tiles, fine plastering is not done.
Floor base and anti-filtration mortars are done in full layer, with prescribed additive, as required in the
item description, e.g. according to instruction by mixture producer, with smoothing and strewing with
cement until glazed surface obtained or with pargetting.
Calculation and payment are done per 1 m2 of plastering, regardless of quantity, according to description
in the respective item description, including procurement and transportation of necessary material, all
required labour and tools.
Mending of grooves and openings
Mending grooves and openings is done with cement mortar of the ratio 1:1 to 1:3, as described in BoQ.
Appropriate additives shall be added for improvement of applicability and water resistance.
Calculation and payment is done per 1 m' for mending grooves of less than 5 cm depth of and per m3 for
closing with concrete of openings and pipes passages.
Closing cavities in concrete structure is done with fine-grained concrete granulation up to 15m, with
content of cement min. 400 kg/m3, with addition of plasticiser for applicability improvement.
While concreting openings, unit price include also necessary formwork.
Bricklaying with siporex blocks
Bricklaying with siporex is done with blocks 60x25x10/15/20cm. It is done using original masonry glue
SIL Z. Plastering is done with original plastering for siporex.
Production, designing and work performance for siporex elements is regulated by Book of regulations on
technical norms for designing, production and execution of prefabricated elements from non-reinforced
and reinforced cell concrete (porous concrete) Official Journal of SFRJ, No. 14/89. Contractor is
obliged to fully comply with the said regulations.
Price includes procurement, transportation and placement of all elements necessary for proper work
execution. Calculation is done per m3 or m2, depending on wall thickness.

2007

Page 173 of 240

3.

Hydro-insulation works

Hydro-insulation works include floor hydro-insulations. Hydro-insulations with insulation materials are
treated separately.
Classical hydro-insulation
Designed hydro-insulation consists of two layers of hard hydro-insulation, type Biverplast PF 40
(Bitumenka) or similar and one cold coat of bitulit. Biverplast PF 40 (JUS U.MB.300) is composed of
polyester felt and polymer-bituminous mass, protected with polyethylene foil on both sides.
Placement is done with gas-burner and by gluing with hot bituminous mass with overlapping of 10 cm.
Lifting up against the walls up to 10 cm is to be done in one piece with horizontal part.
Bitulit coat is applied on a clean and dry surface. Application is done with brush, paint roller or by
spraying.
Any applied hydro-insulation has to contain all designed layers of required quality, according to design
technical description and description in cost estimate.
Contractor is obliged to execute all layers as defined in the design.
Contractor has a right to suggest modification or innovation of the solution designed if it guarantees same
or higher quality, on which the decision is made by the Supervisor.
Calculation and payment are done per 1 m2 of hydro insulation with all layers designed, according to
description of the respective item in cost estimate.
Standards on technical conditions for hydro-insulations are JUS.U.F2.024, DIN 4102, DIN 52123,
JUS.U.M3.200-248.
Insullation with hydro-insulation mortar
The design predicts plastering of the basement walls with cement-mortar for repair - SIKA MUR.
SIKA MUR is cement mortar for drying the wall up. It is delivered in bags per 25kg. Spenditure is 15
kg/m2 per cm of layer thickness.
Before application of SIKA MUR plaster it is necessary to remove old plaster up to the lowest base.
Height of the surface to be prepared is triple wall thickness. It is necessary to clean the wall and wash it
under pressure (180-200 bar). In case of peeling of, cracking, occurrence of tar, salt etc. a technical
service of the producer should be contacted.
SIKA MUR mortar is applied in two layers; first application is with self-adhesive spraying and than a
rough layer. The layer to be sprayed is made of liquid mortar (app. 3,8 l/ bag). Thicker layer must be
applied as soon as the sprayed layer is hardened. Thicker layer consists of creamy mortar (3,2; 3,6 liters
of water / bag), applied by trowel, distributed with a wooden smoother and finaly scraped with smoother (
metal can not be closed because of filling in the pores). Total thickness of second layer must be minimum
2 cm at any point. Surface finish is obtained with smoother and steam permeable coat (silicate and solvent
paint).
If a layer thickness is to be more than 2 cm, the above layers are to be applied several times.
Mortar must not be applied at the temperatures lower than +5.
While working, there must not be draft or direct exposure to sun.

2007

Page 174 of 240

4.

Thermal insulations

Roof thermal insulation is done above suspended ceiling in pitched roof surface, between structural
elements. Thermal insulation is made of mineral wool, 18 cm thick, and heat conductivity according to
DIN 18165 and of flame resistance according to JUS.U.040 and way of application according to DIN
18165 WL-w.
Placement is done from inside, including installation of necessary sub-structure. Over a thermal
insulation, steam-permeable/water-impermeable foil is to be placed. From bellow there is to be placed a
vapour barrier PVC sheet, as a protection against humidity.
All is to be done according to regulations and conditions by Manufacturer. Price includes all material
including sub-structure.
Standards for thermal insulation DIN 18165.1 and DIN 18165.2
5.

Tinsmiths works

Tinsmiths works include production and placement of roofing, as well as all attic and gable flashings,
bordering roof flashing and skirting, as well as finalisation of different passages through the roof and
elsewhere.
For tinsmiths works, self-integrative sheet metal, 0.6 mm-thick shall be used, quality of which is
accordance with JUS.C.B4.031 and JUS C.E4.020, including accessories such as 70% tin rivets, hooks,
flanges, screws, wire etc.
Connections for sheet metal are screws with neoprene washer at a distance of 20-25 cm.
Joints are to be perpendicular to eave. While brazing, parts to be brazed are to be cleaned with abrasive
paper or file and degreased with hydrochloric acid or sal ammoniac. Overlapping that is brazed has to be
1.5 to 3 cm wide. Overlapping has to be splashed with warm water after brazing.
Hooks and flanges are of flat iron, profile 6/25 mm.
Roofing inclination is to be exactly according to the project. While flashing attic walls, higher and lower
parts of the walls or similar, sheet metal are fixed with screws to a wall. Connection between wall and a
screw is to be sealed with silicone putty. Sheet metal window sills are to be at the distance of 4 cm from
the facade. Sheet metal is to be hammered to the window frame at each 20 cm.
Ventilation pipes are to be at least 50 cm above roof surface.
Other tinsmiths staructures are to be performed with a material as designed and regulated by rules of
profession.
Calculation and payment of new joinery is done per 1 m1, 1 m2 or per piece, whatewer required in BoQ.
Unit price includes all required labour, material, transportation and moving.
6.

Locksmith's works
Generals

Before start of locksmith's work, the Contractor is obligated to work out detailed contractor's drawings,
descriptions and to prepare samples of materials and models (upon request) before approval of material
and start of works. The Contractor provides detailed contractor's drawings according to drawing and
descriptions of metalwork schemes and for all possible unclearness consult the Designer i.e. the
Supervisor. Upon approval of the drawing and samples, a permit for start of work shall be given to the
Contractor.

2007

Page 175 of 240

Aluminium metalwork
All exterior metalwork is specified as aluminium by design made of architectural aluminium sections type
SCHUCO or similar. Anodized coat is in natural colour of aluminium. ALL SECTIONS OF EXTERIOR
METALWORK MUST HAVE BROKEN THERMAL BRIDGE.
All items with glass will be separately processed. Exterior items are vitrified with thermopan glass
4+16+4 mm. In items which are not vitrified completely, infilling should be made of aluminium sheet
with infilling of thermo panels. Hardware is to be first-class by designer's choice.
Interior aluminium items are made of aluminium architectural sections Type SCHUCO or similar.
Vitrification with lamistal glass with transparent foil between glasses. In items which are not vitrified
completely, infilling should be made of aluminium sheet with infilling of thermo-panels. Hardware is to
be first-class by designer's choice.
Dimensions and descriptions of all items are to be according to schemes. Abstracting with all
elements, delivery and placing are included in the price
The Contractor is obligated to take clear openings and other measurements for each item in-place.
Standards for al. sections are DIN 1055 i DIN 4108.
Standards for al. sheets are DIN .S.10.2.
Steel metalwork
Sheet metal structures are made of steel box sections with appropriate joining material, gas or electric-arc
welding, according to schemes in the design. Material predicted by design can be changed only with
agreement of the Designer or the Supervisor.
The Contractor is obligated to take clear opening and other measurements for each item in-place.
After jointing of elements, complete structure is to be cleaned of rust and other impurities, by sand
blasting or by other treatment and realize thereupon anticorrosion protection. Anticorrosion protected
structures should be delivered at the site and stored so that there is neither structure deflection nor damage
of anticorrosion protection. After assembly, it is necessary to renovate anticorrosion protection and paint
the structure with oil paint for metal in two coats in the natural colour of aluminium.
Calculation and payment of sheet metal structures are to be done apiece, as defined in appropriate item of
cost estimate, and include taking measurements in-place, fabrication or repair, all necessary material and
hardware, anticorrosion protection, complete transports and placing, as well as painting in two coats with
oil paint.
Fire protection items
Fire door made of steel section clad with aluminium plasticized sheet, with fire resistance F=90 min.
Vitrification of the door is made with safety glass, with same fire resistance as the other parts of the
door. Colour is by designer's choice.
Door finish hardware is first-class satisfying all requested characteristics of fire resistance. Door is
to be smoke proof. (according to producer's instructions).
Door is to be equipped with self-closing mechanism, corresponding to requested conditions of fire
resistance.
All dimensions and characteristics are according to schemes and descriptions.
All doors should be with appropriate certificates.
Standards: DIN 55928, DIN EU 29692, DIN 8563, JUS.U.J1.160, JUS.K.M4.500, M.B1.151,
M.B2.021.22

2007

Page 176 of 240

Balustrades and handrails

New balustrades in the building are made of the I class inox elements weather-proof and with chemical
durability. It consists of shaped elements according to the scheme. Supporting elements are anchored,
over inox base and screws, on specified base made of concrete or in the wall made of brick.
All welds and joints are to be done properly so that they are not visible. All do according to schemes and
descriptions.
Fabrication of all elements, transport and placing are included in the price.
Standards for inox DIN.EN 1088.
7.

Joinery work

All preliminary works should be beforehand realized, and the joinery is to be made of clean and dry I
class timber, with dimensions for specific wall opening, without knots and fissures, with quality
according to JUS D. C1 041 for fir wood, JUS D. C1 040 for pinewood and JUS D.C1.021 for oak wood.
Finished joinery is to be processed in a workshop according to the description in the design.
The joint of some parts is to be done precisely and solid, with peg or steel nail and glued with water
resistant glue. The supervisor has a right to control joinery works in the workshop.
During the placement of the frame, all wings are to be placed in the frame and after fixing of the frame,
easy movable and precisely scribed. The distance between the wing and the frame per height is to be up to
3 m, and leaning of the wing in the frame is to be without distance.
The frame parts lean on the wall are to be coated with decay preventing agent.
On each part, item is to be designated according to the scheme of joinery.
Fixing of the frame in the wall is to be done with wire and nails and after that sealing with
"purpen" foam.
Calculation and payment shall be realized according to the contract price apiece, with fabrication ( or
supply ), delivery and placing, with built-in glass and all necessary works and material.
Joiner's items are situated inside of the building at the entrances in the offices and toilets.
Doors are solid, single-wing or double-wing (according to the scheme) made of dry lumber (pinewood or
fir wood) with appropriate dimensions.
Interior of the door wing is filled with paper honeycomb. The door wing is lined with ultrales
boards which are veneered with beech veneer and finally painted according to the scheme.
Door frame made of pine coated with paint by designer's choice.
Fanlight is made of sheet glass 5mm thick.
At items identical to the existing items is predicted a footer with width of partition wall.
Doors in the toilets without natural ventilation, should have specified openings.
Standards JUS.D.E1.011-040, JUS.D.E5. 193, JUS.U.J1. 160, JUS.D.E8.235, JUS.E8.201-206.
Standards valid for hardware JUS.K.M4.500, M.b1.151, M.B2.021, DIN EN ISO 9001.
8.

Parquet flooring

Parquet flooring is to be made according to conditions and requests. The sub-floor is to be prepared, plane
and dry.
Type of parquet is oak wood dimension 450x50x22mm. The skirting dim. 2x8mm.
The skirting is to be fixed with screws at necessary distances and openings should be closed with caps.
After lay woodblocks in adhesive, the grinding with cleaning and scumbling in three coats should
be realized.
2007

Page 177 of 240

In the rooms, where there is damaged or incorrect lay parquet, is predicted partial change with
grinding and varnishing.
9.

Partitions and coverings of gypsum-carton boards

Gypsum partitions and coverings

Performing of partitions of gypsum-carton boards are done on prepared bases.
The base must be clean and dry, and in the room should be normal conditions with temperature not under
5 C.
The partitions consist of steel galvanized substructure of UW and CW sections as main
construction system.
It is first realized the assembly of horizontal UW sections on floor and ceiling supporting structure
(before the assembly of sections, it is necessary to stick insulating tape) with screws at distance of
max 80cm. Than on lateral sides, in same way, it is necessary to assembly CW sections. At each 60
cm it is put in one vertical CW section. Dimensions of substructure are 100 mm.
After the placement of gypsum boards in two layers (2x12,5mm), from one side, with screws, are
pulled installation elements through the walls. After that, the walls are filled with mineral wool, 10
cm thick. The other side of the wall is also covered double. During the covering, it is necessary to
take care that the joints of the covering in first and second layers do not cross.
Working of joints is to be according to the producer's instructions ( with mass for filling of joints
and tape for their strengthening). Use the boards so that manufactured ends of boards (with thin
edges) are used on joints.
Around the door and the other openings is to be used reinforced steel UA sections.
All exterior angles shall be finished with angle profiles covered with joint filling mass and tape.
Work the walls from the floor to ceiling supporting structure for the purpose of acoustic insulation
with filling along the all height.
All walls, after preparations, are painted with semi-dispersive paint in two coats.
Water-resistant coverings in toilets are made of water-resistant boards, and all rest elements are as at
standard walls.
All do in according to the producer's drawings, regulations and requests.
Standards DIN 1055 T1, DIN 18180, JUS.U.J1.090, DIN 4102.
Acoustics DIN 4109, DIN 52212, DIN 52210.
10.

Suspended ceilings

Suspended ceiling is to be used in part of rooms. It is indicated in drawings where is to be used and
what type of the ceiling will be used.
Modular ceiling
Ceiling system is with visible substructure in grid 600x600mm. There are two types of horizontal
supporting sections. T section of dimension 24mm serving as a main supporting structure and L
section as edge supporting and final element.
The supporting structure is suspended with standard hangs which have some elements for height
adjustment. After the fittings of hangs, the structure is levelled.
In the grid, standard gypsum boards are fitted with mineral fibre and texture by designers choice. During
the fitting of elements (lamps, loud-speakers and similar) take care of additional processing around
elements and possible placing of additional battens.

2007

Page 178 of 240

Fire protection B1 according to DIN 4102

Sound absorption DIN EN 20354.
Thermal conductivity DIN 52612
Humidity resistance until 90% relative air humidity.
Suspended ceiling of monolithic gypsum-carton boards
It is realized on standard galvanized metal substructure. It consists of standard substructure of CD and UD
sections placing horizontally so that make grillage at span of 1,0x0,5m. On crossing places, the
connecting is made with special type joints. The structure grillage is suspended with type anchoring hangs
with spring and wire adjusted suspension.
On levelled substructure are placed gypsum-carton boards, thickness 12,5mm and fixing with
screws for substructure.
On joints with vertical elements (walls) is predicted type L section.
Process joints of the boards according to the producer's instructions and paint with semi-dispersive paint
in two coats.
Standards DIN. 1818, DIN 4108 and DIN 52212, DIN 4102, JUS.C.C3.202,203,204.
11.

Flooring
PVC flooring

It is designed in the hall and the stores. With foam sub-floor and wearing course (standard EN 651)
Characteristics of material are high sound absorption (because of foam sub-floor with dense cells that
sop) and impact absorption. Antistatic is to be abrasion-resistant with wearing course of 0.65mm,
depression resistant and simple for maintenance.
For stairways special designed final elements with antislide edges of tread.
The socle is to be finalized with skirting. PVC floor in multi shades by designers choice.
For the laying, it is necessary to realize some preliminary works (levelling mass and primer) requested
from the producer and all included in the price. If PVC flooring is to be realized on the place of existing
floor finishing made of parquet, the same should be covered by OSB boards in two layers and cross with
necessary impregnation.
The sub-floor is to be dry, smooth and level. The sub-floor humidity is to be under 75%RH. Minimum
temperature in the room is between 18-26C. Minimum temperature of the sub-floor is 10C. The sealing
is realized by acrylic glue. Joints are processed by hot welding with PVC electrode.
Sound insulation is 20dB.
Antistatic 2kV 10 10 ASF class 2.
Antislide R10
12.

Ceramics

The flooring and wall lining of toilets are predicted with Ist class ceramic tiles in ceramic glue in the
colour by designer's choice. Dimensions of tiles min. 20x20 cm, and joints 3mm. The unit price includes
pointing and preparation of skirting if necessary.
The tiles are placed on the floor in designed slope to the gulley, and in the rooms without gulley is to be
horizontals.
The joints should be filled 100% and after laying and pointing it is necessary to clean all.
The laying of tiles is processed according to the system of levelled joints ( joint on joint)

2007

Page 179 of 240

In the case of repair of existing toilets, it is necessary to cut chases all existing tiles together with ceramic
glue and to clean the base.
Standards JUS.U.F2.011, DIN EN 176 B1, UNI 10467. JUS B.D1.300-301.
13.

Painting

Painting of walls and ceilings with semi-dispersive paint is to be according to standard JUS F2.013.
technical conditions for the painting process, requests in technical description and appropriate item of the
cost estimate.
If the surface, which is to be painted, consists of old and new mortar, the surface smoothness is obtained
by smoothing in multi layers. The painting is realized minimum in two coatings.
Calculation and payment are to be realized per 1 m2 of painted surface, with all necessary preliminary
works.
The Contractor is obligated to provide certificates of quality of placed material.
Surface treatment of existing fixed walls, processed with rolloplast, is to be repaired partially by new
rolloplast, and than all paint with semi-dispersive paint 2x.
The painting is realized in total according to standard JUS U.F2.012. Technical conditions of the painting,
description in technical repport in the design and description of item in cost estimate. The painting
includes cleaning of metal surface until obtained metal shine, anticorrosive protection and painting with
oil paint for the metal authorized by the supervision.
Calculation is realized per 1 kg or 1 m2. of painted metal structure and all according to description in
appropriate item of cost estimate. The Contractor is obligated to provide certificates of quality of placed
material.
Painting with a high-quality paint is done in a following way for smooth walls: apropriate medium coat is
applied first; final paint is applied with sprayer on dry wall, in two coats, wet on wet, preventing pouring
down the walls due to too much paint.
Standards: JUS.U.F.2.012-013, JUS.C.T7.100-397, DIN. 53778, 53778W, 53778S.
15.

Elevators and platforms for people with disabilities

Elevator in the existing elevator shaft

One elevator is in the existing elevator shaft, presently not used for that purpose. The elevator has stations
from the basement to the attic and has the following characteristics:
Capacity..1000 kg/13 persons,
Speed..1 m/s,
Number of stations/entrances..6/5 on the same side/1 under 90o,
Elevation height..22 m,
Control: ..................Simplex, collecting in both directions
Drive type: ......... Asynchronous, frequency regulated
engine, no reducer,
Electricity connection... 3x380V/220V - 50 Hz,
Machine room... No machine room,
Cabin door (width x height). Automatic telescopic,
900x2100 mm, wings covered with
brushed stainless steel, with
infra-red screen, frequencyregulated,
Shaft door (width x height)..Automatic telescopic,
900x2100 mm, stainless steel wings
Cabin (width x length x height) 1100mm x 2100mm x 2300mm,
Sides of brushed stainless steel,

2007

Page 180 of 240

indirect overhead fluorescent

lighting, overload device, granite
floor, inox handle and a mirror at the rear side,
digital display of floor and direction indicator in
the cabin and at the main station, at the other
stations - further movement direction arrows
with sound signal for stopping, ventilator,
interphone connection between reception,
machine room and the cabin, ventilator,
emergency lighting, cabin control board with a
key for priority ride, device for bringing the
cabin to the nearest station in case of power cut
of,
Dimensions of shaft (width x height) 1800x3000 mm, bricklayer plastered
Shaft pit.................Depth 1400 mm,
Distance between the last stations
floor to the top of the shaft ................3600 mm,
Bill of Quantities contains all civil works and electrical installations for the elevator installation. It is
Contractor's obligation to check whether an input parameters by which the shaft has been constructed
corresponds to the elevator to be installed. Design of elevator is an oobligation of the selected
supplier, as well as the works required by technology of the elevator, which are not contained in
BoQ within the Main design on reconstruction and rehabilitation of the cantonal and municipal
court in Sarajevo.
Contractors responsibility is to test the elevator and to deliver requires attests and use permit
issued by an authorised body.
Elevator in new elevator shaft
One elevator is with the new elevator shaft, located next to the entrance from enoina St The Shaft is
made of steel profiles covered with panels made of steel zinc-coated sheet metal, coated with plastic, with
polyurethane filling.
Elevator has stations from ground floor to the third floor and has the following characteristics:
Capacity ..800 kg/10 persons,
Speed ..1 m/s,
Number of stations/entrances 4 on the same side,
Elevation height .14m,
Control.. ....................Simplex, collecting in both directions
Drive type .. ....Asynchronous, frequency-regulated
Engine, no reducer,
Electricity connection ..3x380V/220V - 50 Hz,
Machine room ......no machine room,
Cabin door (width x height)..Automatic central,
900x2100 mm, wings of stainless
steel with infrared screen, frequencyregulated,
Shaft door (width x height). Automatic central, 900x2100 mm
wings of stainless steel,
Cabin (width x length x height)..1350mm x 1400mm x 2300mm,
Sides of brushed stainless steel, indirect
overhead fluorescent lighting, overload device,
granite floor, chromium-coated handle, cabin
control board with a key for priority ride,

2007

Page 181 of 240

overload device, digital display of floor

indication in the cabin and main station,
direction indicator at all stations with sound
signal for stopping, ventilator, interphone
connection between cabin and reception,
emergency lighting, device for bringing the
cabin to the nearest station in case of power cut
of,
Dimensions of shaft (width x height).....2000x1900 mm, concrete,
Shaft pit ...............1400 mm,
Distance between the last station
floor to the top of the shaft ............... 3600 mm,
Bill of Quantities contains all civil works and electrical installations for the elevator installation. It is
Contractor's obligation to check whether an input parameters by which the shaft has been constructed
corresponds to the elevator to be installed. Design of elevator is an obligation of the selected supplier,
as well as the works required by technology of the elevator, which are not contained in BoQ within
the Main design on reconstruction and rehabilitation of the cantonal and municipal court in
Sarajevo.
Contractors responsibility is to test the elevator and to deliver requires attests and use permit
issued by an authorised body.
Platforms for people in wheel chairs
1.

Vertically-movable elevating platforms for persons in wheel chairs, is for lifting from the level of
the enoina St. up to the level of the tambour, with minimum platform dimensions 1400 x 800
mm, minimum capacity 350 kg (i.e. VIMEC type EP ).
Speed is 0,06m/sec. Power is 0,6kW. Elevation mechanism is placed in reinforced concrete
trough, 9cm deep. Elevation height is app. 75 cm. The price comprisesall additional equipment,
as well as installation of additional equipment and installation of mechanisms, with a box and
controls. Platform floor is made from inox ribbed plate. At the side, predicted is a handrail with
comand buttons. Paltform capacity is minimum 350 kg.
Contractor is obliged to deliver a complete design with description of all elevator elements,
prior to the work comencement, as well as to submit all necesary documentation and attests
for Supervisor's aproval.

2.

Platforms for persons in wheel chairs, movable along the slope, from the tambour level (next to
the enoina St. Entrance) up to the ground floor level 830 x 700 mm, minimum capacity of 200
kg.
Speed is 0,6m/sec. Power is 0,08kW. The platform moves along the inclined rails. Elevation
height is app. 140 cm. The price comprisesall additional equipment, as well as installation of
additional equipment and installation of mechanisms, with a box and controls. At the side,
predicted is a handrail with comand buttons. Paltform capacity is minimum 200 kg.
Contractor is obliged to deliver a complete design with description of all elevator elements,
prior to the work comencement, as well as to submit all necesary documentation and attests
for Supervisor's aproval.
16.

Final Roofing

Roofing is made with sheet metal and include thinsmith's works. Apart the mentioned, constructed are
polycarbonate light wells.
Pannel roofing light wells of extruded polycarbonate

2007

Page 182 of 240

Roofing is done over the structure with wood boarding. Fixing of polycarbonate panel roofing to
aluminium sub-staructure type AKRAPAST Italia or similar, is made with screws and tightening, all in
acordance with Producer's instructions.
Panels are made of cold extruded high quality polycarbonate. They are aboundantly light permeable and
very strong. They have a high UV radiation resistance duer to special surface. Pannels are 50cm wide.
This span is joined with joining profiles, also made of plastc, what makes joints more stronger.
Rectangular honey-comb in quadriple structure, 25mm thick gives good rigidity and excelent and
excelent coeefficients of heat transfer (K= 1,65W/m2K).
Pannels are low flamable, according to DIN-u 4102 B1. Under joining profiles there are placed steel
profiles cpated with protective PVC coat.
Water-tightening is obtained through screwing pannels to profiles. Also, joints are providing thermal
breaks.

TECHNICAL CONDITIONS FOR EXECUTION OF INTERIOR WATER SUPPLY AND

SEWAGE

Preparatory measures
Contractor is required to fully comply with aproved design. Also, contractor is required to compare the
design of installations with real field situation on construction site prior to commencing the work annd, if
needed, to clarify any issues with the supervising body. Contractor is required to report to the supervisory
body prior to and potential changes, while the supervisory body is required to report to water supply and
sewage system designer on any intended changes.
Jointing
Jointing of pipes as well as jointing of pipes and custom-shaped jointing pieces, i.e. armature pieces. has
to be carried out very carefully. In jointing process for diameter of indoor pipe, diameter must not be
narrowed with ending jointing pieces, part of armature pieces, textile for jointing, welding materials, or
on any other way. Also, pipes must not have deformities in process of belting.
Connection of pipes to wall facilities
Pipes should be connected on walls, ceilings and floors with connection pieces, or with hangers, on
distances depending of diameter and type of pipe, and insulated with prefabricated polyurethane
insulation under the ceiling, but in the walls with "filc"textil and plastic band.
Armatures
Water armature pieces should be viewed and checked, carefully, in workshop, and after that they can goto
process of installment. Installment of armature pieces should be carried out very preciously, with taking
into account of facts of easy handling and esthetic impressions.
Velves, mixer and other armature pieces, which will be used by handling, should be connected to walls,
ceilings or floors veryhardly, with wall, ceiling or floor tiles on connection places.
Sanitary items
All sanitary items should be produced of I class ceramic.
Wall taps one hand batteries for cold and hot water should be according to the highest level European
standards, with five (5) year liability defect guaranties.
All metallic sanitary items should have nickel layer, and, also, should be produced by well known and
respectable manufacturer.

2007

Page 183 of 240

Mnufacturer of sanitary items should have references for public cuilding objects. Contractor has an
obligation to offer for review sanitary items by three (3) manufacturers, with samples and commercial
materials, before final selection by Project Manager.
Installation of sanitary items must be conducted in a neat, clean and precise manner taking into account
good usage and esthetic aspect of the whole.
Sanitary items are to be fastened to the walls with plastic or metal fixing items. Items installed in a
consoles manner must be resistant to 100 kg loading even at the weakest spots.
Sanitary items to be installed at the following heights - unless stipulated otherwise by the work
description are as following:
- Wash-stand, front edge
80 cm
- Shelve above the wash-stand
125 cm
- Mirror, up to the half way
155 cm
- Towel holder
75 cm
- Wall drainpipe
100 cm
- Kitchen wash/stand
85 or 90 cm
- Kitchen drainpipe, front edge
70 cm
- Water tank, highrise installation, bottom
200 cm
- Toilet paper holder
80 cm
- Wall toilet bowl, front edge
65 cm
Testing of installation
Completed but still non-insulated and, also, opened installation network must be tested against
impermeability and functionality prior to a hand-over. Water supply pipeline network-unless the legal
framework stipulates otherwise - will be exposed to a probationary pressure, which is twice as high as
working pressure, but at least 12 bars through 30 minutes. Sewage network is to be tested in such a way
that is filled with water either fully or partly, with temporary stoppage of drainpipes and openings.
Testing is to be conducted in the presence of contractor, supervisory body and representative of public
utility water supply company, i.e. public utility sewage company, about which there will be prepared
minutes of meetinng, as report part. Testing costs are to be born by contractor. Only floowing
successfully completed testing, the pipe lines can be wrapped, heat isolated or isolated for some other
purpose, drainpipes can be closed and manhole ditches covered.
Contractor's obligations
Contractor has an obligation to bear all costs of removal any shortcomings and any defects occurring
within the liability defect guaranty time period.
Supervisory body can calculate only used amounts of material. All materials that the supervisory body
does not accept as illegal or incorrect must be promptly removed from the constructions site.
Contractor is required to fully prepare installation in cooperation with other contractors for the facilities
construction.
Also, contractor has and obligation to consider and to discuss, with supervisor body, all unclarified issues.
Before any eventual modification, contractor has an obligation to notify supervision body on time, and to
notify Employer, too.
Installation of pipe lines
Contractor is obliged to check all levels in the design and compare with the accurate levels at the
construction site. When constructing the sewage network, the connection to public pipelines must be
constructed firstly, after that is construction with foundation network and, at the end, construction and
connections with vertical lines with branches.

2007

Page 184 of 240

All horizontal lines are to be laid down leaning toward the lowest drainage spot. Should there be more of
them it must be taken into account. Curving of galvanized pipes must not be conducted in either warm or
cold state; Pipes must not be laid through the walls at angle but vertically on the wall surface.
Pipes in soil
All pipes in soil are to be laid down in a layer of sand, which will cover pipes from all sides with layer of
thickness of 5 cm. sufficiently thick layer of sand needs to be put on the bottom of trench of soil
level and pressed adequately. Humus, construction material surplus and stones must not be used to cover
the trench.
Installation of pipes in trenches can commence only after verification by supervisory boby has verified
that trench had been prepared in an appropriate manner and according to the design.
Trench must not be closed until a supervisory body has checked the conduction i.e. until the installation
has been tested.

Pipes in construction
It is not allowed to build pipes too hardly into walls or other constructions. Opening for pipes through
construction must be sufficiently big, while the space between pipes and constructions must be filled with
plastic material to prevent damaging of pipes. Water supply pipes will be protected through construction
walls with protection pipe with diameter that is 40 mm bigger than external diameter of water supply
pipe, while space in between will be filled with hemp in bitumen or permanently elastic putty.
Sewage pipelines must not be too hardly built into walls, while the space in between will be filled with
clay, i.e. hemp and tarmac or other permanently elastic putty, that should be installed there in a danger of
water passage into facilities.
Potentally unpredcted excavating of walls and other constructions can be conducted only if previoulsy
approved by a suppervisory boby.

Protection of pipes
Water supply pipelines must not go through walls of chimney and ventilation canals, through ventilation
channels, bellow floors, under the toilet floor or pissoir or anywhere else where they can be exposed to
pollution, freezing or corrosion.
At crossing points, pipes have to be protected. When crossing with sewage pipelines, water supply
pipeline must be on a higher level position, and the space in betwee must be filled with clay that is, at
least, 20 cm thick. If the distance is smaler, pipeline will have to go through protection pipe as when
pipeline goes through the wall.
On points exposed to freeze, pipelines must be heat isolated. Isolation needs to be carefully prepared and
lines must not be closed until the supervisory body has checked them. The same applies to the noise
isolation. Damaged isolation must be carefully fixed in the process of work implementation. Pipeline
must be temporarily closed when finishing the work in order to prevent against pollution, being filled
with material or damaged.

TECHNICAL CONDITIONS FOR EXECUTION OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

General provisions
1. These general technical conditions are part of main design for electrical installations and as such
are obligatory for contractor.
2. Technical conditions for defining and installing of electrical equipment depending on external
affects are defined in standard JUS N.B2.751 and JUS N.B2.752.
2007

Page 185 of 240

3. All designed and installed electrical equipment must comply with electricity designed for
installations.
4. Designed equipment must bear the electricity in exceptional conditions without damage and for
the duration permitted by protection devices.
5. Electrical equipment in installations which was determined based on power of equipment
connected to installation must be set for normal work taking into account factors of load and
intermittence.
6. Electrical equipment in installations must be installled in a way enabling easy control,
maintenance, and access to connections and easy handling. This includes also equipment located
in casings.
7. All devices must have plates marking their purpose fixed to visible places.
8. Technical conditions, directions and colors of management and signal elements have to be
determined according to standards JUS N.A9.003, JUS N.A9.004, JUS N.K5.051, JUS N.K5.052,
and JUS N.K5.056.
9. Insulated conductors and cables must be laid in way that enables easy identification for testing,
maintenance or replacement purposes.
10. Combination of yellow green and blue is used for marking only protection and neutral
conductor JUS N.B2.751 (respectively) and these colors must not be used for any other
conductor.
11. Installation must be done in accordance with technical description in design, according to
attached specifications and drawings and relevant regulations for these installations. In case that
there are no regulation of developed countries or usual solutions of good technical practice
should be applied.
12. Before starting the work and supplying materials contractor must check these documents on the
spot and if it is found that documents have to be changed either technical solutions or selection of
materials, contractor should consult the supervisor and in case of major changes also the designer
and acquire from both written instructions and approval for changes.
13. Conctractor is obliged to maintain a construction diary during installing which will include staff
working on installing, works performed, materials installed and all issues related to installing and
changes if any under the mentioned conditions.
14. For normal course of work employer is obliged to perform all construction preparation works and
secure the room for materials and tools of contractor and provide labor for lager construction
works if any are required during installing.
15. After installations are completed contractor is obliged to perform all testing and measuring of
installations and submit verified results to the employer. If there are defects in installations
contractor is obliged to correct these defects on its own expense.
16. During the whole defects liability period contractor has to correct all defects caused by bad
performance or poor quality of installed materials, without any compensation. The employer must
approve any contingency. Materials used for electrical installations must comply with govering
Yugoslav standards and if there are no standards for specific issue with standards governing in
other countries applying modern technology and all in accordance with provision of governing
laws, first of all Law on standardizing.
17. Acceptance of installations can be done only after all works are completed and testing was
conducted.
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN WORKING AREAS
1. Insulated conductors and cables must be laid and marked for easy identification for testing,
repairs or replacement.
2007

Page 186 of 240

2. Protection conductor (PE) and protection neutral conductor (PEN conductor) are marked with
combination of green and yelow and neutral conductor (N conductor) is marked with light blue.
3. Combination of green and yellow and light blue must not be used for marking of any other kind
of conductor but those mentioned.
4. Marking can be done also the end of conductor near distribution or connection panel, especially
when conductors are not insulated.
5. Protection device must be placed and marked for easy identification of circuit being protected.
6. Protection device must be placed in distribution set (distribution locker, distribution panel,
command panel, distribution boxes, etc.).
7. Schemes, diagrams or tables of LV electrical installation must be placed in spots where there are
several circuits (concentration spots), to mark the nature (type) and contents of circuit (suply
points and number and section of insulated conductors and cables) and characteristics for
identification of protection device, procedure of starting and shutting down, and installing
location and level of insulation.
8. In the distribution block electrical equipment of the same kind of power and/or voltage has to be
installed and grouped but at the same time divided to avoid harmful impacts or mistakes.
9. Insulated conductors and cables must be protected from mechanical, thermal and chemical affects
with proper type of electrical distribution, installing, position or coating.
10. In especially vulnerable spots (e.g. leading insulated conductors and cables through the floor)
additional protection has to be provided, such placing cables in conduits, canals, etc. and applying
adequate protection with casing.
11. Section of neutral conductor must be the same as the section of the phase conductor in single
phase circuit or in pluri - phase circuit where sections of phase copper conductors are smaller
than 16 mm2, and of phase aluminium conductors smaller than 25 mm2.
12. Cross-section of insulated conductors placed and mechanically protected in permanent
electricalinstallations must be not be smaller than 1.5mm2 for copper conductors and not smaller
than 2.5 mm2 for aluminium conductors. This requirement does not include section of conductors
in distribution blocks, lighting devices, household devices and other devices connected to
electrical installations.
13. Connection spot of conductor and other electrical equipment (hereinafter referred to as: the joint)
must be safe and located to enable regular tests.
14. Joint must be secured depending on materials used for conductors and their section.
15. Insulated conductors and cables must not be continued in instalation pipes and canals.
16. Insulated conductors and cables can be joined only in installation boxes; cable couplings or
distribution blocks and joining spot must be insulated with insulation correspodent to type of
electrical distribution. Exceptionally, in walls made of cast concrete elements joining can be done
in boxes of wall connections if there is enough space in these boxes to allow joining spots of the
same circuit.
17. Joint in electrical installations must be calculated to permanently bear permitted electricity of the
conductor.
18. If joint of electrical installation is exposed to heat, mechanical or electrical affects or vibrations,
adequate additional protection measures have to be taken for protection, with thermal insulation
or mechanical protection and for vibrations conductor has to be pliant.
19. At the ends of electrical distribution and especially outlets, inlets and spots where installations
pass through walls and electrical equipment permanent sealing must be done e.g.with cable
fixings).

2007

Page 187 of 240

20. In spots where electrical installations pass through walls in addition to conduits proper
mechanical protection has to be provided (e.g. using bushes, pipes, boxes, etc.).
21. If installations pass through metal structure opening must have round edges.
22. If near electrical installations there are other non-electrical installations distance between them
has to provide safety of all installations.
23. The smallest permitted distance between electrical installations and other installations is 30 mm.
24. If near electrical installations there are heating installations, pipes with warm air or chimey,
electrical installations have to be thermally insulated or placed outside of the heat range.
25. Electrical installations must not be placed under non-electric installations with possibility of
condensation of water of other liquids.
26. Metal parts of installations (e.g. coupling, etc.) exposed to water or condenstation must be
protected from corrosion on both inside and outside have drain for condensed liquid.
27. If electrical installations are placed on walls the smallest permitted distance between installation
elements and wall is 5 mm.
28. Electrical installations of low voltage must not be placed in the same locker or pipe or near
installation with higher voltage if there is no insulating divider between two installations
providing protection from testing voltage of installation with higher voltage.
29. Only conductors of one circuit can be placed in one installation pipe or canal, with the exception
of condutors of management and auxilary circuits.
30. Several circuits must not be lead through one pluri-core cable, with the exception of conductors
of management and auxilary circuits.
31. Location of electrical installations must provide that in case of malfunction they are not a threat
to enviroment.
32. Distribution boxes for cables or conductors (in installation pipes) laid under mortar must be of
insulation material or metal with insulation lining or cable fixings of insulation material.
33. For fixing of installations means and procedures not causing deformation nor damages to
insulation can be applied, such as: plastering, clips of insulation material, adjusted to the shape of
the cable, gluing or nailing with nails with inserting piece of insulation material, etc.
34. Cables laid right next to mortar and in the wall must be covered with mortar at least 4 mm thick
along the whole length. Exceptionally, cables do not have to be covered with mortar if they are
laid in holes in attics and walls of concrete or similar material not supporting burning.
35. Cables and installation conductors laid in installation pipes in the wall or cables laid right next to
mortar and under mortar must be lead vertically and/or horizontally, to be parallel to edges of the
room.
36. For horizontal laying cables and installation conductors (in installations pipes) are lead at a
distance of 10 to 110cm from the floor and 200 cm from the floor to the ceiling.
37. For vertical laying cables and installation conductors (in installation pipes) distance from edges
of doors and windows must be at least 15 cm.
38. Paths of cables supplying fixed water heaters must follow the axis of the water heater.
39. Oblique laying of cables and installation conductors (in installation pipes) is permitted in ceiling
but not in walls.
40. Laying cables on the wall is permitted only if cable has insulation of thermoplastic materials with
filling and coating, if it is laid on wall clips and if there is additional protection from mechanical
damage 2 m from the floor.

2007

Page 188 of 240

41. Distribution boxes and other appliances placed on the wall for cable laying in the previous point
must have sealed cable fixings and degree of protection at least IP 5X defined for damp premises
and proper degree of protection defined for other premises. (According to JUS N.A5.070).
42. Cables without filling, like cables type PP/R, must be laid only in dry premises and under mortar,
and in holes in attics and concrete walls and ordinary non-burning material also without covering
with mortar. These cables must not be lead in bundle, placed in installation canals, nor under
gypsum-paper boards, regardless of the method of fixing and must not be laid on flammable
materials even when covered with mortar.
43. For connection of mobile devices and immobile devices moved for connecting purposes are
exposed to some movements during normal work and also for elements of electrical installations
in double floor flexible cables have to be used. These cables are connected with plug and socket
or boxto permanent connection (fixed joint).
44. In spots placing in flexible installation or metal conduits with internal insulation surface must
protect where mechanical protection is required flexible cables.
45. When placing insulated conductors in installation pipes in walls of non-flammable materials or
concrete installation pipe must have measures that enable easy leading and lazing of conductors
before installing appliances. Metal installation pipe must have internal insulation coating and
proper degree of protection with casing (according to JUS N.A5.070).
46. Installation pipe, if not metal, must be made of burning and not supporting burning material.
47. If insulated conductors are laid in installation canals placed on the wall or ceiling, they have to
meet technical conditions for installation canals. Installation canals must not be placed under
mortar nor covered with concrete.
48. If insulated conductors are laid in installation canals placed in the floor these installation canal
must fit the maintenance of the floor (wet or dry procedure) and technical conditions for
installation canals in the floor.
49. Non-insulated conductors must be placed and protected to prevent touch of parts under voltage
and must be fixed to proper insulators.
50. Cables can be laid underground if they have proper coating protecting from mechanical and other
affects.
51. When laying cables underground depth must not be less than 0.6 m from the top layer of the earth
and not less than 0.8 m under the road. Excaptionally, this does not have to be followed with
lying in rocky terrain.
52. In blocks with openings cables intended for laying underground, heavy rubber cables and
conducting ropes can be laid.
53. In underground protection insulation pipes cables with coating or lead layer can be laid, but they
have to be accessible and replaceable and that pipe is mechanically solid, protected from liquids
and ventilated.
54. In TN supply system excessive power protection device, used as protection from indirect touch
by automatic shutting down of supply, must be placed at the beginning of every circuit and in all
spots where section of conductor is reduced, unless short circuit protection device located after
that spot provides required protection.
55. Basis of fuse type D in excessive power protection devices must be connected in a way that the
central contact is connected to the supply side.
56. Fuse or combination of fuseand inserting piece operated by non-experts must prevent
touching parts under voltage when inserting piece is taken out or replaced.
57. At the distibution block on the outside there must be a plate with the name of manufacturer,
system applied for earthing (TT, TN or others) and other required data about equipment supplied
from that block.

2007

Page 189 of 240

58. Marks and plates must be durable, permanently fixed and adjusted to technical data in technical
instructions, schemes, diagrams and other documents for distribution blocks.
59. If electrical installations in management and distribution blocks are located in non-insulated pipes
when laying such installations touch between that installation and parts under voltage must be
prevented. Ends of non- insulated pipes must be at a distance of at least 20-mm from any part
under voltage and also from clips.
60. If flexible cable has protection conductor that conductor must be marked with green-yellow and if
there is no protection conductor no other conductor can be marked with that color.
61. If flexible cable has neutral conductor and if connection spot determines his position neutral
conductor must be marked with light blue.
62. Light must be placed on the ceiling without possibility of spinning around.
63. Light must not be hanged on supply conductor.
64. Electrical devices with electrodes or non-insulated heaters intended for immersion in water, with
the exception of devices for cathode protection must not be connected to electrical installations.
65. Devices with open red-hot heating elements must not be connected to electrical installations in
premises with danger of fire or touch of flammable materials and holders of red-hot elements.
66. Heating devices where flammable materials are made, treated or stored and where flammable
dust is present must have device for temperature limit or device for heat transfer preventing
dangerous temperatures, or they have to be construed in a way providing that temperature of
casing is below temperature that can cause a fire.
67. Electric devices for heating of flammable liquids to temperature under the burning temperature
must have temperature limiting device, shutting down or decreasing heat before achieving
dangerous temperature, or have to be construed in a way that even with not permitted temperature
increase they are not danger for people and surrounding buildings.
68. Safety systems must work in case of fire.
69. In safety systems protection from indirect touch has to be provided without automatic supply shut
down when first fault occurs.
70. Equipment of safety systems must be distributed in a way enabling regular checks, testing and
maintenance.
71. Auxiliary power supply sources for safety systems must be placed in premises enabling access
only to authorized persons (BA4 and BA5), except equipment supplied from its own batteries.
72. Spot where safety system sources are located (except own batteries for special supply) must be
clean and ventilated so that gases, smoke or vapor from the source cannot reach premises with
persons.
73. Separate independent sources for safety systems supplied from the network are not permitted,
unless provided that at the same two sources cannot be out of order.
74. If there is only one system for supply of safety system it must not be used for other purposes.
75. Circuits of safety systems must be separate from others so that electrical fault or any intervention
or change in one system does not affect the other one.
76. For electrical equipment technical measures for protection from indirect touch according to
Yugoslav standard JUS N.B2.741. are applied, but measure for protection with automatic shut
down is not applied for installation where supply is important and when it is not efficient.
77. Device for protection from overload of conductors and cables, except in defined cases, must be
located at the beginning of every circuit and all spots where conductor power is decreased, unless
overload protection device placed before that spot provides proper protection.

2007

Page 190 of 240

78. Short circuit protection devices must be placed at the beginning of every circuit and all spots
where power of conductor short circuit is decreased, unless short circuit protection device placed
before that spot provides proper protection.
79. Short circuit protection devices can be moved up to 3 m along the protected cable or conductor
provided that cables or conductors before device are laid safe from short circuit and connection to
earth and distant from flammable materials.
80. Excessive power protection device must be placed in every phase conductor except in TT system
without neutral conductor and that device has to shut down the conductor with excessive power
but not all other conductors under voltage.
81. If during supply (e.g. there phase motors) interruption of one phase is a danger shutting down of
other conductors under voltage should be envisaged.
82. Device for over voltage limiting must not be danger for people and surrounding buildings while
being active.
83. In spots where atmospheric over voltage can cause a danger over voltage conductors have to be
placed.
84. PE conductor (protection conductor) must not be set apart nor interrupted in any system.
85. In TN-C systems, PEN conductor (protection-neutral conductor) must be set apart nor
interrupted.
86. In TN-S systems neutral conductor (N-conductor) does not have to be set apart nor interrupted.

PROCEDURE FOR CONTROL AND QUALITY CERTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATIONS
1. All electrical installations must during installing and/or when completed, but before accepted by the
employer, be checked and tested in accordance with provisions of book of regulations about technical
norms for LV electrical installations (Off.gaz.SFRJ, no.53/88).
2. When checking and testing measures for safety of persons and electrical and other equipment have to
be taken.
3. If electrical installations are changed it is required to check and test if changes are in accordance with
provisions of these conditions.
4. Check of electrical installations is done when it is shut down and includes checking:
protection from electric shock,including measuring of distance for protection with stops or
casings,dividers or placing equipment out of the reach,
measures for protection from fire spread from thermal affects of conductor against permitted
power values and permitted voltage drop (if design revision was not done),
selection and adjustment of protection and monitoring devices,
correctness of placing proper supply devices for separating distance,
selection of equipment and protection measures for external impacts,
identification of neutral and protection conductor,
availability of schemes, warning plates and similar information,
identification of circuits, fuses, switches, clips and other equipment,
connection of conductors,
Accessibility and availability of work and maintenance space.
5. General testing must be done in the following order:
continuity of protection conductor and main and additional condutor for equalization of
potential,
resistance of insulation of electrical installations,
protection by electrical separation of circuits,
2007

Page 191 of 240

 resistance of floor and walls,

functionality.
6. If during testing it is found that some provisions od this manuel were not followed testing must be
repeated after defects are corrected.
7. Continuity of protection conductor and conductor for equalization of potential is tested by measuring
electrical impedance, with voltage from 4 to 24 V of direct or alternating curent with the smallest
electricity of 0.2 A.
8. Electrical impedance of insulation of electrical installations must be measured:
between conductors under voltage,taking each two separately (measuring is done during
installing and before equipment is connected),
between every conductor under voltage and ground (phase conductors and neutral conductor
can be connected together),
9. In TN-C system PEN conductor is not considered as conductor under voltage.
10. Electrical impedance of insulation is measured with voltages not smaller than those given in table of
govering book of regulations about technical norms for LV electrical installations (Off.gaz. SFRJ, no.
53/88) and satisfies if every circuit without connected equipment has the value not smaller than the
one given in the table of this book of regulations.
11. Measuring is done with direct current.
12. When circuits include electronic devices measuring is done only between phase and neutral
conductor connected to ground.
13. Electrical separation of parts under voltage from other circuits is checked by testing electrical
impedance of insulation but with connected devices according to article 195 of book of regulations
about technical norms for LV electrical installations (Off.gay. SFRJ, no. 53/88).
14. Disconnecting blocks (command lockers, command panels, management panels, etc.), motor powers,
commands and locking must be tested for functionality to check if they satisfy provisions of book of
regulations about technical norms for LV electrical installations (Off.gaz. SFRJ, no. 53/88) and
Yugoslav standards for this sector, and must have quality certificates as a whole.
15. Protection devices are tested for functionality only when possible to check their correctness, proper
installing and adjustment.
16. If cables are laid in trench after they are laid it must be backfilled. Backfilling must be done in layers
of 30 cm including stuffing to proper state including sprinkling.
17. After cables are laid in the ground geodetic measuring must be done. Geodetic measuring should be
submitted to relevant institution to be included in cadastre of underground installations.
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN OTHER AREAS
Electrical installations required for providing undisturbed function of hydrant network.18
1. Permanent facility used for collecting surface water used for fire extinguishing must have a secondary
power supply source which can be manually started.
2. If external hydrant network contains enough water and pressure is insufficient device for pressure
increasing must be installed and pump should satisfy requirements of 2.5 bar at the outlet.
3. In buildings in danger categories K1, K2, K3, there must be a secondary power supply source for pressure
increasing device.
4. In buildings in danger categories K4 and K5 device for pressure increasing can be supplied through separate
cable from home connection box located on the faade of the building. This conection is considered as
separate power source.

2007

Page 192 of 240

5. If cables for power supply of pressure increasing device pass through spaces which could be threatened by
the fire they have to be protected that they are fireproof for at least 2 hours. This kind of protection must have
quality certificate.
6. Device for pressure increasing in hydrant network must have possibility of daily automatic control of all
pumps and malfunction signal on control spot and if that cannot be provided monthly manual starting
controls device.
TECHNICAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTICAL INSTALLATIONS IN HIGH-RISE
BUILDINGS19
1. Device for ventilation of fire sector is turned on by smoke alarm placed in internal communications
at the highest point below the ceiling. In addition to automatic there must be also possibility for
manual starting of ventilation system.
2. Way to the exit must be clearly marked, if possible with electrical lighting of exit sign.
3. Exit door intended only for evacuation in case of fire must clearly marked as exit door in case of fire,
if possible with electrical lighting of exit sign.
4. If exit door is electricity powered they must be construed that in case of power failure they can be
opened manually.
5. Every exit from the building must be clearly marked with visible signs, if possible with electrical
lighting of exit sign, if exit way is not visible from the premises.
6. For marking the exit no other strong lighting can be used for other purposes and no goods must be
left in the sight line towards the exit sign that could distract attention from the exit.
7. Every door, passage or staircase not used as exit or exit way and could be mistaken for exit must bear
a visible mark showing the purpose of the door, passage or staircase and if possible with electrical
lighting of the mentioned mark.
8. Direction marks must be provide light of at least 50 1x on lightened surface.
9. If for technical or other reasons doors separating fore sectors are open they must have closing
mechanism in case of smoke.
10. Walls of vertical canals for all kinds of installations, including electrical, must be fireproof for 1.5
hours.
11. Access openings for control of installations must be secured with door or tops fireprof for at least 1.5
hours.
12. Horizontal installation canals must be fireproof for 1 hours.
13. All coating of horizontal canals and openings on those canals must of non-burning materials.
14. Length of installations in horizontal canals without fireproof divider preventing spread of fire along
installations is maximum 15m.
15. In addition to installations required for work of elevator only installations for automatic fire
detection in the shaft or the cage can be installed.
16. Elevator must be equipped with devices enabling that in case of fire in fire sector where the elevator
is located, cage is automatically driven to the ground floor and elevator is automatically shut down.
17. Smoke detectors, due to sensitivity, must not be connected with commands for elevator blocking.
18. Commands for operating safety elevator must be designed that cage by pressing special button can
always be driven to ground floor.
19. Safety elevator is used during fire only with special operating key.
20. Walls of the space where transformer is located must be fireproof for at least 3 hours.

2007

Page 193 of 240

21. Above transformer station entrance door there must be a canopy well fixed to the building and at
least 2-m long and width 1 m from each side of the door.
22. In addition to regular i.e.main power supply from the network buildings have to be provided with
secondary source to provide power supply for the following devices:

safety elevator or at least one elevator for beneficiaries of the building,

Lighting of evacuation ways (staircases, halls, access roads, signs for quicker evacuation, etc.),
devices for closing smoke tops in the building,
hydrophore facility and pumps (if there are any in the building),
device for automatic fire detection and alarm,
automatic device for fire extinguishing (if installed),
Devices for ventilation of space tampon zones and electrical devices used for fire protection.

23. If generator with internal combustion is used as secondary power supply source space for that
generator has to be provided with walls and doors fireproof for at least 1.5 hours. This generator
must be automatically started and be capable of providing sufficient power supply for at least 2
hours.
24. Accumulation batteries used as secondary power supply source must be located in separate space
well ventilated and comprising all installations to meet requirements of govering regulations for
explosion protection. Doors on this premise must be fireproof at least 1 hour and they must not create
sparks when opened or closed, i.e.contact surfaces must be covered with non-sparkling material.
Capacity of accumulation batteries must provide power supply for envisaged devices for at least 2
hours.
25. Electrical installations in the building must be designed in a way that in can easily be disconnected
from the ground floor or outside.
26. Distribution panels and other panels with measuring devices are placed in lockers of non-burning
materials and must not be in the way during evacuation.
27. Main supply installations and other installations passing through one or more fire sectors are placed
in a way that prevent fire spread from one floor to the other or one fire sector to another.
28. No other installations can be placed in shafts for electrical cables.
29. Devices for fresh air must be designed in a way that they are automatically shut down when smoke
signal device or fire detectors are activated.
30. Devices for ventilation and air conditioning can easily be turned on from accesible place on the
ground floor.
LIGHTNING CONDUCTOR INSTALLATIONS12
1. This part will specify technical conditions for design, execution and maintenance of lighting
conductor installations, of standard practice. Detalis of solutions for specific cases are defined in
Technical conditions for lighting conductors
(Tehnickim propisima o gromobranima)
(Off.gaz.SFRJ, no.13/68) wil not be mentioned here since they are not part of this field.
2. In all buildings, except private housing, as main protection from lighting classical lighting
conductor installation must be executed in the from of Faradey cage. Yhis installation consists of
the following elements:

12

rods,
conducting installation,
conductors to the earthing,
Earthing.

Based on Book of regulations for technical regulations for lighting conductor (Off.gaz.SFRJ,no 13/68)

2007

Page 194 of 240

3. All elements that lighting installation consists of are standard and during design, construction and
maintenance must as such be used.
4. Lighting installations must be designed,executed and maintained in a way that enables:

safe conducting of lightning to the eart,

during conducting there must not be any transfre to any other metal parts,
LIGHTING RODS

1. Rods have to be placed in spots where there is the greatest possibility of lighting stirke.
2. Rods have to be executet as lines laid on special holders on the roof of the building in the from of
parallelogram and none of the sides can be longer than 20 m. Diverging from this provision are
special cases and are defined in Technical conditions for lighting conductros (Off.gaz.SFRJ,
no.13/68).
3. As materials for rods (except in special cases) hot galvanized steel strap of minimum section of
60 mm2, hot galvanized steel wire of the minimum section of 8 mm or metal parts of the roof with
minimum section of 50 mm2 and thickenss 0.5 mm.
4. Rods on wooden structures must be 15 cm away from the structure and placed on special holders
(support).
5. Rods on concrete roofs can be laid directly on the roof or on special holders (suport).
6. Rods on pitched roofs consist of one line on each ridge and conducting installation on edges all
the way to the gutters (eaves)
7. Rods like line are placed on roof supports at a maximum distance of 1.5 m and on suports on
the ridge at a distance of maksimum 1.0 m
8. Annex building must be protected with lighting conductor and buildings under annex are treated
as if the annex does not exist.
9. Rods can be connected to each other.
10. Roof holders of any kind (antennas, holders, etc.) must not be considered as rods even if
connected to lighting conductor.
11. Rooflines must be placed to from Faradey cage around the building.
12. As materials for roof lines (except in special cases) hot galvanized steel strap of minimum section
of 60 mm2, and hot galvanized steel wire of minimum section of 8 mm or metal parts of the roof
with minimum section 50 mm2 and thickness 0.5 mm.
13. When laying roof lines galvanic currents must be taken care of and corrosion when using
different materials, i.e. electrical chemical order of elements.
14. Aluminium and copper must be directlyconnected.
15. On copper roofs copper lines have to be used.
16. On galvanized roofs lines of bare copper wire are not permitted.
Conducting installation
1. Conducting installation is intended to provide shortest possible connection of the rod with
earhting.
2. Conducting installation should be located near the wery end of the building and as far as possible
from windows doors electrical installations and metals not connected to lighting conductor.
Actual distance should be defined based on diagram in Technical regulations for lighting
conductor (Off.gaz. SFRJ, no. 13/68) or based on the formula D=0,066 Ru+0,028L of these
regulations.

2007

Page 195 of 240

3. Number of conductors is determined in the following way:

for buildings of area up to 20 m2 only one conducto is sufficient,
for buildings of area from 20 to 50 m2 in addition to main conductor one more auxilary
conductor is required,
for buildings of area more than 50 m2 there must be at least two main conductors,
for buildings wider than 12 m there must be at least four conductors,
for buildings longer than 20 m, for each section of 20 m the following should be provided: for
building narrower than 12 m on one side and for buildings wider than 12 m on both sides one
more conductor should be added,
if the building is wider than 20 m, for each new 20 m one more conductor should be added,
If because of non- symmetrical plan it is not clear how many conductors should be placed they
should be placed on the at every 20 m of the perimeter of the plan.
4. Conductors can be main and auxilary. Main conductors are separately laid lines or things satisfyng
requirements of regulations. Auxilary are only things on the building wich satisfy required sections.
(Gutters, etc.).
5. The smallest section of bend of conducting installations is 200 mm and by direction change must be
less than the angle of 90.
6. Lines are laid on wall supports at a maximum distance of 2.0 m.
7. For reinforced concrete buildings reinforced should be used as main conductor. Continuous conductor
must be provided by laying round steel =8mm from rod to the foundation.
8. If conductor is laid under mortar they must be protected from corrosion or laid in insulation pipes.
9. Conductors must be supplied with measuring device accessible for measuring.
Conductors to the earthing
1. These are conductors connecting conducting installations from measuring device to the earthing.
2. Conductor must be of minimum section100 mm2 for strap of at least 3.5 mm thick or =10mm
for galvanized steel wire.
3. At the penetration spot into the ground conductor to the earthing has to be additionally protected
from corrosion on both sides of penetration.
4. Conductor to the earthing must have mechanical protection above the ground.
Earthing
1. For new buildings only foundation earthing can be used. For old buildings where foundation
earthing cannot be placed earthing mist be placed in the ground and can be surface earthing i.e.
horizontal (starp at 0.8 m under the ground) or deep earthing i.e. vertical (pipes of the minimum
section of =50 mm, or L-profiled 65x65x7 mm, of minimum length 3 m).
2. Distance of earthing and conductor to the earthing from electrical cables must be at least 3 m.
3. Crossing of cable and earthing should always be at angle and if distance of 3 m cannot be
provided earthing must be placed in insulation pipe insulating the earthing on the above-required
length.
4. In case there are several earthings in the buildings in they should all be connected together. The
same strap used for the earthing should be used for their connection. This includes conecting two
types of earthing (surface and deep) used for the same building when resistance of earthing
should be decreased.
5. Straps for earthing should be placed in the trench vertically on the narrow side to avoid earth
caving in under the strap and earth around the earthing should be clean of rocks and other
materials of high specific resistance. When placing earth around the earthing it must be stuffed in
layers until all dug earth is backfilled in the trench.
2007

Page 196 of 240

6. All metal parts up to 3 m around the earthing should be connected to it. All metal parts located
within 20 m from the earthing should be, if possible, connected to it.
7. Procedure for design and execution of earthing must include the following steps:
testing of specific resistance or earth by geological probing and defining layer of earth with
smallest specific resistance,
design of earthing taking care that earthing is palced in layers of smallest specific resistance,
including required calculations for resistance of earthing and its impact resistance,
playing strap in the trench, partial backfilling and preliminary check of resistance which
should confirm designed values of resistance or undertaking required activities to get these
values to proper level,
Final backfilling and final measuring of earthing resistance.
8. Buildings where many people gather should have earthing of at least two rings of earthing
surrounding the building and connected to each other.
9. Gas pipeline must not be used as earthing.
LIST OF GOVERNING LAWS, BOOK OF REGULATIONS, ORDERS AND STANDARDS
WHICH FULLY OR PARTLY DEFINE ISSUES RELATED TO ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS
All documents are listed by the order of importance. This means that laws are mentioned first,
then supporting institutions, orderds and decisions and standards are given at the end.

Laws
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Law on confirming institutions with the force of law (Off.gaz/RbiH, no.13/94.),

Law on standardizing (Off.gaz.RbiH, no.13/93 and 13/94 and 9/95.),
Law on measuring units and measures (Off.gaz.RbiH, no. 14/93, 9/95 and 13/94.),
Law ond psysical planning (improved version) (Off.gaz. SRBiH, no.9/87, 16/92,25/94 and 20/95.),
Law on fire protection (Off.gaz.SRBiH no.15/87,37/88,38/89,36/90.)
Law on protection at work (Off. Gaz. SRBiH, no. 16/92. And 13/94):

Book of regulations
1. Book of regulations about technical measures for devices with lighting tubes (Off.gaz.SFRJ,
no.14/67.),
2. Book of regulations about technical regulations for lightnig conductor (Off.gaz. SFRJ , no. 13/68.),
3. Book of regulstions about technical norms for construction of power supply lines above the ground
(only provisions referring to LV power supply lines of voltage up to 1 kV are govering) (
Off.gaz.SFRJ,no. 51/73, 69/73, 11/80, 36/86, 65/88),
4. Book of regulations about technical norms for protection of LV networks and related transformers
(Off.gaz.SFRJ, no. 13/78.),
5. Book of regulations about protection at work when using electric power (Off.gaz.SRBiH, no.
34/88),
6. Book of regulations about technical norms for stabile devices for fire extinguishing with carbon
dioxide. (Off. Gaz. SFRJ, no. 44/83.),
7. Book of regulations about technical norms for electric powered faade elevators (Off.gaz.SFRJ, no.
19/86.),
8. Book of regulations about technical norms for LV electrical installations (Off. Gaz. SFRJ, no.
53/88 and 54/88.),
9. Book of regulations about Yugoslav standards for electrical installations in buildings (Off.gaz.
SFRJ, no. 68/88.),

2007

Page 197 of 240

10. Book of regulations about technical norms for construction of power supply lines
atelekommunications cable lines above the ground (Off.gaz. SFRJ, no. 36/86.)
11. Book of regulations about technical norms for design, construction, powering and maintenance of gas
powered heating plants (Off.gaz.SFRJ, no. 10/98.),
12. Book of regilations about technical norms for fire protection of high-rise buildingas (Off.gaz. SFRJ,
no. 7/84.),
13. Book og regulations about technical norms for external and internal hydrant network for fire
extinguishing (Off.gaz. SFRJ, no. 30/91.),
14. Book of regulations about technical regulations for special fire protection of power supply facilites
(off.gaz. SFRJ, no. 74/90.),
15. Book of regulations about technical conditions for power supply (Off.gaz. SFRJ, no. 25/69.),
16. Book of regulations about technical norms for cable distribution systems and common antena systems
(Off.gaz.SFRJ, no. 66/87.),
17. Book of regulations about technical norms for shelters. (Off.gaz.SFRJ, no. 62/84.),
18. Book of regulations about technical norms for systems for smoke and heat ducting caused by fire
(Off.gaz. SFRJ, no. 45/83.),
19. Book of regulations about technical norms for devices for automatic shutting of fire proof door or
tops (Off.gaz.SFRJ, no. 35/80.),
20. Book of regulations about storage and nursing of heating oil (Off.gaz.SFRJ, no. 45/67.),
21. Book of regulations about minimum technical conditions for construction of apartments
(Off.gaz.SFRJ, no. 45/67.),
22. Book of regulations about detalis of contents of technical instructions which have to be provided for
all devices in the field of radio-communication, audio and video technique, intended for home use
(Off.gaz.SFRJ, no. 18/88.),
Orders
1. Order about obligatory quality certification of electrical devices for home use (Off.gaz.SFRJ, no. 43/88.),
2. Order about obligatory quality certification of device switches (Off. Gaz. SFRJ, no. 19/86.),
3. Order about obligatory quality certification of cable distribution and common antenna systems
(Off.gaz.SFRJ, no. 37/87.),
4. Order about obligatory quality certification of insulated power supply conductors and cables.
(Off.gaz.SFRJ, no. 43/88.),
5. Order about design and use of quality certification mark. (Off.gaz.|SFRJ,no. 4/79.),
6. Order about measures for protection of lines of electrical connections from electrical lines
(Off.gaz.SFRJ, no. 34/51, 6/52, 13/60, 24/67.),
7. Order about obligatory quality certification of products causing radio-frequency disturbances
(Off.gaz.SFRJ, no.63/81, 10/82, 49/84.),
8. Order about obligatory quality certification of electrical devices for home and similar use (Off.gaz.SFRJ,
no. 8/87.),
9. Order about obligatory quality certification of lampholders with coil (Off.gaz.SFRJ, no. 43/88.),
10. Order about obligatory quality certification of mobile devices with electromotors (Off.gaz.SFRJ, no.
43/88.),
11. Order about obligatory quality certification of dividing transformers and safety dividing transformers
(Off.gaz.SFRJ, no. 43/88.),
12. Order about determining products which can be sold only if equipped with warranty, technical
instructions and list of authorized servicing lacations and about shortest varranty period for those products
(Off.gaz.SFRJ, no. 5/78.),
13. Order about determining electrical medical devices and equipment which can be sold only if supplied
with warranty and technical instructions and about the shortest warranty period and period for provided
servicing for these devices and equipment (OFF.gaz.SFRJ, no.66/80.),
14. Order about determining electrical devices for home use which can be sold only if supplied with warranty
and technical instructions and about the shortest warranty period and period for provided servicing for these
devices (Off.gaz.SFRJ, no. 4/81.),
15. Order about determining device in the field of radio communications, electrical acoustics, registration and
reproduction of picture and sounds, intended for home use, which can be sold only if supplied whith warranty

2007

Page 198 of 240

and technical instructions and about the shortest warranty period and period for provided servicing for these
devices (Off.gaz.SFRJ, no. 9/81.).
Other normative documents
1. Plan for fire protection of city of \sarajevo (Official journal of city of Sarajevo, no. 27/81.),
2. Decision about city gas network (Off.gaz. Of city of Sarajevo, no.. 20/78 and 9/80),
3. Decision about applying foreign standards for gas in Sarajevo (Off.gaz. SFRJ, no.12/78.),
4. Decision about general technical conditions for design and construction of apartment buildings nd
apartments (Off.gaz. of city of Sarajevo, no. 21/87.),
5. Decision about shelters in municipality Centar in Sarajevo (Off.gaz. of city of Sarajevo, no. 17/87.),
6. Instructions about execution of telephone installations and inlets (PTT journal, no. 1/75.),
7. Recommendations for lighting of JKO.

TECHNICAL CONDITIONS
INSTALLATION

FOR

PERFORMANCE

OF

THERMO

TECHNICAL

Introduction
General Conditions document forms part of the Contract and it regulates relations that are in
immediate connection with the work performance quality. It regulates general deadlines, prices and
price modification modalities, penalties for non-performance of contractual obligations, guarantee
periods, defect removal liabilities, payment modalities, assignment to the third party, conditions for
temporary termination of works, final calculations and consequences of the Contract termination all
listed is a subject to the Contract on work execution.
General Conditions should form part of the technical documentation by which the woks are executed
and they are compulsory for both Employer and Contractor. Deviation from the stipulations contained
hereof, in the sense of quality decrease, is not allowed, since this might influence durability and
functionality of the plants.
During a final technical inspection of the works performed, the commission is obligated to respect
statements from this General Conditions document and to make a statement in respect of that in its
report.
Ignorance of the General Conditions content does not exempt the contractual parties from the
responsibilities contained hereof.
Definitions
Employer is a person that, under the Contract concluded with the Contractor, has ordered execution of
the works, which are the scope of the Contract. Employer can be Investor or General Contractor.
Contractor is a person that, under the Contract concluded with the Employer, has accepted the
responsibility of the execution of the works which are the scope of the Contract and that is registered
for the respective type of works..
Scope of the General Conditions is entire work, predicted by technical documentation and by the
Contract, as well as unforeseen and additional works.
Unforeseen works are the works which are not encompassed by technical documentation or by the
Contract, and which are to be executed.
Additional works are the works which are not predicted by technical documentation or not contracted,
and execution of which is demanded by the Employer.
Building Site is the land on which the works are executed and the land used by the Contractor for
execution of the works.

2007

Page 199 of 240

Rule of profession means actions, during the work execution, that are customary for technical practise
and legislation, and that are not opposite to the rules, standards and norms.
Technical documentation
Only technical documentation based on which Building Permit was issued, can be used for the work
execution. This documentation is to be prepared in accordance with all designing conditions and must
have all approvals required.
Employer must provide sufficient number of copies of technical documentation and place it at
Contractors and Supervisors disposal. One complete set of technical documentation, binded and
sealed, must be stored at the building site, for work execution consistency control.
Technical documentation prepared abroad, can be used for work execution only if it has been
subjected to technical control by the organisation authorised for preparation of the appropriate
documentation.
If several buildings are constructed by the same technical documentation, the said documentation is
accompanied by the documentation proofing that the design is adjusted to a specific location.
Before construction starts, Contractor is obliged to perform timely and detailed review of technical
documentation, by which the works are executed and to timely notify Employer about possible
defects of documentations or to ask for explanation of insufficiently clear details. Warning or
notification is deemed to be timely given or asked for if the Employer, under the influential
circumstances, is given enough time so he can act upon request, without stopping of the work
execution.
Employer is obliged to proceed in accordance with Contractors demand and to offer him written
explanation regarding the technical documentation in appropriate time. Employer is not obliged to
offer explanations in respect of technical documentation, if the documentation is provided or prepared
by the Contractor.
The Contractor does not have a right of modifying technical documentation or equipment predicted by
technical documentation. In the case that the Contractor notifications some defects in technical
documentation or thinks that the documentation should be modified, for its improvement or for other
reasons, he is obliged to timely notify the Employer about such defects. If the noticed defects
endanger safety, health, traffic or the buildings nearby, the Contractor will stop the works and take
actions for defect removal, until the defect is removed.
If Contracting Authority doesnt immediately remove defects he was notified about, the contractor is
obliged to inform the institution that issued the building permit, as well as an authorised inspection
about the said defect.
Employer is entitled to change technical documentation by which the works are executed. Employer
is obliged to ask for building permit modification, if, after building permit is issued, there are
modifications and supplementations of technical documentation made, which have significant impact
on purpose, structure, equipment, environment protection or stability, functionality, dimensions or
external appearance of the building.
Modifications of technical documentation might influence modification of contractual obligations
between the Employer and the Contractor.
Other Obligation of the Employer
Employer is obliged to handover to the Contractor sufficient number of copies of technical
documentation and original (or copy) of the building permit. Handover is registered in written in a
Building (Montage) Diary.
Employer is obliged to provide for the Contractor buildings for accommodation of workers and
equipment or land on which the Contractor will be able to place the facilities for accommodation of

2007

Page 200 of 240

workers and storage for material. Land or buildings must be located in a way that they dont disrupt
work execution.
Employer is obliged to inform the Contractor in written about the person responsible for contacts.
Employer is obliged to establish the way of access to the building site and to issue all possible
necessary documents.
Other Obligation of the Contractor
Contractor is obliged to appoint a construction manager and to provide written notification about that
appointment to the Employer and Supervising Body. This document forms part of the documentation
for technical acceptance of works.
Contractor is obliged to arrange the space for accommodation and rest of the workers, as well as for
their hygienic needs.
Contractor is obliged to arrange the space for storing the tools, material and equipment, which
prevents their theft, damage and ruination, due to unfavourable weather conditions.
Construction manager is obliged to prepare the list of workers involved in the work execution on a
daily basis. This list is delivered to the authorised body and written into the Building or Montage
Diary.
Contractor is obliged to take all measures for safety of the building and works, equipment and
material, workers, passer-bys, traffic and the buildings nearby.
Contractor is obliged to insure building site, workers and materials.
Contractor is obliged, through internal control, to ensure the building site in accordance with
stipulations stated hereof and technical documentation, standards, regulations and norms.
Contractor is obliged to ensure appropriate measures in respect of safety at work and fire-prevention,
and in that sense, appropriate body of the Contractor must deliver a written report to the Supervising
Body.
Contractor is obliged to maintain a Montage Diary, in which all important information and
agreements between the Designers, Supervising Body and the Contractors are recorded. The Diary
must be kept at the Building Site and available to the Supervising Body.
Contractor is obliged to prepare work execution time-table and to reconcile it with the other
contractors.
Contractor is obliged to adjust position of his installations to the other installations, for the purpose of
avoiding collision and additional works.
Quality of Material and Works
Contractor is obliged to install the material and equipment complying with the standards, i.e. those
having the attests (quality certificates), issued by expert organisation, and registered for material and
equipment testing, if there are not standards existing for that material. If necessary, the contractor is
obliged to perform appropriate material testing. If testing methods are not prescribed by technical
documentation or by technical regulations, they are established by the Contractor. Testing cost is at
the Contractors expense.
Contractor is responsible for warning the Employer about the defects noticed or determined on the
material and equipment predicted by technical documentation, as well as on the material and
equipment chosen or purchased by the Employer.
Material and equipment from the previous paragraph can be installed by the Contractor only if the
Employer, after being notified about the defects, requests installation of such material and equipment
and unless such material and equipment endanger building stability, peoples life, neighbouring
buildings, traffic and environment.

2007

Page 201 of 240

Contractor can install material and equipment of the quality equivalent or better than predicted and he
is responsible for its application.
If the Contractor does not perform the works in accordance with contractual technical documentation,
technical regulations and standards, as well as according to the codes of professional conduct, the
Employer is entitled to request termination of works, e.g. to request replacement of the material and
equipment with ones of appropriate quality. If such material and equipment endanger the building,
peoples life and nearby buildings, the Employer is entitled to request the Contractor to demolish all
works performed and to redo the works in appropriate way at the Contractors expense.
Contractor is responsible for providing quality certificates for the built-in material, equipment and the
works performed and to enable control by the Employer. If the employers control requires
discovering of some works or making openings, the Contractor shall do it and the control will be at
the Employers expense. Control cost also embraces all necessary ancillary works.
As an exemption to the previous paragraph, the Contractor shall bare the cost, if he omitted to enable
the Employers timely control of the works performed, built-in material and equipment, causing
additional cost that wouldnt otherwise exist.
All Contractors and Employers control findings are recorded in the Montage Diary. In case of
discrepancy between the findings of the Contractors control and the Employers control, additional
joint control shall be performed. Cost of that additional control shall go at the expense of the
contractual party, findings of which are not confirmed.
Contractor issues a written certificate that the works are performed in accordance with technical
documentation, regulations, standards and norms.
Materials and equipment provided by the Employer
If the Contract between the Contractor and the Employer stipulates that the Contractor installs
equipment and material provided by the Employer, the Contractor is obliged to store material and
equipment received from the Employer and to keep and maintain it until its installation.
Bearing of risk
Until the work handover, risk of accidental destruction and damage to the works, material and
equipment shall be borne by the Contractor. Employer bears the risk for the material and equipment
provided by it, until it is handed over to the Contractor.
After handover of the building and the works performed, the risk of accidental destruction and
damage shall be borne by the Employer.
Employers expert supervision
Employer is entitled to perform expert supervision of the Contractors works, in order to control and
ensure correct performance of the works, especially in respect of types, quantities and quality of
works, material and equipment, as well as of the deadlines set.
In order to perform expert supervision, the Employer is entitled to access to the building site,
workshops and material storages.
Expert supervision is performed by the organisation appointed by the Employer in written. The
Employer notifies the Contractor in written about the person or the organisation registered for these
activities, that are appointed to supervise, as well as about their authorities.
Contractor is obliged to enable performance of expert supervision by the Employer.
Supervision for the Employer, the Contractor and for the organisation registered for the contractors
work supervision can be performed only by the person who has employment arrangement with the
Employer, the Contractor or the organisation for expert supervision of work performance respectively.

2007

Page 202 of 240

Supervising body or service is obliged to, without delay send a written notification to the Contractor
about the objections in respect of work performance, built-in material and the equipment, or about the
work performance course and to register these objections into a montage diary.
Supervising body or service is obliged to control appropriate expertise certificates of the Contractors
workers, as well as the attests of equipment and to record it into the montage diary.
Supervising body or service is obliged to sign the montage diary regularly.
Contractor is obliged to proceed according to all grounded requests of the employer in respect of
expert supervision performance.
Supervising person or supervising body are not authorised to modify technical documentation, based
on which the works are executed, contract price or other contract provisions, or to contract with the
Contractor other works or to arrange with the Contractor other ownership and legal relationships,
unless is specially authorised by the Employer to do so.
Employer is obliged to inform the Contractor about the address of the supervision body or service.
Finishing works
Upon completion of the entire works or part of the works forming financial-technological entirety that
can be independently used as such, it is necessary to conduct all testing and functional tests. Before
putting in operation, technical inspection is conducted for checking of technical correctness of the
works performed.
The Employer or the Contractor submits the request for technical inspection to the competent
institution which has issued a building permit.
Condition for commencement of technical inspection is a positive opinion of the supervising body or
service.
Contractor is responsible for preparation of the as-built design, containing all deviations from the
technical documentation which occurred during construction.
Contractor is responsible for making available for inspection by the Technical acceptance
commission, of the entire contractors documentation, orderly set and signed. Documentation content
depends on the work type. Contractor is obliged to submit the same documentation, together with the
as-built design to the Employer.
Contractor is obliged to hand over to the Employer complete handling instructions for the installation
and equipment in question.
Upon the work completion, or upon the contract termination, the Contractor is responsible for
withdrawal of its workers from the site, remove remaining material, equipment and tools, as well as
constructed temporary facilities and to clean the building and the building site.

TECHNICAL
CONDITIONS
INSTALLATIONS

FOR

EXECUTION

OF

THERMOTECHNICAL

Introduction
This Technical Conditions document refers to construction of central heating installations with hot water.
While constructing central heating installations, the Contractor and the Employer are obliged to comply
with the conditions set bellow, in addition to the conditions regulated by the applicable technical
conditions.
Material and equipment
Type and quality of the heating bodies is determined by the Employer, with approval of thermal energy
distribution company, depending on the characteristics of the heating system to be installed (pressure and

2007

Page 203 of 240

temperature). Recommended type of radiators is a caste iron type, if meeting the needs for maximum
working pressure of the heating system. Selected type of radiator must comply with standards M. B6.
040, 050 and 051 and must have the attest on testing by one of the methods according to the M. B6. 081,
082 and 083. Heating bodies of other type (convectors, fen coils, ventilator convectors, pipe heating
bodies and other) can be installed only in case that they are based on the design and are properly attested.
Heating bodies with forced air motion must have a noise level that is below the level allowed for the
space of installation. This is confirmed by testing after putting installations in operation. Air motion
velocity in the zone of peoples residence (minimum 1.5m above the floor) must not exceed values
creating a sense of pleasance. Air motion velocity must be depending on the air temperature. Heating
bodies with forced circulation must have filters that can be easily cleaned.
In case of floor heating, pipe material must correspond to the designed temperature regime and testing
pressure. For the plastic pipes, there must be issued an attest on material structure stability and durability,
depending on operation condition. Minimum age of floor heating pipes is 50 years. Temperature of
heating fluid for the floor heating must not reach the level that causes unpleasant radiation from the base
and base deformation.
Material for installation pipes must to be in accordance with the following standards; C. B2. 225 for steel
pipes and C. D5.502 for copper pipes. In inaccessible rooms, installation of seamless pipes is compulsory.
Pipes serving for fluid transportation that are installed in a floor structure must be coated with plastic
mass. Thin-wall pipes must be used under conditions which meet maximum working pressure and
temperature.
Quality of the fittings for stopping the flow, regulation, compensation etc., must correspond to the
working temperature and pressure. That is to be confirmed with appropriate attest. Fittings of the heating
bodies must posses the following characteristics:
-

To enable a full flow blocking, for the purpose of heating body dismounting, under operation
conditions,

To enable regulation of flow to the constant value, without possibility of moving it by the user
during regular use (internal regulation).

Connection of thermostatic head and body of the valve must be achieved with thread for heating
body fittings serving for thermostatic regulation without supporting energy.

Gasket material in the valve (seats, screws) must meet its function under all working conditions
(it must not get deformed, stick to the seat etc.).

Thermostatic head coil force must be higher than differential pressure occurring in a closed
position.

Thermostatic head quality must enable maintaining of the pre-set air temperature in the room
with tolerance of 2 K, what must be proofed by attest.

Thermostatic head must have possibility to limit the design temperature without impact of the
user, as well as possibility to regulate to the lower values, according to the users preference.

Measurement and regulation fittings must be adjusted for connection of reading instruments and devices
and must possess appropriate data on flow characteristics and possibility of fixing the pre-set position.
Insulation material needs to posses good insulation characteristics unchangeable during exploitation.
Materials must not be hygroscopic or aggressive (alone or in interaction with water) to the base and
protective pipe material and insulation covers. In addition, insulation materials should be resistant to
temperature oscillations. They should also be light and durable under exploitation conditions, as well as
non-susceptible to rottening and decomposition.
Protection cover of thermal insulation must be of the quality enabling durability, permanent insulation
shape and resistance to the expected temperature and humidity. Use of loose insulation materials is not
allowed.
Storing
2007

Page 204 of 240

Equipment and material delivered to the site, until their installation, must be stored in a way that
guarantees that during the storing time, there will not be any damage to the equipment, material or their
parts. Special attention must be paid to the equipment or its parts which are sensitive to humidity or dust.
Stored equipment and material should be steadily sorted and accessible for control by external
supervising and other control service.
Montage
Montage of heating bodies is conducted by using sets of stands and hangers, according to the instructions
by producer of fixing items, depending on a building structure to be installed. Heating bodies must be
sufficiently fixed, not to change position even under bigger external load (150 kg).
Placement of the heating bodies with natural air circulation is done first on the side with the highest
intensity of cooling down (bellow the glass surfaces). Heating bodies can not be placed against the glass
surfaces, and if its inevitable, there must be thermal barriers having a heath transfer coefficient lower less
than the one prescribed for the external wall, as well as feature of heath radiation reflection feature.
Height of radiators should be adjusted to the wall height on which the radiator is placed. Distance
between floor and radiators is minimum 100 mm, and between wall and radiator is 50 mm. Distance
between radiator and upper wall edge is minimum 50 mm. If there are circulation barriers above the
radiators (sills), it is necessary to make corrections of thermal output. In that case, minimum distance
between radiator and barrier must be 100mm. The barriers must be perforated for circulation of warm air.
For recessed or masked radiators, it is necessary to make an output correction.
Position of heating bodies in relation to the external openings on the walls must not allow the situation
where the valve with thermostatic head is in the zone of a cold air circulating through a clearance. It is to
be assured that the heating body fittings must be protected against possible mechanical damage due to
movement, door opening etc.
Heating bodies in contact to the outside air must be protected against the damage due to water freezing.
Heating bodies, serving also as cooling bodies must be provided with a drainage of condensate generated
by air cooling.
Electricity connection to the heating bodies with forced air circulation must be fixed and placed in a
separate electrical circuit.
Heating body connection to the pipeline network must be with fall providing discharge of air in direction
of fluid flow, as well as complete emptying of the heating body and belonging installation. For air relief,
allowed is only use of air relief valves with manual service.
Heating bodies must have fittings enabling full blocking of flow and dismounting of the bodies under
operation. Heating bodies with natural air flow must posses the valves with thermostatic head. In the
rooms where more than one heating body is installed, a central temperature regulation by mean of spatial
thermostat and regulation body at the pipe is allowed. In addition to that, in such cases, possible is
temperature regulation through combination of certain number of thermostatic valves and the valves for
manual regulation, placed suitably.
Cast sand and other dirt must be splashed out from the cast iron heating bodies, before installation.
Splashing is done with cold water under pressure, after completion of sections and before bringing in the
building. For a good quality splashing, pipe extension with banded nozzle is to be used. Splashing quality
is approved by supervising body which must be present during the splashing. After splashing, heating
bodies are drained and plugged with plastic plugs. A minute is made on the heating body splashing.
Heating bodies must be cleaned of mud and other dirt before brought into the building.
Installation of radiator valves must enable a correct flow through a valve (inflow under a seat).
Installation is to be performed by producers instructions. In case of copper pipes, connection to a valve
should be achieved by mean of special joint and brass insert providing a good pipe shape, and
consequently a good tightening. Joints of fitting to a heating bodies and pipes must be visible and
accessible. After montage of radiator valves is completed, they must be protected against mechanical

2007

Page 205 of 240

shocks and dirt, by mean of paper wrapping and glue tape. Thermostatic head installation must be
performed immediately before warm pressure test and regulation.
Placement of copper pipes must be done in accordance with a design with prior cleanliness control. Pipes
are placed in a final floor layer, on a structural floor slab. On places where pipe is passing through a
threshold, it is to be protected with pipe conductors made of steel pipe DN 25, length 300 mm.
Connection of copper pipes to a steel pipeline section is made using a designed fittings, joints and brass
inserts. Protective 200 mm-wide insulation bands are placed into a floor above the pipe.
Pipes laid on a concrete slab are fixed with pipe clips. Pipes are to be temporary protected against
mechanical damage if a final floor layers are not placed immediately.
Vertical and horizontal piping made of steel pipes is connected by mean of autogenous welding with prior
preparation of pipes.
Pipe fixing is done using pipe clips with a rubber insert.
Before installation, pipes must be cleaned inside and outside. Inside cleaning is done with brush pulling
and hitting, and outside cleaning by mean of steel brushes. After cleaning, pipes are protected with anticorrosion protection. Pipe cleaning and anti-corrosion protection is controlled by a supervising body
which approves its installation.
Welding of steel pipes can be performed by certified welder. That is proved by a certificate, issued by an
authorised institution.
All pipe passages through walls must be performed using pipe conductors.
While placing a pipe through a floor structure, pipe conductors are placed. Their lower side is levelled
with a structure and upper side must be minimum 30mm higher that floor structure. Space between a
conductor and a pipe is stuffed with plastic putty, resistant to high temperature. Wearing of this material
due to a temperature dilatation of pipe must be prevented. Pipe conductors must be fixed to a structure
(welded to reinforcement).
Before installation, position of pipes for central heating must be adjusted to a position of other
installations and equipment. Pipes installed without a prior adjustment, which objectively disrupt
execution of other works or equipment placement and use, must be dislocated at a contractors expense.
Pipe position in relation to walls and to each other must be parallel and estheticaly satisfactory. Welded
joints must be estheticaly satisfactory. Support of pipe hangs placed into a wall and other structures must
be fixed, and pipe hangs must be of a diameter which enables a pipe movement.
At a connection of house installation to an external pipeline, compulsory is an installation of stopping
bodies and thermometers, as well as fittings for differential pressure measurement. This house set can
consist of thermal energy gauge, with a dirt catcher and other necessary equipment. One of stopping
elements must have possibility of flow regulation and must be placed in accessible space and protected
from unauthorised persons. Installation of thermal energy gauge should comply with special requirements
in respect of its installation. All equipment must be installed without strain in cold state. Strains
occurring during operation must not impact on tightening of joints or cause damage of the equipment.
All flange joints are made using klingerit. Quality and diameter of screws for fixing must correspond to
holes in flanges and must not stick out from a flange more than 15 mm.
Installation of instruments and sensors for control and measurement of fluid parameters should be
providing exact condition parameters. Replacement of instruments is to be possible without discharge of
working fluid.
Compensation of horizontal and vertical pipelines must be performed in accordance with the design,
taking account of the following:
- Pipe guides must be placed around a compensator,
- Maximum pipe movement at any point of a section must not exceed 30 mm,
- Prevention of a joint break and extensive strain at the breeches pipes,

2007

Page 206 of 240

- Supporting structures are to be used as fixing points.

Connections of heating bodies to pipelines must be sufficiently long, having a shape which prevents
connection damage and strain of fittings and heating bodies due to pipeline movements caused by thermal
dilatation.
All fittings on interior installations should be placed in the rooms which are permanently accessible for
interventions.
Each network branch must have stopping elements, out of which, one stopping element must be for
regulation.
All branches must have a possibility of water outlet, next to stopping fitting, on a side towards heating
bodies. These bleeds must be secured with special thread caps, for prevention of intervention by
unauthorised persons.
If there is a central air relief pipeline performed, on each vertical line installed is a stopping element, and
air relief pipeline is reduced to air relief vessel only. Air relief pipeline valve must be permanently
accessible and, in apartment buildings must be placed outside an apartment. Air relief vessel and required
fittings must be installed on accessible place.
Installation testing and splashing
Pressure test for testing tightening and strength is performed with cold water under pressure 30% higher
than maximum working pressure at the point of manometer and not lower than 4 bar at the lowest point of
a house installation. Duration of pressure test is 8 hours after test pressure establishment. When testing is
done under freezing conditions, it has to be taken into account to prevent pipeline damage. It is done by
water bleeding with pressing the water out of the pipeline if they cant be emptied by gravity. Pressing out
is done with air under pressure.
After testing pressure is established, connections of heating installations must be separated from a
water source or a pressure increase device. Pressure measurement instrument must be attested and sealed,
with indicating scale minimum 150mm, with marks showing maximum 0,2 bar. Installation tightening is
controlled by direct control of joints humidity.
Pressure test can be done in section, especially for one-pipe heating system.
Contractor and supervising body must prepare minutes on test, containing the following:
- record on the installation tested,
- test date,
- pressure and duration of test,
- description of pressure change during a test period,
- environment condition,
- status of compensation elements,
- names of responsible persons of a contractor and supervising body.
Warm test of installations is done under nominal working conditions in terms of pressure and fluid
temperature. Pipeline supports, compensator mobility, function of fittings, heating body function and air
relief etc. All this is recorded into a minutes, containing comment on a conditions noticed on above
mentioned (and other) elements.
After pressure test, splashing of installations id done by rapid water bleed at the lowest points of a
pipeline until satisfactory cleanness is obtained. Final splashing is done after warm pressure test. After
splashing, it is necessary to clean the screens in dirt catchers.
Regulation
Regulation of a heating installation means a flow regulation for entire installation by individual
installation branches and circulation circuits for one-pipe heating system, as well as temperature
regulation in heated rooms. Space temperature regulation is done by placement of thermostatic heads,

2007

Page 207 of 240

fixing of their position in a way which provides designed temperature. Temperature regulation must be
done only during heating season, disregard of the time of building handover and it is performed at the
outdoor air temperature lower than 5 C. If a building is handed over outside a heating season, a
contractor is obliged to perform a space temperature regulation later on. Regulation performed is
measured and recorded in a minute.
External protection of pipes and heating bodies
Damage to a anti-corrosion protection due to welding is to be repaired by repeated application, with prior
mechanical cleaning, if necessary.
All fittings must be painted with a paint resistant to temperature of heating fluid. Dirt must be removed
before painting.
Radiators and pipelines, that are not insulated, are painted with two coats of oil paint, resistant to a
working temperature, of the colour determined by a supervising body.
While radiator painting, it is compulsory to dismount all closing elements and air relief valves and to
close all openings.
Insulation
Pipelines passing through non-heated rooms must be insulated, as well as pipelines of diameter bigger
than DN 25 in a horizontal network passing through heated rooms, apart for those passing through
residential space. Pipeline insulation is performed after installation tests and anti-corrosion protection.
Allowed is use of profiled insulation with water-proof external wrapping resistant to mechanical damage.
Insulation must be quality connected at longitudinal and cross-sectional joints and must be aesthetically
well performed, especially on arches and ends.
Marking and schemes of installations
On a part of house installation, before exit from the building, it is necessary to place arrows on main
pipelines, showing working fluid flow direction.
On suitable place, close to a house sets, it is necessary to place a scheme, indicating a house set and main
pipelines. Scheme must contain capacity, nominal power, temperature and pressure of a system, as well as
measured quantity of flow on main branches, with regulation position marks for flow regulation.
Architectural-civil works
Concrete works are to be performed by regulations on concrete and reinforced concrete works. Contractor
is obliged to timely anticipate and make all openings in concrete elements. For one-pipe heating systems
it is necessary to ensure simultaneous placing of copper pipes and floor construction, in order to avoid
mechanical damage to pipes. Cement base must be minimum mark 20.

2007

Page 208 of 240

VOLUME 4
BILL OF QUANTITIES

2007

Page 209 of 240

I. PREAMBLE
Tenderers must price each item in the bill of quantities separately and follow the instructions regarding
the transfer of various totals in the summary.
The bill of quantities must be read with all the other contract documents and the Contractor shall be
deemed to have thoroughly acquainted himself with the detailed descriptions of the works to be done and
the way in which they are to be carried out. All the works must be executed to the satisfaction of the
Supervisor.
1.1. Quantity of items
The quantities set forth against the items in the bill of quantities are an estimate of the quantity of each
kind of the work likely to be carried out under the contract and are given to provide a common basis for
bids. There is no guarantee to the Contractor that he will be required to carry out the quantities of work
indicated under any one particular item in the bill of quantities or that the quantities will not differ in
magnitude from those stated.
When pricing items, reference should be made to the conditions of contract, the specifications and
relevant drawings for directions and descriptions of work and materials involved.
The quantities given in the bill of quantities are provisional and reflect the estimates made at the time of
approval to provide a basis for this dossier and tenders. Tenderers must consider every aspect of the
dossier carefully.
Any comments concerning the quantities must be made in the form of an attachment, following the
system of itemisation, quoting the codes and brief descriptions, as in the present documents, including the
rates and prices.
Save where the technical specifications or the bill of quantities specifically and expressly state otherwise,
only permanent works are to be measured. Works will be measured net to the dimensions shown on the
drawings or ordered in writing by the Supervisor, save where described or prescribed elsewhere in the
contract.
In adjusting extras or variations on the contract, works will be measured on the same basis as that on
which the quantities were prepared. All works not specifically mentioned in the bill of quantities will be
taken as included in the prices of various items.
Where, in the opinion of the Supervisor, extra works cannot be properly measured or valued, the
Contractor may, if so directed by the Supervisor, carry out the work at the daywork rates shown in the
schedule of daywork. All completed daywork sheets must be signed by the Supervisor on or before the
end of the week in which the works are executed.
No allowance will be made for loss of materials or volume thereof during transport or compaction.
1.2. Units of measurement
The units of measurement used in the annexed technical documentation are those of the International
System of Units (SI). No other units may be used for measurements, pricing, detail drawings etc. (Any
units not mentioned in the technical documentation must also be expressed in terms of the SI.)
Abbreviations used in the bill of quantities are to be interpreted as follows:
mm
m
mm
2007

means millimetre
means metre
means square millimetre
Page 210 of 240

m
m
kg
to
pcs
h
L.s.
km
l
%
N.d
m/m
m/d

means
means
means
means
means
means
means
means
means
means
means
means
means

square metre
cubic metre
kilogram
tonne (1000 kg)
pieces
hour
Lump sum
kilometre
litre
per cent
nominal diameter
man-month
man-day

II. TERMS RELATING TO PAYMENTS

The method for measuring completed works for payment must be in accordance with Clause X of the
Special Conditions (net measurement), save where Section II, "Description of the items of the bill of
quantities" provides otherwise.
The provisional sums in the bill of quantities must be used in whole or in part at the discretion of the
Supervisor.
Each item in the bill of quantities for which payment is to be made in a lump sum, and for which no
payment schedule is provided, must be paid after the work covered by the lump sum has been completed
to the satisfaction of the Supervisor.
III. PRICING
The prices and rates inserted in the bill of quantities are to be the full inclusive values of the works
described under the items, including all costs and expenses which may be required in and for the
construction of the works described together with any temporary works and installations which may be
necessary and all general risks, liabilities and obligations set forth or implied in the documents on which
the tender is based. It will be assumed that establishment charges, profit and allowances for all obligations
are spread evenly over all the unit rates.
The rates and prices tendered in the priced bill of quantities will be quoted at the rates current prior to the
date of submission.
Rates and prices must be entered against each item in the bill of quantities. The rates will cover all tax,
duty or other liabilities which are not stated separately in the bill of quantities and the tender.
IV. TAXES
Not applicable.
V. COMPLETING THE BILL OF QUANTITIES
In the bill of quantities, rates and prices will be entered in the appropriate columns in euro or national
currency.
Errors will be corrected as follows:
a)

2007

where there is a discrepancy between amounts in figures and in words, the amount in words
will prevail; and

Page 211 of 240

b)

where there is a discrepancy between the unit rate and the total amount derived from the
multiplication of the unit price and the quantity, the unit rate as quoted will prevail.

VI. DESCRIPTION OF UNIT PRICES

The tables that follow give the description of the rates (or unit prices) by using the relevant clauses of
Volume 3 (Technical specifications).

Summary

Description

Amount
EUR

Bill
A
B
C
Provisional sum/Contingencies
(8-15% of the above)
SUBTOTAL
TENDER TOTAL

2007

Page 212 of 240

VOLUME 5
DESIGN DOCUMENTS, INCLUDING DRAWINGS

2007

Page 213 of 240

Section 5.1
List of drawings attached
No

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

2007

Name

Book 2 Architectural Design

Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Basement-Existing Status
Scl. 1:100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Existing Plan Plan of Demolition
Scl. 1:100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
First Floor
Scl. 1:100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Second Floor
Scl. 1:100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Third Floor
Scl. 1:100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Attic
Scl. 1:100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Plan of Roof
Scl.1:100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Cross Sections
Scl. 1:100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Basement
Scl. 1:100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Ground Floor
Scl. 1:100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
First Floor
Scl. 1:100

Page 214 of 240

Drawing No

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.7

1.8

1.9

1.10

2.1

2.2

2.3

No

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21

22.

23.

2007

Name

Book 2 Architectural Design

Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Second Floor
Scl. 1:100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Third Floor
Scl. 1:100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Attic
Scl 1:100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Plan of Roof
Scl. 1:100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Cross Sections
Scl. 1: 100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Attic, Cross Section
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Faade
Scl. 1:100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Detail "a"
Scl.1:20
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Detail "b"
Scl. 1:20
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Detail "c"
Scl. 1:20
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Detail "d"
Scl. 1:20
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Detail "e"
Scl. 1:20

Page 215 of 240

Drawing No

2.4

2.5

2.6

2.7

2.8

2.9

2.10

2.11.2

2.11.3

2.11.4

2.11.5

2.11.6

No

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

32.

33.

34.

2007

Name

Book 2 Architectural Design

Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Detail "f"
Scl. 1:20
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Detail "g"
Scl. 1:20
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Detail "h"
Scl. 1:20
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Detail "i"
Scl. 1:20
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Detail of Platform in Court of Ground Floor
Scl. 1:20
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Detail of Floor in Annex of Ground Floor
Scl. 1:20
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Detail of Floor and Wall in Basement
Scl. 1:20
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
S3-Detail of the Steel Stairs with the Fence, Ground
Floo First Floor
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
S1-Detail RC Stairs with the Fence, Basement
Ground Floor
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
S2-Detail RC Stairs with the Fence, Basement
Ground Floor
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Detail of Construction Kiosk
Scl. 1:50

Page 216 of 240

Drawing No

2.11.7

2.11.8

2.11.9

2.11.10

2.11.11

2.11.12

2.11.13

2.11.14

2.11.15

2.11.16

2.11.17

No

35.

36.

37.

38.

39.

40.

41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.

2007

Name

Book 2 Architectural Design

Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Detail of Construction Elevator
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Details the Bridge
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Details of Platforms
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Plan of Covering Ceramic Tiles Attic
Scl. 1:100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Plan of Ceilings in Court of Ground Floor
Scl.1:100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Scheme of Joinery, Locksmiths Items
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.1, Pos. 2
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.3, Pos. 4
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.5, Pos. 6
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.7, Pos. 8
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.9, Pos. 10
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.11, Pos. 12
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.13, Pos. 14
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.15, Pos. 16

Page 217 of 240

Drawing No

2.11.18

2.11.19

2.11.20

2.11.21

2.11.22

2.12.0

2.12.1
2.12.2
2.12.3
2.12.4
2.12.5
2.12.6
2.12.7
2.12.8

No

49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.

2007

Name

Book 2 Architectural Design

Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.17, Pos. 18
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.18a, Pos. 18b
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.19, Pos. 20
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.21, Pos. 22
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.23, Pos. 24
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.25
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.26
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.27, Pos. 27a
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.27b, Pos. 27c
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.27d, Pos. 27e
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.27f, Pos. 27g
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.27h, Pos. 27i
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.27j, Pos. 27k
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.27l, Pos. 28
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.29, Pos. 29a
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.30, Pos. 30a

Page 218 of 240

Drawing No

2.12.9
2.12.10
2.12.11
2.12.12
2.12.13
2.12.14
2.12.15
2.12.16
2.12.17
2.12.18
2.12.19
2.12.20
2.12.21
2.12.22
2.12.23
2.12.24

No

65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.

79.

2007

Name

Book 2 Architectural Design

Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.30b, Pos.31
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.32, Pos. 33
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos.34, Pos. 35
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos. 36, Pos. 37
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos. 37a , Pos. 37b
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos. 37c, Pos. 38
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos. 1, Pos. 2
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos. 3, Pos. 4
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos. 4a, Pos.5
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos. 6, Pos. 7
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos. 8, Pos. 9
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos. 10, Pos. 11
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos. 12, Pos. 13
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.1 Main Architectural Design
Pos. 14
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Disposition of visual communication in space Basement
Scl. 1:200

Page 219 of 240

Drawing No

2.12.25
2.12.26
2.12.27
2.12.28
2.12.29
2.12.30
2.12.31
2.12.32
2.12.33
2.12.34
2.12.35
2.12.36
2.12.37
2.12.38

2.2.1

No

80.

81.

82.

83.

84.

85.

86.

87.

88.

89.

90.

2007

Name

Book 2 Architectural Design

Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Disposition of visual communication in space
Ground floor
Scl. 1:200
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Disposition of visual communication in space First
Floor
Scl. 1:200
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Disposition of visual communication in space
Second Floor
Scl. 1:200
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Disposition of visual communication in space Third
Floor
Scl. 1:200
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Disposition of visual communication in space Attic
Scl. 1:200
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Central Information Board
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Floor wall information board - Basement
Scl. 1:200
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Floor wall information board
Ground Floor
Scl. 1:200
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Floor wall information board First Floor
Scl. 1:200
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Floor wall information board Second
Floor
Scl. 1:200
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Floor wall information board Third
Page 220 of 240

Drawing No

2.2.2

2.2.3

2.2.4

2.2.5

2.2.6

3.

4.2.1

4.2.2

4.2.3

4.2.4

4.2.5

No

Name

Drawing No

Floor
Scl. 1:200
91.

92.

93.

94.

95.

96.

97.

98.

99.

100.

101.

102.

2007

Book 2 Architectural Design

Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Floor wall information board Attic
Scl. 1:200
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Freestanding lighting Box-totem display
Scl. 1:100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Central Information Table 160x110
Scl. 1:100
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Floors Wall Information Board 110x80
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Notice Boards
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Nameplates of Indication of Rooms
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Walls Pictograms 15x15
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Wall direction posts 30x10cm (pg 7)
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Wall direction posts 30x10cm (pg 8)
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Wall direction posts 30x10cm (pg 9)
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Wall direction posts 30x10cm (pg 10)
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Page 221 of 240

4.2.6

5.1

5.2

5.3

5.4

5.5

5.6

5.7

5.7

5.7

5.7

5.7

No

Name

Drawing No

Wall direction posts 30x10cm (pg 11)

Scl. 1:50
103.

104.

105.

106.

107.

108.

109.

110.

111.

112.

2007

Book 2 Architectural Design

Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Wall direction posts 30x10cm (pg 12)
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Wall pictograms 30x30cm (pg 13)
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Wall direction posts 30x30cm (pg 14)
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Hanging Direction Posts 30x30cm
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Hanging Pictograms and Wall Direction Posts
90x30cm (pg 16)
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Hanging Pictograms and Wall Direction Posts
90x30cm (pg 17)
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Hanging Pictograms and Wall Direction Posts
90x30cm (pg 18)
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Hanging Pictograms and Wall Direction Posts
120x30cm (pg 19)
Scl. 1:50
Book 2 Architectural Design
Book 2.3. Design of Visual Communication
Hanging Pictograms and Wall Direction Posts
120x30cm (pg 20)
Scl. 1:50
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Stairway 1-Formwork plan
Scl. 1:50

Page 222 of 240

5.7

5.6

5.7

5.10

5.11

5.11

5.11

5.11

5.11

4.

No

113.

114.

115.

116.

117.

118.

119.

120.

121.

122.

123.

124

2007

Name

Book 3 Structural Part

Book 3.1 RC Structure
Stairway 2-Formwork plan
Scl. 1:50
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
New elevator-Formwork plan
Scl. 1:50
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Existing elevator, heightening Formwork plan
Scl. 1:50
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Attic,beams and string courses-Formwork plan
Scl. 1:50
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Attic,beams and string courses-Formwork plan
Scl. 1:50
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Stairway 1-Details of new structure with the existing
structure Formwork plan
Scl. 1:50
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Stairway 2-Details of new structure with the existing
structure Formwork plan
Scl. 1:50
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Stairway 1-Reinforcement plan
Scl. 1:50
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Stairway 2-Reinforcement plan
Scl. 1:50
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
New elevator Reinforcement plan
Scl. 1:50
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Passage reinforcement plan
Scl. 1:50
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Existing elevator, heightening reinforcement plan
Page 223 of 240

Drawing No

5.

6.

7.

8.1

8.2

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

No

Name

Drawing No

Scl. 1:50

125.

126.

127.

128.

129.

130.

131.

132.

133.

134.

135.

136.

2007

Book 3 Structural Part

Book 3.1 RC Structure
Attic, beams and string courses reinforcement plan
Scl. 1:50
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Attic, beams and string courses reinforcement plan
Scl. 1:50
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Reinforcement specification and recapitulation
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Reinforcement specification and recapitulationStairway 1
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Reinforcement specification and recapitulationStairway 1
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Reinforcement specification and recapitulationStairway 2
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Reinforcement specification and recapitulationStairway 2
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Reinforcement specification and recapitulation-New
elevator
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Reinforcement specification and recapitulation-New
elevator
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Reinforcement specification and recapitulationPassage
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Reinforcement specification and recapitulationExisting elevator - heightening
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Page 224 of 240

16.1

16.2

17.1

17.2

17.3

17.4

17.5

17.6

17.7

17.8

17.9

17.10

No

Name

Drawing No

Reinforcement specification and recapitulationExisting elevator - heightening

137.

138.

139.

140.

141.

142.

143.

144.

145.

146.

147.

148.

2007

Book 3 Structural Part

Book 3.1 RC Structure
Reinforcement specification and recapitulation-Attic,
beams and string courses
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Reinforcement specification and recapitulation-Attic,
beams and string courses
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Reinforcement specification and recapitulation-Attic,
beams and string courses
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.1 RC Structure
Reinforcement specification and recapitulationRecapitulation reinforcement
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Composition of steel structure
Scl. 1:100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Part A Frame 1
Scl. 1:100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Part A Frame 2
Scl. 1:100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Part A Frame 3
Scl. 1:100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Part A Frame 4
Scl. 1:100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Part A Frame 5
Scl. 1:100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Part A Frame 6
Scl. 1:100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Page 225 of 240

17.11

17.12

17.13

17.14

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

No

Name

Drawing No

Part A Frame 7
Scl. 1:100
149.

150.

151.

152.

153.

154.

155.

156.

157.

158.

159.

160.

2007

Book 3 Structural Part

Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Part A Frame 8
Scl. 1:100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Steel beam for supporting frames 3 and 4
Scl. 1:100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Roofing bond between the frames 2 and 3
Scl. 1:100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Roofing bond between the frames 5 and 6
Scl. 1:100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Roof and faade horizontals
Scl. 1:100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Dio B-Ram 1 / Part B-Frame 1
Scl. 1: 100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Dio B-Ram 2 / Part B-Frame 2
Scl. 1: 100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Dio B-Ram 3 / Part B-Frame 3
Scl. 1: 100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Dio B-Ram 4 / Part B-Frame 4
Scl. 1: 100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Dio B-Ram 5 / Part B-Frame 5
Scl. 1: 100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Dio B-Ram 6 / Part B-Frame 6
Scl. 1: 100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Page 226 of 240

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

No

161.

162.

163.

164.

165.

166.

167.

168.

169.

170.

171.

2007

Name

Steel beam for supporting frames 2 and 3, roof and

faade horizontal
Scl. 1: 100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Roofing bond between the frames 1 and 2
Scl. 1: 100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Roofing bond between the frames 5 and 6
Scl. 1: 100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Details of purlin support
Scl. 1: 100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Ceiling on elevation +0,144
Scl. 1: 100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Ceiling on elevation +18,570
Scl. 1: 100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Platform 1
Scl. 1: 100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Platform 2
Scl. 1: 100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Stairway
Scl. 1: 100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
New elevator
Scl. 1: 100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
New elevator
Scl. 1: 100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Recapitulation
Scl. 1: 100

Page 227 of 240

Drawing No

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

32.1

32.2

32.3.1

No

172.

173.

174.
175.
176.
177.
178.

179.

180.

181.

182.

183.

184.

2007

Name

Book 3 Structural Part

Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Recapitulation
Scl. 1: 100
Book 3 Structural Part
Book 3.2 Steel Structure
Recapitulation
Scl. 1: 100
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Diagram of new power supply cables
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram GRT/M, GRT, GRT/N upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation
Single line diagram RT-S1 - upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-S3 - upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-S4 - upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RT-KOT
(pg 1)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RT-KOT
(pg 2)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RT-KOT
(pg 3)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RT-KOT
(pg 4)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RT-KOT
(pg 5)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RT-KOT
(pg 6)

Page 228 of 240

Drawing No

32.3.2

32.3.3

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.1

6.2

6.3

6.4

6.5

6.6

No

185.

186.

187.

188.

189.

190.

191.

192.

193.
194.
195.
196.
197.

2007

Name

Book 4 Main Electrical Design

Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RT-KOT
(pg 7)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RT-KOT
(pg 8)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RT-KOT
(pg 9)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RT-KOT
(pg 10)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RT-KOT
(pg 11)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RT-KOT
(pg 12)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RT-KOT
(pg 13)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RT-KOT
(pg 14)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
View of distribution board RT-KOT
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-P1- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-P2- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-P3- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-P4- upgrade

Page 229 of 240

Drawing No

6.7

6.8

6.9

6.10

6.11

6.12

6.13

6.14

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

No

198.
199.
200.
201.
202.
203.
204.
205.
206.
207.
208.
209.
210.
211.
212.
213.

2007

Name

Book 4 Main Electrical Design

Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-P5- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-P6- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-P7- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-I2- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-I3- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-I4- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-I5- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-I6- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation
Single line diagram RT-I7- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-I8- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-II1- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-II2- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-II3- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-II4- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-II5- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-III1- upgrade

Page 230 of 240

Drawing No

12
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.

No

214.
215.
216.
217.
218.
219.
220.
221.
222.

223.

224.

225.

226.

227.

2007

Name

Book 4 Main Electrical Design

Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-III2- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-III3- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-III4- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 1)
Single line diagram RT-III5- upgrade
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram RT-IV1
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram RT-IV2
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram RT-IV3
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram RT-IV4
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram RT-IV5
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 2)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 3)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 4)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 5)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 6)

Page 231 of 240

Drawing No

28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.

37.2

37.3

37.4

37.5

37.6

No

228.

229.

230.

231.

232.

233.

234.

235.

236.

237.

238.

239.

2007

Name

Book 4 Main Electrical Design

Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 7)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 8)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 9)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 10)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 11)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 12)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 13)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 14)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 15)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 16)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 17)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 18)

Page 232 of 240

Drawing No

37.7

37.8

37.9

37.10

37.11

37.12

37.13

37.14

37.15

37.16

37.17

37.18

No

240.

241.

242.

243.

244.

245.

246.

247.

248.

249.

250.

251.

2007

Name

Book 4 Main Electrical Design

Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 19)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 20)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 21)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 22)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 23)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 24)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 25)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 26)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 27)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 28)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 29)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 30)

Page 233 of 240

Drawing No

37.19

37.20

37.21

37.22

37.23

37.24

37.25

37.26

37.27

37.28

37.29

37.30

No

252.

253

254.

255.

256.

257.

258.
259.
260.
261.
262.

263.

264.

2007

Name

Book 4 Main Electrical Design

Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 31)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 32)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 33)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 34)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 35)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Single line diagram and wiring diagram RO
KLIMA (pg 36)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
View of distribution board RO - KLIMA
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Automatic regulations plan (pg 1)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Automatic regulations plan (pg 2)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Automatic regulations plan (pg 3)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Automatic regulation plan (pg 4)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Lighting Installation Legend
(pg 1 to 4)
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Basement Lighting Installation
Scl. 1:100

Page 234 of 240

Drawing No

37.31

37.32

37.33

37.34

37.35

37.36

38.
39.1
39.2
39.3
39.4

40

41.

No

265.

266.

267.

268.

269.

270.

271.

272.

273.

274.

275.

2007

Name

Book 4 Main Electrical Design

Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Groundfloor Lighting Installation
Scl. 1:100
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
First floor Lighting Installation
Scl. 1:100
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Second Floor Lighting Installation
Scl. 1:100
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Third Floor Lighting Installation
Scl. 1:100
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
ATTIC Lighting Installation
Scl. 1:100
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Basement Socket installation technological outlets
and cable route
Scl. 1:100
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Ground floor Socket installation technological
outlets and cable route
Scl. 1:100
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
First floor Socket installation technological outlets
and cable route
Scl. 1:100
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Second floor Socket installation technological
outlets and cable route
Scl. 1:100
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Third floor Socket installation technological outlets
and cable route
Scl. 1:100
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
ATTIC Socket installation technological outlets and
cable route
Page 235 of 240

Drawing No

42.

43.

44.

45.

46.

47.

48.

49.

50.

51.

52.

No

Name

Drawing No

Scl. 1:100

276.

277.
278.

279.

280.

281.

282.

283.

284.

285.

286.

287.

2007

Book 4 Main Electrical Design

Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
ATTIC-Cable Route
Scl. 1:100
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Detail of equipotential Bonding
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.1 Design of Power Electrical Installation (part 2)
Fire protection of cable run
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
Basement Telephone and computer installation
Scl. 1:100
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
Ground floor Telephone and computer installation
Scl. 1:100
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
First floor Telephone and computer installation
Scl. 1:100
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
Second floor Telephone and computer installation
Scl. 1:100
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
Third floor Telephone and computer installation
Scl. 1:100
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
ATTIC Telephone and computer installation
Scl. 1:100
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
Disposition of the communication Racks and there
connection
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
Basement Fire Alarm System
Scl. 1:200
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
Ground floor Fire Alarm System
Scl. 1:200

Page 236 of 240

53.

54.
55.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

No

288.

289.

290.

291.

292.

293.

294.

295.

296.

297.
298.
299.
300.

2007

Name

Book 4 Main Electrical Design

Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
First floor Fire Alarm System
Scl. 1:200
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
Second floor Fire Alarm System
Scl. 1:200
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
Third floor Fire Alarm System
Scl. 1:200
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
ATTIC Fire Alarm System
Scl. 1:200
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
Block Scheme of fire alarm system
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
Basement CCTV system
Scl. 1:200
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
Ground floor Access control system, CCTV system,
Calling system
Scl. 1:200
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
First floor Access control system, CCTV system,
Calling system
Scl. 1:200
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
ATTIC CCTV system
Scl. 1:200
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
Block scheme of access control system
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
Block scheme of CCTV system
Book 4 Main Electrical Design
Book 4.2 Design of Feeble Current Installation
Block scheme of calling system
Book 5 Main Mechanical Design
Radiator Batteries and Pipeline Distribution

Page 237 of 240

Drawing No

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.
20.
21.
1.

No

Name

Drawing No

Basement
Scl. 1:100
301.
302.
303.

304.

305.

306.

307.

308.

309.

310.
311.

312.

313.

2007

Book 5 Main Mechanical Design

Radiator Batteries Ground floor
Scl. 1:100
Book 5 Main Mechanical Design
Radiator Batteries First floor
Scl. 1:100
Book 5 Main Mechanical Design
Radiator Batteries Second floor
Scl. 1:100
Book 5 Main Mechanical Design
Radiator Batteries and Air Relief Pipeline Third
floor
Scl. 1:100
Book 5 Main Mechanical Design
Radiator Batteries ATTIC
Scl. 1:100
Book 5 Main Mechanical Design
Scheme of Riser Pipelines Radiator Batteries at the
Attic floor
Scl. 1:100
Book 5 Main Mechanical Design
Arrangement of Equipment for Cooling and
Ventilation Ground floor
Scl. 1:100
Book 5 Main Mechanical Design
Arrangement of Equipment for Cooling and
Ventilation First floor
Scl. 1:100
Book 5 Main Mechanical Design
Arrangement of Equipment for Cooling and
Ventilation Second floor
Scl. 1:100
Book 5 Main Mechanical Design
Arrangement of Equipment for Ventilation ATTIC
Scl. 1:100
Book 5 Main Mechanical Design
Arrangement of Equipment for Cooling ATTIC
Scl. 1:100
Book 5 Main Mechanical Design
Base plan and cross sections of ventilation and
cooling equipment
Scl. 1:100
Book 5 Main Mechanical Design
Schemes of Automatic Regulation
Scl. 1:100

Page 238 of 240

2.
3.
4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.
12.

13.

14.

No

314.

315.

316.

317.

318.

319.

320.

321.

322.

323.

324.

325.

2007

Name

Book 6. Main Design of Interior Sewage and Water

Supply
Ground Installations Cadaster
Scl. 1:500
Book 6. Main Design of Interior Sewage and Water
Supply
Basement Layout
Scl. 1:100
Book 6. Main Design of Interior Sewage and Water
Supply
Ground Floor Layout
Scl. 1:100
Book 6. Main Design of Interior Sewage and Water
Supply
I Floor Layout
Scl. 1:100
Book 6. Main Design of Interior Sewage and Water
Supply
II Floor Layout
Scl. 1:100
Book 6. Main Design of Interior Sewage and Water
Supply
III Floor Layout
Scl. 1:100
Book 6. Main Design of Interior Sewage and Water
Supply
ATTIC Layout
Scl. 1:100
Book 6. Main Design of Interior Sewage and Water
Supply
Roof Layout
Scl. 1:100
Book 6. Main Design of Interior Sewage and Water
Supply
Faecal vertical main pipes scheme
Scl. 1:100
Book 6. Main Design of Interior Sewage and Water
Supply
Potable water mains-sheme/1
Scl. 1:100
Book 6. Main Design of Interior Sewage and Water
Supply
Potable water mains-sheme/2
Scl. 1:100
Book 6. Main Design of Interior Sewage and Water
Supply
Firefighting water mains sheme
Scl. 1:100

Page 239 of 240

Drawing No

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

No

326.

327.
328.
329.
330.
331.

2007

Name

Book 6. Main Design of Interior Sewage and Water

Supply
Water supply network horiz. Isometric sheme
Scl. 1:100
Book 6. Main Design of Interior Sewage and Water
Supply
Detail of fixed water pipe
Book 6. Main Design of Interior Sewage and Water
Supply
Detail of flume
Book 6. Main Design of Interior Sewage and Water
Supply
Fire-fighting hydrant
Book 6. Main Design of Interior Sewage and Water
Supply
Plant sheme
Book 6. Main Design of Interior Sewage and Water
Supply
Hydrosvere-sheme

Page 240 of 240

Drawing No

16.

17a.1
17e.2
17c.3
17.a.4
17.e.5